Home

EasyLabel Documentation

Contents

1. Western Telematic Switchbox 161a Dip Switches Western Telematic Switch Box Printer Assignments If a third CAS 41 Code Activated Switch is connected to the PC above printer assignments would be 9 through 12 The same would be true for the CAS 161A where the first switch box would go to Printers 1 through 16 the second switch box would go to Printers 17 through 32 and if a third switch box is connected it would go to Printers 33 through 48 Ovation and Ovation 2 9 Pin Cable Configuration Ovation and Ovation 2 25 Pin Cable Configuration 198 Printing Western Telematic Switchbox 41 41a 161a Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switchbox 81c Cable Configuration BACK to TOP Fargo Notes RS 232 Communications MaxiCode RS 232 Communications e Data Bits 8 e Stop Bits 1 e Parity None e Handshake RTS CTS on Print MaxiCode When using MaxiCode with Fargo printers that support it data must be entered in the following format CCCSSS ZZZZZXXxXX data Where CCC Country Code SSS Service Code ZZZZZXXXX Zip Code 4 Digit Extension optional Must be enclosed in signs data Alphanumeric Data maximum length 84 characters Example 199 Printed Documentation 123999 442120798 This is an example BACK to TOP HP HP Setup Printer Model Type of Port Direct Print Printer Memory ei Printer Name The Printer Name parameter is optional You may specify a name to
2. 3 All 65 536 Unicode characters i e character values 0 to 65 535 per Unicode 2 0 and Unicode 2 1 4 Three non data function characters 5 Four combinations of Start and Stop characters Symbology Type Continuous edge to similar edge decodable Elements per Symbol Character 6 elements comprising 3 bars and 3 spaces each of 1 2 3 or 4 modules in width Stop character 7 elements comprising 4 bars and 3 spaces Character Self checking No Symbol Length Variable Bidirectionally Decodable Yes Symbol Check Characters 2 check characters or 6 Reed Solomon error correction characters Data Character Density 5 4 modules per numeric character 9 modules per symbol character for alphanumeric data 13 5 modules per byte 27 modules per Unicode character Non data Overhead 334 Bar Code Information Equivalent of 38 modules including check characters or Equivalent of 91modules including error correction characters ECI Protocol Support Yes Special Features Error correction reader initialization linked sequencing and associated data carrier indication Examples Codabar History and Overview Codabar is a binary level barcode originally developed by Monarch Marking in 1972 It is also called NW 7 because all Codabar characters are constructed from four bars and the three intervening spaces It is a self checking discrete symbology having 16 characters in its set the numbers 0 to 9 and the characters
3. The smallest 1 layer Aztec Mesa encodes up to 18 numeric or 15 alphabetic characters or 8 bytes of data The largest 32 layer Aztec Mesa encodes up to 953 numeric or 764 alphabetic characters or 474 bytes of data Wider host symbols support Mesas with larger capacities The absolute maximum Mesa capacity is 3070 numeric or 2457 alphabetic characters or 1533 bytes of data and it requires a host symbol about 500X wide e g 84 digit Code 128 Selectable Error Correction 356 Bar Code Information Recommended level is 23 of Mesa capacity plus 3 codewords User selectable from 5 to 95 of Mesa capacity Code Type Matrix Orientation Independent Yes Additional Features a Choice of Host Symbology Aztec Mesas may be attached to Code 128 Code 39 Code 93 and 93i Interleaved 2 5 and UPC A EAN 13 host symbols Printers or readers may support only a subset of these host symbologies b Two Graphical Configurations one sided or two sided The layers of data for an Aztec Mesa may either be attached all on top of its host symbol or divided between the top and bottom The two sided configuration is preferred for larger messages because it locates the linear finder in the middle of the symbol c Suppression of Primary Message A host encoded primary message consisting of all zeros is suppressed in the output allowing an Aztec Mesa composite to function as an ordinary high capacity 2D symbol d Extended Channel Interpretation
4. e Select Bidirectional in the printer setup e You must have a Bidirectional cable attached e The printer protocol must be set for Status 2 or 4 In order for the Cancel command to properly function the following should be noted e Jobs in the Print Queue which have a graphic must be in a Frozen Status Then subsequent jobs will need to be Unfrozen as needed e Jobs in the print queue which do not have a graphic can be in a Frozen or Unfrozen state Western Telematic Switch Boxes You have the ability to increase the number of printers you can drive with your PC by using a Western Telematic CAS 41 4 way switch box a Western Telematic CAS 81 8 way switch box or a Western Telematic CAS 161A 16 way switch box These switching devices may be obtained from WESTERN TELEMATIC INC 5 Sterling Irvine CA 92718 USA 714 586 9950 800 854 7226 Fax 714 583 9514 www wti com Western Telematic Switchbox 41 Dip Switches 226 Printing Western Telematic Switchbox 41a Dip Switches Western Telematic Switchbox 41a Changing Monitor Pins The four internal jumpers located on the CAS 41A circuit board are used to switch the CAS 41A to monitor pin 4 Request to Send instead of pin 20 factory setting To switch monitor pins proceed as follows CAUTION Make certain to power off the CAS 41A and disconnect the power cable before attempting to remove the instrument cover 1 Remove the four screws that secure the CAS
5. 399 Printed Documentation You must click OK to save the settings 3 RUNNING MULTIPLE VERSIONS OF LABELCOM It s possible to run multiple instances of the program by including the name of a parameter file on the command line for example labelcom exe wineasy com1parm icm labelcom exe wineasy com2parm icm The two parameter files must specify two different COM ports If there is no command line parameter the file name is taken from label0 ini the last file used 4 PROGRAMMING NOTES Expressions used custom programming follow the same rules as the software s arithmetic expressions Variables can be either format field names command file keywords such as formatname and formatcount and temporary variable names Arithmetic Expression summary There is no distinction between numeric and string variables ALL VALUES ARE variable length STRINGS Attempting to do arithmetic on non numeric variables gives the value Comparison of two values which are valid numbers is an ordinary numeric comparison For example 2 lt 0 is TRUE If either operand is NOT numeric then a character string comparison is performed In this case the ASCII value of the character is used for the comparison Logical truth has the value 1 and Logical false has the value 0 String constants must be in quotes but numeric constants can be either quoted or not since they can t be mistaken for field names variables DATA 67 and DATA
6. Direct Thermal Select Yes for Direct Thermal Printing or Select No for Thermal Transfer printing BACK to TOP 30 Designing Formats Options Pass Through Download Fonts Flip Format Ooo Void and Reprint Image Bands Pass Through Enter the data that should be sent to the printer before sending the format The data contained within lt gt like lt ESC gt is treated as special unprintable characters Download Fonts Select Yes to download TrueType text fields as fonts If using TrueType fonts that require certain spacing characteristics such as Thai Chinese or Japanese characters Select No to print text fields as graphics The Download Fonts option will vary depending on the printer used Flip Format Select Yes to flip the format 180 degrees Enter N not to flip the format Reverse Image The format can be printed normal black print on white background or reverse white print on black background Selecting this option will print the entire format in reverse image Mirror Image Select Yes for Mirror Image if you would like all fields on the format to be printed in mirror mode Select No to print all fields as normal Job Separator Enter the number of blank labels or label rows to feed between jobs Pause Option You may define pauses in the print cycle with this option This will allow you to tear off labels as needed Create Replace File A Replace File is an ASCII text file that contains instructi
7. Print Request 264 267 Index Print Request Screen 201 248 388 Print Speed 28 206 Print Start Signal 225 Printable Area 201 248 Printable Characters 201 218 232 248 Printed Database Fields 269 Printer Address 168 241 250 Printer button 264 Printer Configuration Defining 247 Printer Configuration 95 247 257 262 263 Printer Data File 157 271 273 284 311 Printer icon 264 267 311 388 Printer Model 27 161 168 177 182 187 194 200 204 208 210 216 221 234 239 241 250 Printer Number 173 264 271 394 Printer Prompts 173 Printer RAM 177 182 187 194 200 204 210 221 Printer Settings 28 Printer Setup 157 215 271 273 284 311 Printer Setup Dialog 262 Printer Status 206 259 Printer Status button 259 Printerdata 318 Printername 320 Printernumber 318 Printers Adding 257 Deleting 257 445 Printed Documentation Installing 262 Resetting 206 Printers 171 173 179 181 184 186 190 193 197 206 213 221 225 241 244 247 253 257 260 262 391 Printers 17 179 184 190 197 213 225 244 253 Printers 33 179 184 190 197 213 225 244 253 Printer s Internal Calendar 173 Printer s Internal Clock 173 Printers list 262 Printing Options 284 Printing Busy 260 Printronix 215 Printronix Cables 213 Printronix Notes 215 Printronix Setup 210 Probable Cause 261 381 Problem Cause Solution 7 Prodigy
8. button You may also delete one from the format by clicking the Delete button BACK to TOP Adding a Text or Paragraph Field Adding a Textor Horizontal Position Vertical Position Field Name Paragraph Field Comment Typeface Width Magnification da Magnification l Field Field Direction Special Formatting ee Add on Characters Enable Printing Font Style Reverse Text Color Position Per Line Interline Spacing Field Adjustment Special Letter Orientation Character Spacing Character Formatting Effect Character i Increment Decrement Data Center Justify Type of Increment Checking 48 Designing Formats i Maximum Update Database Design Test Value Script Field Length Field Fill O Increment Decrement Increment Decrement Maximum Minimum Adding a Text or Paragraph Field Horizontal Position Enter the horizontal position of the field Vertical Position Enter the vertical position of the field Field Name A name to associate with the field Can be up to 32 characters long The name is necessary if you will be recording the value of this field in a format tracking report copying data from this field into another field using this field s data in a Linked Field or filling this field using the Command File facility Comment Enter a comment for the field Typeface You will be presented with an on screen list of available character sets from which to choose the base character for your text field A thumb
9. ALL Use the All tab to view and edit all OLE DB initialization properties available for your OLE DB provider Properties can vary depending on the OLE DB provider you are using BACK to TOP Cross Reference Wizard Destination Field Table Name Search Field Available Records Select Records Data Field Records lo CT Clauses Example Sometimes it is necessary to not only pull in data from one database but from a second third or more databases It is possible in the software to create a Database Cross Reference and then use it to accomplish this The Database Cross Reference acts as a pointer that directs the software to the database where the data is stored To use this function you must create a Database Cross Reference following certain rules A Database Cross Reference is a special text string that can reside in any database system The Database Cross Reference s can also be nested meaning that one Database Cross Reference can point to another Database Cross Reference and so on until finally the data field is located Click the Database Cross Reference icon on the Standard toolbar or select Edit Cross Reference from the menu bar to use the software s wizard to create your Database Cross Reference text string A description of each option available in the wizard follows Destination Field 290 Databaseview The field in the database table that will contain the Database Cross Reference text string Data Sour
10. After you ve created a table in Design view you can view it in Form View or Datasheet View Form View A window that displays one entire record at a time To open a table in Form view select View Form View from the menu bar or click the Form View icon on the Edit Toolbar Datasheet View A window that displays data in a row and column format In Datasheet view you can edit fields add and delete data and search for data To open a table in Datasheet view select View Datasheet View from the menu bar or click the Datasheet view icon on the Edit toolbar Printing the Entire Table of Records To print the entire Table of records click on the Print All Records icon on the Standard toolbar or choose File Print All Records from the menu bar 302 Databaseview Printing Records Name PrinttoFile Number of Copies Printing Records Your printer should be turned on in the ON LINE READY mode and loaded with paper The database fields will be printed within the width of the paper After selecting to print all records you will be presented with the Print dialog box After the appropriate settings have been entered the information will be sent to the printer or as an alternative the database records can also be printed to a file Each of the Database Print options are described in the following section Name From the drop down box select the printer to print the database records Print to File Prints the docu
11. Field Direction If you are printing to an HP LaserJet Series II bar codes can be designed and printed in orientations 1 and 4 however bar codes in orientation 4 can not print the human readable interpretation Printing a Set of Formats You can use the software in a demand mode when you only need one replacement label at a time On the Print Request Screen you can specify the starting print position in which to begin printing formats on your sheet of labels This will allow you to remove labels one at a time from the sheet and re feed the sheet many times We recommend not printing on the center strip of labels and keeping them in place This will allow the printer s pick up mechanism to work properly BACK to TOP Zebra Zebra Setup Printer Printer Concurrent Device Attached Printer Address Optimize Set Printer Override Label Print Mode i Printer Name The Printer Name parameter is optional You may specify a name to uniquely identify this printer This name will show up in the print request screen and the queue s printer list It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX interface Printer Description 250 Printing The Printer Description parameter is optional You may enter a description that further identifies the printer for the user The location of the printer Shipping and Receiving and size type of media loaded 4 inch X 6 inch paper media are examples of what can be stored here
12. Field List 83 90 96 427 Printed Documentation Field Name 39 48 67 69 73 76 99 112 116 118 121 128 275 381 Field Name Box 95 Field One 385 Field Optimized 255 Field Position 275 Field Specifications view 10 Field Specifications 10 Field Type 96 173 Field Width 69 73 76 112 116 121 311 FieldName 320 394 FIELDS 394 Fields Currently Defined 27 Fields Specified 381 Fieldvalue 320 File Opening 85 Print 264 267 selecting 281 Type 309 File DSN 330 File Menu 85 Files 281 313 320 Fill Patter 69 112 Fill Pattern 67 69 76 112 116 118 FIM 343 FIM B 343 FIM C 343 428 FIM D 343 Firmware Level 221 Fixed 39 99 106 124 146 173 Fixed Printer 173 Fixed Data 4s 128 394 403 Fixed Fields 269 Fixed List Values 4s 128 Fixed List as 128 Flag Character 341 342 Flip Format Yes 31 Flip Formats Flow Control 394 Fmt 82 85 86 391 FMTCOUNT 388 FMTNAME 275 FN1Function 39 99 FN2Function 39 99 FN3Function 39 99 FN4Function 39 99 FNC 347 FNC1 353 355 362 372 Following Al 347 Format String 4s 128 formatname 320 fuctions 96 ISS Aztec Code 355 Following 4s 96 128 320 347 355 Font load Busy 260 Font Number 201 248 Font Setup 157 271 273 284 311 Font Setup button Select 311 Font Setup button 311 Font Size 4s 128 Font Source 201 248 Font Style 4s 128 Fonts 96 Form View 281 284 Format Creating 36 Erasing 38 Maximum Fields 37
13. Parallel Centronix Dip Switches QualaBar RS 232 Communications The following settings are needed for serial communications for RJS QualaBar 440 and 450 printers Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Handshake XON XOFF RS 232 Communications Dip Switches The switches are labelled closed and open Closed means that the switch is on and open means that the switch is off For the switch to be on or closed the switch is toward the front of the printer Parallel Centronix Dip Switches For parallel printing there are no special switch settings required The Qualibar 450 automatically configures for parallel printing when a parallel cable is attached to the printer The Qualibar 440 does not support parallel printing BACK to TOP Sato Sato Setup Printer Printer i Concurrent Access S Model Type of Port Port 221 Printed Documentation Bidirectional Baud Rate Device Attached Printer Address Calendar Option Set Printer Set Printer J RFIDEnabed Printer Name The Printer Name parameter is optional You may specify a name to uniquely identify this printer This name will show up in the print request screen and the queue s printer list It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX interface Printer Description The Printer Description parameter is optional You may enter a description that further identifies the printer for the user The location of the printer Shipping and
14. To record the value of this field whenever the format is printed select Yes Otherwise select No Increment Decrement Field The following options are available e Increment e Decrement e Constant 103 Printed Documentation Type of Increment Decrement The choices for increment decrement are as follows e Numeric e Alphabetic e Alphanumeric e Hexadecimal e Octal e Custom Increment Decrement Sequence The custom incrementation option allows you to define a specific sequence of characters to increment or decrement Valid characters are the digits 0 9 and the letters A Z See Examples Change Amount The numerical amount by which to increment or decrement the field Update Database Select Yes to have the database updated after each job This will reflect the last value of the incremented decremented field Select No to leave the database field unchanged Increment Decrement Maximum Enter the maximum value the field can reach before rolling over to the minimum value NOTE This option requires the computer to do the field incrementation and not the printer The computer will send the labels one at a time to the printer 104 Insert Increment Decrement Minimum Enter the value the field should be reset to after reaching the maximum value NOTE This option requires the computer to do the field incrementation and not the printer The computer will send the labels one at a time to the printer Add on Char
15. Trim Trailing Blanks Used to suppress trailing blanks in an extracted database field Page Breaks Includes page breaks in the page header BACK to TOP Creating Label Setup See Format Specifications for information on defining the properties of your format Creating Formats Enter a filename for the format Long filenames are supported therefore they can be up to 255 characters long Click Add Next enter all information into the parameters screen See Label Setup At this point you are presented with a blank area on the screen called the format display area You are now ready to begin adding fields A field is one of the pieces that make up the format A field can be any one of the following text in many sizes bar codes in a variety of symbologies with or without human readable interpretation lines boxes circles and custom pictures or logos Each field is defined one at a time and positioned on the format display screen Each field can be moved erased changed or copied at any time while building your format 36 Designing Formats One of the powerful features of the software is the ability to define variable when printed or operator entry fields This means that the field s data is typed in at the time that the format is printed The operator is given the ability to compose a short prompt to be used when the data is requested prior to printing You may also extract a field s data from a database containing stor
16. Western Telematic Switchbox 81c Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switch Box Printer Assignments 9 Pin Cable Configuration 25 Pin Cable Configuration Ovation and Ovation 2 9 Pin Cable Configuration Ovation and Ovation 2 25 Pin Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switch Boxes You have the ability to increase the number of printers you can drive with your PC by using a Western Telematic CAS 41 4 way switch box a Western Telematic CAS 81 8 way switch box or a Western Telematic CAS 161A 16 way switch box These switching devices may be obtained from WESTERN TELEMATIC INC 5 Sterling Irvine CA 92718 USA 714 586 9950 800 854 7226 Fax 714 583 9514 www wti com Printed Documentation If you are using a Western Telematic Switch formats that contain TrueType font text fields cannot be downloaded as a font to the printer through the Western Telematic Switch Box The Western Telematic does not allow TrueType fonts to be downloaded When using TrueType font text fields on a format and a Western Telematic Switch you must download the font as a graphic Western Telematic Switchbox 41 Dip Switches Western Telematic Switchbox 41a Dip Switches Western Telematic Switchbox 41a Changing Monitor Pins The four internal jumpers located on the CAS 41A circuit board are used to switch the CAS 41A to monitor pin 4 Request to Send instead of pin 20 factory setting To switch monitor pins procee
17. You may now continue and make additional changes to the format or quit 86 Designing Formats BACK to TOP Save As The Save As function is very similar to the Save function The only difference is that you will be prompted to enter a new name for the format before it is saved The Save As function is useful for making several copies of a format or for creating several versions of a format by changing a format and then re saving it under a new name With this function you also have the ability to save the format to a floppy disk You need to specify a drive designator and the filename 87 Edit Undo This function reverses your last action To Undo the last editing change click the Undo Icon or choose Edit Undo from the menu bar or press CTRL Z Cut Removes the selected object from the active format and places it on the Clipboard Copy Places an exact copy of the selected object to the Clipboard Paste Inserts the contents of the Clipboard at the insertion point and replaces any selection This command is available only if you have cut or copied an object Choosing a Group of Fields Click the left mouse button and drag the mouse around the fields that you wish to choose You may also choose multiple fields one at a time by holding down the CTRL key and clicking on the fields that you wish to select Or selecting the Choose group of fields icon and dragging over all of the fields that you wish to select
18. and you want to print only the last six digits enter the following for the Format String screen item The data that will print will be The number of place holder characters specified for Format String must match the number of characters in the data string a If data is coming from a database or if the data is When Printed and the maximum field length is 10 there should be 10 characters specified in the Format String will suppress any leading zeroes For example if the data is The characters following will print If the data is The characters following will print Non Numeric Data If there are any non numeric characters in the data the non numeric characters will automatically be ignored For example if the data is 01234B6 typing ZZZZZZ9 will suppress any leading zeroes however since there are non numeric characters the actual data that will print will be 12346 Text Color Printed Documentation Choose a color for the text field For TrueType fonts you may click the Custom button to create a custom color for the text field Printer internal fonts will only allow a choice of 16 colors This option will only appear for the TEC 416 printer or color Windows printers Positions Per Line This function allows you to define the number of characters each line will have maximum of 300 character positions Interline Spacing This function allows you to define the distance between each line in inch
19. are examples of what can be stored here Printer Manufacturer Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided Printer Model Select the model of printer to be used Type of Port Select the type of port the device is attached to The options are Serial Parallel USB Network Windows or IP Some of these options may or may not be available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected Port Select the port to which the printer is attached Concurrent Access Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture computers If serial port interrupts are not known do not select concurrent 204 Printing access This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing Baud Rate Indicate the baud rate used Baud rates may vary on different printers Direct Print Select Direct Print to send data directly to the port For a shared or network printer be sure direct print is not selected This option appears for those printers that can be configured for parallel printing This option only appears when using Windows 95 98 or ME Printer Memory If a Memory cartridge is installed select the option corresponding to the memory module that is inserted into the top cartridge slot Cutter Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability While designing the f
20. 109 151 452 SERIALNUM 394 Service Code 171 181 186 193 199 206 215 231 236 246 Set 1 Item Buffer 225 Format Name 317 Monochrome 391 Printing 201 218 248 Status 225 UCC EAN 128 362 372 Up 262 Yes 4s 128 Set 48 128 201 218 225 232 248 262 317 362 372 391 Settings selecting 9 Settings 9 23 247 257 262 SETUP 262 394 Shelf Pricing Labels 346 SHIFT 10 Shift JIS 367 SHIFT key hold 37 79 SHIFT key 10 37 79 Shifted Coded Representation 367 SHIFT TAB use 78 SHIFT TAB 78 SHIFT TAB key press 269 SHIFT TAB key 10 269 Ship 347 Ship To 347 Short Date 4s 128 385 Shortcut 320 Show Field List 15 Sides Number 69 112 Sides 34 69 112 Signon dialog 320 Silver 37 Simply Freeze All 258 SINGLE 39 48 99 128 Singlejob value 320 Singlejob 320 SIZE 394 Slashed 17 Smooth Font 255 Smooth Scalable Font on Zebra 255 Snap Grid 79 94 96 use 94 Snap 79 94 96 Software Running 14 Software 14 Index Software Installation 12 Software Licensing Agreement 4 Solid 67 69 76 112 116 118 Solid Circle 76 116 Solid Ellipse 76 116 Solid Polygon 69 112 Solid Rectangle 67 69 112 118 Solid Rounded Rectangle 67 69 112 118 Sort Key 286 311 Sort Sequence 286 Sorting Database 286 Sorting 286 Source Choose Arithmetic 403 Choose Copied 403 Choose Fixed 403 Choose Link 403 Data 73 96 109 121 126 148 153 255 330 3
21. 121 124 126 128 146 148 153 255 269 394 403 When Printed Fields 269 Whenever symbology 39 99 Index Where 264 388 White 391 Width 73 76 116 121 Width Magnification s 128 Width Multipliers 39 99 201 232 248 Wildcard recognize 281 use 281 Wildcard 281 Windows back 9 changing 151 install 247 Windows 9 17 28 48 128 151 239 247 262 320 381 385 391 Windows 2000 394 Windows 9 x 12 Windows 95 27 168 177 182 187 194 200 210 221 239 241 250 280 394 Windows 95 98 204 216 Windows 95 98 NT 2000 XP 262 Windows 98 381 394 Windows application 281 Windows Control Panel 385 391 Windows MetaFile 391 Windows Notes 248 Windows NT 394 Windows NT 200 XP 239 Windows NT 2000 XP 239 463 Printed Documentation Windows Postscript 247 Windows Print Setup 157 271 273 Windows Printer Defining 247 Installing 247 Windows Printer 247 391 Windows Printer Driver 3 48 128 Windows Recycle Bin 38 Windows Setup 247 Windows subdirectory 381 Windows Task Bar 320 Windows Terminal Server Running 14 Windows Terminal Server 14 Windows Wallpaper 67 69 76 112 116 118 Windows XP 394 WINDOWS CAUTION1 TXT 385 Wineasy 320 Wineasy com1parm Icm 394 Wineasy com2parm Icm 394 Wineasy easy 320 Wineasy easy commandfile 320 Wineasy store cmd 320 Wizard start 262 Wizard 262 WMF 391 Write 464 Text File 314 Write 311 31
22. 241 250 Direct Thermal 28 Direct Thermal Printing 28 Direct transfer 364 Directions Box az 7s 128 DISABLE 320 Disable Reprint 171 Disable Test Print 17 Disabling 271 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES 4 Display Drawing Tool Bar Select View 95 Index Function Tool Bar Select View 95 Last Update 27 Print Queue 10 Standard Tool Bar Select View 94 Tools Tool Bar Select View 96 Display 10 27 94 95 96 Display Grid 79 94 96 Display Orientation 27 DISPLAYMSG 320 388 Divide 153 DOS 17 320 391 Dot Expansion 28 225 Double 34 Double Arrow 67 118 Down 10 Down Diagonal 67 69 76 112 116 118 Down right 281 Download Format Memory Card 173 Download Format 173 Download Graphics Format 168 Downloadable Software 7 Downloaded Fonts checking 193 Downloaded Fonts 31 193 201 232 244 248 Downloading PCMCIA Drive 173 Downloading 173 423 Printed Documentation Dpi 28 DR 381 Drawing Tool Bar Select View display 95 Drawing Tool Bar Select View 95 Drawing Toolbar Add Text Field icons 128 Drawing Toolbar 39 48 67 69 73 76 99 112 116 118 121 128 Drivers 7 Drop 320 Drop Support 320 DRWATSON LOG 381 DTR 213 221 244 253 Duplex Print 264 267 271 394 Duplex Printer 267 Duplicate Serial Number 15 Duplicated Keyword 381 Dynamic Data Exchange 320 E EAN 341 342 372 EAN 13 342 EAN International 347 372 EAN symbologies 168 EAN UCC 362 372 EAN UCC Composite 362 EAN UCC
23. Allows for a short sentence describing the format being created Display Orientation The orientation used to view and edit the format on the display screen The arrow in the upper left corner of the format will display indicating the direction of the label stock as it comes out of the printer Fields Currently Defined This field is for informational purposes only The number of defined fields on the format is given Auto Field Name Select Yes to have the field names for barcodes text and graphics to be automatically generated Select No to leave the field names blank when fields are generated Save Backup Format Selecting Yes will save a backup copy of the format any time it is changed This option should not be turned on until the label format is in its final form In order for this to work Format Change History in the Program Options must also be enabled because the Format Change History option allows the administrator of the Software to disable the creation of backup formats globally without having to turn the option off in each individual format Save Print Image Selecting Yes will save an image file of print jobs for tracking or auditing purposes This option should not be turned on until the label format is in its final form The Create Print Images option in the Program Options must also be enabled for the Print Image to get created because the Create Print Images option allows the administrator of the Software
24. Duplex Print Duplex Printer 267 Printed Documentation Cut Option Format Name Displays the name that the format was saved as Description Enter a job description if desired This will allow you to type in a short memory aid such as a part number customer name or format type so if you need to modify this job once it is in the print queue you will be able to distinguish it from other jobs Printer Number Select the number of the printer to use in order to print the format You may also choose Print to File This will allow you to print the format to a txt file You can type in the destination for the output file or choose browse to find a destination Hold Job Select No to let the job begin printing as soon as possible or Select Yes to hold the job initially The hold job prompt will allow you to begin printing the job as soon as possible or to hold the job initially The default for this prompt is No which will typically be the case You might be using two different types of stock to print your formats on and want to answer No for all jobs that will use the stock you have loaded in the printer and Yes for jobs that will require a stock change Also you may answer Yes if you wish to stack multiple jobs for printing later Output File When you choose to print a format to File you must specify the name of an output file for the format Entering the name of an existing file name will append new information to previous inf
25. ELabelOCX doc A programming Guide for using the software s Active X ELABELOCX LIC The Visual Basic License file for the Software It allows users to program using the Active X objects 392 Appendices ELABELOCX OCX The Software s Active X objects ENGLISH LNG Message file will change according to language LABEL CFG The configuration parameters for your system If erased needs to be reinstalled from the program disk The software cannot execute without LABEL CFG LABELC32 DLL Common sub routines used by the main program and the Printer Task Labelcom exe The Labelcom Utility LABELD DLL Common sub routines used by the main program LABELPAO DLL Printer dependent module for the Apollo printers LABELPCO DLL Printer dependent module for the TSC printers LABELPDO DLL Printer dependent module for the Tharo Datamax Printers LABELPFO DLL Printer dependent module for the Tharo Fargo Datamax printers LABELPGO DLL Printer dependent module for the Gemini Printer LABELPHO DLL Printer dependent module for the HP LaserJet and CF 1000 printers LABELPIO DLL Printer dependent module for the Intermec printers LABELPKO DLL Printer dependent module for the Ricoh printers LABELPNO DLL Printer dependent module for the Novexx printers LABELPPO DLL Printer dependent module for the PostScript printers and printer drivers supported under Microsoft Windows Control Panel The LABELPPO DLL library file must
26. Each line will be terminated by a carriage return line feed sequence Within the record each field will occupy a fixed number of columns equal to the field length in columns in the database field There are no separators between fields Appending Records to a Table This function allows you to add records from a standard text file to the database currently selected such as records that are resident on a host computer system Before appending any records you must first create a database in the software to accept the data Make sure that this new database structure is exactly the same as the one you are appending from It should contain the same number of fields name of fields field types and field lengths so that no data is lost When selected you will be instructed to enter the name of the file that contains the records to be read At the same time the software displays a list of currently defined TXT files in alphabetical order When entering the file name you may include a drive designator a path and file extension The text file must contain one line for each database record See Writing Database Records to a Text File Within the record each field should occupy a fixed number of columns equal to the field length in the database There should be no separators between fields A carriage return line feed sequence must terminate each record If a record contains more data than can fit in a database record then data beyond the col
27. Japan Denso 367 Japan 15 341 342 367 Japanese 31 Japanese Kana Kanji 367 Japanese Kanji 367 Jasc Paint Shop Pro 3 73 121 JIS 367 JIS 8 bit 367 Job Cannot Edit 261 Cannot Freeze 261 Cannot Move 261 Job 25 258 Job 161 168 177 182 187 194 204 208 210 216 221 234 241 250 258 259 260 261 Job 25 258 JOB file 261 Job Number 25 258 Job Number Not Found Starting 381 Job Number Not Found 381 Job Probable Cause 261 Job Separator 3 Job Seperator 31 434 Job cancel useprinter 320 Jobdescription 320 Jobnumber 318 Julian Date 4s 128 385 Junk 388 K K 151 369 372 Kana 367 Kanji 367 Keyword Directive Expecting 381 Keyword Directive 381 L L 367 Label Rotating 83 Label 83 Label Format 36 Label Offset 28 Label Sensor 28 Label Setup 36 193 225 Label cfg 381 391 394 Label0 ini 394 Labelc dll uses 394 Labelc dll 391 394 LABELCOM change 394 close 394 LABELCOM 394 LABELCOM file 394 LABELCOM Parameter 394 Labelcom Utility 394 Labelcom exe 394 LABELCOM 3 LabelCommand 318 LABELD DLL 391 LabelJobCancel 318 LabelJobQuery 318 LABELPAO DLL 391 LABELPDO DLL 391 LABELPFO DLL 391 LABELPGO DLL 391 LABELPHO DLL 391 LABELPPO DLL 391 LABELPRO DLL 391 LABELSO DLL 391 LABELTO DLL 391 LABELX EXE 391 LABELZO DLL 391 Language 17 Large Tool Icons 19 Large Toolbar Icons 19 Laser Jet Communications 201 LaserJet Communications 2
28. Month 4s 128 Abbreviated Name 4s 128 ABSI X3 4 353 Access Internal 388 Menu Functions 23 Access 23 388 Accessing Memory Card 173 ActiveX 317 Add Bar Code Field 39 99 Box Field 69 112 Circle 76 116 Database 275 Index File 280 Line Field 67 118 Literal Value 109 151 New Field 38 275 New Printer 257 Picture Field 73 121 385 Printer 257 Text 4s 128 Users 23 Add 23 36 38 39 48 67 69 73 76 99 109 112 116 118 121 128 151 153 257 262 275 280 281 320 385 Add Barcode Field 95 Add Box Field 95 Add Circle 95 Add Index File 279 280 Add Index File icon 279 280 Add Item 109 151 Add Line Field 95 Add Literal Value 109 151 Add Picture Field 95 Add Printer Wizard 247 262 Add Records 281 Add Text Field 95 Added Characters 39 99 Additional Characters 39 99 Additional Features 355 362 369 372 Add on Characters 39 48 99 128 Adjust SHAPE az 128 ADJUST SIDES TO PROPER THICKNESS 69 112 Adobe Photoshop 3 73 121 Advanced Database Functions 385 Advanced Functions 394 Advanced Programming Functions 403 Al 347 372 Index AIDC 333 Als 347 Aisle 39 48 99 128 264 320 AISLENUM 39 48 99 128 264 284 320 Align Group 81 89 Align 81 89 158 159 Align Bottom 159 Align Down 96 159 Align Left 96 158 Align Right 96 158 Align Top 158 Align Up 96 158 ALL applies 281 Entering 264 erasing 287 ALL 154 20
29. Octal or Custom Change Amount The numerical amount by which to increment or decrement the field Increment Decrement Maximum Enter the maximum value the field can reach before rolling over to the minimum value Increment Decrement Minimum Enter the value the field should be reset to after reaching the maximum value Update Database Select Yes to have the database updated after each job This will reflect the last value of the incremented decremented field Select No to leave the database field unchanged Background Color Select the background color for the text field This option will only appear for the TEC 416 printer or color Windows printers Data Checking Designing Formats Please indicate whether data type validation should be performed on operator input Choices are No Validation Numeric Alphabetic Alphanumeric Date M D Y Upper Case Characters Upper Case Alphabetic Upper Case Alphanumeric Fixed List of Values Selection List Enter a list of values which the operator can choose from The values that you type in will appear as choices on the Print screen Each value must be separated by a space Short phrases must be enclosed in double quotes To advance to a new line press CTRL ENTER For example choices are RED GREEN BLUE To display this selection list click on the down arrow next to the field input box on the data input screen within the Print screen Maximum Field Length Enter the maxim
30. SATO CL612 CL408 and CL412 printers automatically configure for parallel printing when a parallel cable is attached to the printer For Bidirectional Parallel printing the printer must be set to multi buffer and the Software s Bidirectional option must also be enabled Internal Time Stamp Allows formats with a time stamp to be printed in real time using the printers internal time stamp To use this function the printer must be equipped with a clock chip Refer to your printer manual for setup on Sato models 8490 8485 S L and 8485 S R Multi Buffer 230 Printing Typically used to enable Bidirectional Parallel printing with the Software s Bidirectional option enabled This allows for Status and the Cancel command with a parallel cable Can also be used with Serial printing and the standard Ready Busy cable in print and apply applications where one job is sent to the printer and at some point the job will need to be cancelled Should not be used this way if stacking multiple jobs in the queue since all jobs will be fed into the printer and the Cancel command will cancel all jobs Multi Buffer Settings Baud 9600 bps Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None DSW 1 2 8 ON DSW 2 5 ON BACK to TOP Sato Notes True Type Fonts Maxicode TrueType Fonts TrueType fonts on the Sato printers are supported on the Text Field definition screen Fields that use TrueType fonts are sent to the printer as a graphic Maxicode W
31. Some of these options may or may not be available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected Port Select the port to which the printer is attached Upper Case International Enables uppercase International Characters Selecting this option protects International Characters with uppercase ascenders accent marks umlauts etc from being omitted when the top of that character is placed along the outside edges of a format Please be aware that this option will move the field away from the outside edge of the printed label Bar Code Verification Bar codes were tested with the printer s darkness control set to 2 5 and 3 Refilled cartridges had varying results All bar codes were verified as being in spec in all resolutions using a Quick Check IV verifier Downloaded Fonts A record is kept of what fonts have been sent to the printer If for any reason the printer is turned off during the course of a day s work you should exit the program and then restart the program by double clicking on the icon Printable Characters Overall character height including lower case descenders must be taken into account when deciding what can print on a page Therefore the maximum character height that could print on an 11 form with a print area height of 10 59 is 7 99 Any field that would be off the format due to the lower case characters is automatically moved up even if lower case is not used Vertical Separation The distan
32. The cancel job clause is of the form cancel job number The cancel useprinter clause is of the form cancel useprintemnumber The purpose of the cancel job clause is to cancel a job based on the job number The purpose of the cance useprinter clause is to cancel all jobs specific to a printer If you do not know the exact number of labels you will need for a specific job your command file can send a quantity greater than a desired amount Then at the end of the day when the required number of labels are printed a cance Job or cancel useprinter clause can be sent to cancel the remaining labels in the job The cancel job and the cancel useprinter clauses must end with a semicolon Both cancel job and cancel useprinter cannot be used in the same command file record For example if the currently printing job is the first job the cance job clause would be cancel job 1 If you have multiple printers attached to your PC and you would like to cancel all jobs that are printing to a specific printer the cancel useprinter clause should be used For example if the currently printing job is on printer number 3 the cance useprinter clause would be cancel useprinter 3 getstatus useprinter 326 Advanced The getstatus useprinter clause is of the form getstatus useprinter number The getstatus useprinter command can be used to get the current printing status of the printer Status returned from the printer will be writ
33. To connect to other types of database files enter the appropriate connection string to the data source here or you can click the Prompt button to be prompted to create the connection string This string is created by first choosing a Database provider and then creating or choosing a connection to the database How this is done will depend on your Database Provider Variable Table With this option enable you will be able to choose which language table will provide the data to populate the field Table Name Enter the name of the TABLE containing the data to be printed This item allows you to select the appropriate database file table Search Fields The number of fields used to search for a specific record Search Field Name The name of the database field that will be used in searching the database When the operator enters a search value the database will be searched to find the given value in the Search Field The corresponding record will then be used to supply data This item must be entered once and may be entered as many as 3 times for each database used If you have previously specified a field using the same database this item will not appear unless the number of search fields you have specified was more than 1 The choices of field names appear in the dialog box Operator Prompt Line Define the prompt you wish to appear at the time of printing The prompt will be displayed above the data entry area for the field Varia
34. Western Telematic Switchbox 161a 9 Pin Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switchbox 161a 25 Pin Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switchbox 81c 9 Pin Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switchbox 81c 25 Pin Cable Configuration Setup for Sato 8400 6 and 8400 8 Serial RS 232 Communication settings are Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Codes Standard Protocol PC 1 RS ON OFF Sato 8400 printer family It is recommended that the Receive Buffer Size on the front panel of the printer be set to 1 ltem Buffer When the printer is set to 1 ltem Buffer the printer will process one print job at a time and will remain busy until completion of that job Setup for Sato 8400 8400RV and 8450 228 Printing Serial RS 232 Communication settings are 8 Data Bits No Parity 1 Stop Bit Standard Codes PC1 RS ON OFF Protocol 8450 The Dot Expansion setting on the Label Setup screen in the software will override the Dot Expansion setting on the printer s front panel under lt Mode S Options gt Sato 8400 printer family It is recommended that the Receive Buffer Size on the front panel of the printer be set to 1 ltem Buffer When the printer is set to 1 ltem Buffer the printer will process one print job at a time and will remain busy until completion of that job Setup for Sato CL608 and 8480s Serial RS 232 Communication settings are Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Handshak
35. includes a Mode Message reference ladders and an error corrected sequence of codewords that closely follow the ISS Aztec Code model The supplemental message that an Aztec Mesa encodes is readable only by an image reader 355 Printed Documentation Specifications Character Set All 8 bit values can be encoded The default interpretation shall be a for values 0 to 127 ANSI X3 4 i e ASCII and b for values 128 to 255 ISO 8859 1 Latin Alphabet No 1 This corresponds to ECI 000003 Two non data characters can be encoded FNC1 for compatibility with some applications and an ECI escape character for the standardized encoding of message interpretation information Representation of Data nominally 2X high by 1X wide modules with a dark module representing a binary one and a light module representing a binary zero Symbol Size The width of an Aztec Mesa is approximately the length of its linear host symbol less quiet Zones The shortest Aztec Mesa supplement is 2 modules 4X high and the tallest is 64 modules 128X high in addition to the height of the linear host symbol No quiet zone is required on either side of an Aztec Mesa though quiet zone requirements of the host symbol must be satisfied A 1X quiet zone is required above the upper 2D field and below the lower 2D field if present which comprise the Aztec Mesa Data Capacity supplementing a 10 digit Code 128 symbol at recommended error correction level
36. refer to the ALL Function and Tutorial You will be prompted for the batch size number of batches whether to hold the job at time of printing and an optional job description All which are explained in the following Printer Number Select the number of the printer to use in order to print the format You may also choose Print to File This will allow you to print the format to a txt file You can type in the destination for the output file or choose browse to find a destination Duplex Print Select Yes to simultaneously print the same job on two printers or No to print the job on a single printer 264 Printing This screen item appears when you have two of the same model printer defined Alternate Printer Select No for NONE or the number of an alternate printer to use in order to print the format This item will only appear if you have configured the same printer on two different ports Output File Enter the name of an output file for the format Entering the name of an existing file name will append new information to previous information Entering a new file name will create a new file Number of Formats Enter the number of formats you want printed Batch Size Enter the number of identical copies of each format you want printed If the format contains incremented or decremented fields you will be able to print any number of identical formats before the increment or decrement function is applied This number is
37. specification data for details Once you have entered all items correctly the format display screen will again be shown with the box representing the area for the bar code You should now position the bar code field The available bar code symbologies are listed here Bar code symbology selections vary by printer Horizontal Position Enter the horizontal position of the field Vertical Position Enter the vertical position of the field Field Name A name to associate with the field Can be up to 32 characters long The name is necessary if you will be recording the value of this field in a format tracking report copying data from this field into another field using this field s data in a Linked Field or filling this field using the Command File facility Comment Enter a comment for this field Symbology The available bar code symbologies are specific to the printer being used Subset 40 Designing Formats When using a Code 128 bar code you will be able to choose which Subset to use for the symbol Selecting Automatic will let the software choose a Subset to create the shortest symbol When it is required you may also select a specific Subset to force the symbol to stay in that Subset Subset A Subset B or Subset C Control and Function Characters The software allows you to embed control codes or function codes into a bar code when permitted by the symbology For example Code 128 or PDF417 A pop up menu enable
38. the field Field Width Enter the Width of the field in inches and hundredths of inches Field Height Enter the Height of the field in inches and hundredths of inches Line Thickness Enter the thickness of the field in inches and hundredths of inches Shape Please select one of the following variations Available choices are e Circle Outlined Circle e Disc Solid Circle e Ellipse Outlined Ellipse e Solid Ellipse Fill Pattern You will be presented with an on screen list of available fill patterns from which to choose The available choices are 77 Printed Documentation Solid Down Diagonal Up Diagonal Grid Diamond Horizontal lines Vertical Lines Dots Windows Wallpaper Gray Level You will be presented with an on screen list of available gray level shading options This option appears when a Solid fill pattern is chosen The choices for gray level shading vary based on the printer chosen BACK to TOP Entering Specification Data To define a bar code or text field or to specify the format size there are various items that must be specified such as size type source of data for the field etc You have the option to display the specification screen in tabbed dialog boxes or single sheets The following describes the steps you will take to input this information assuming the specification screen is displayed on a single sheet The dialog box will show a list of prompts There is one p
39. 30 40 50 60 70 80 or 90 the valid product code numbers are 00000 00009 10 numbers If the manufacturer s number does not end in zero the valid product code numbers are 00005 00009 5 numbers Specifications Character Set 0 9 Encodation Two bars and two spaces are required to encode a character Start Stop Pattern Always starts and stop with 3 elements a narrow bar narrow space and narrow bar Code Type Modular fixed length twelve digits with UPC A six explicitly encoded but eight illustrated human readable digits with UPC E Human Readable UPC A all twelve digits required UPC E six digits required the Number System Character and the Check Digit are implied but the UCC promotes printing all eight digits Check Digit Required Modulus 10 calculation Encoded Information Number System Character one digit Manufacturer Identification Number five digits 352 Bar Code Information Product Identification Number five digits Check Digit one digit Allowable Sizes Sizes for the UPC E are determined by a magnification factor which is based on the X dimension size These magnifications range from 80 to 200 of the nominal size or 100 size 1 46 inches in width 1 020 inches in height X dimension 13 mils UPC El History and Overview Typically used for shelf labeling in the Retail environment It is numeric only and fixed length 2D 2D Bar Code A newer area in the wor
40. 32 characters long The name is necessary if you will be recording the value of this field in a format tracking report copying data from this field into another field using this field s data in a Linked Field or filling this field using the Command File facility Comment Enter an optional comment for the field Used in reports Field Width 122 Insert Enter the Width of the field in inches and hundredths of inches Field Height Enter the Height of the field in inches and hundredths of inches Source of Data The data for this field can be one of the following Fixed e When Printed e Database Field Direction The field can be printed in any of the 4 following orientations Normal left to right Bottom to top Upside down right to left Top to bottom Field Contrast The field can be printed normal black print on white background or reverse white print on black background Maintain Aspect Ratio Selecting Yes for this option will allow pictures to maintain their original aspect ratio Selecting No will allow pictures to be stretched to fill the available defined field size Enable Printing Select Yes to print the field on the format Select No to display the field on the format but do not print the field Select Conditional to specify a print criterion for the field Field Color 123 Printed Documentation When designing a label for a COLOR printer you can add a color to a monochrome picture Se
41. 341 342 347 350 372 Uniform Product Code Council 344 Unit Price 4s 128 United Parcel Service 364 United States 341 342 347 350 United States Postal Service 343 459 Printed Documentation Universal Naming Convention 3 262 Universal Product Code 350 UNIX 31 Unmark 281 Unmark All 281 Unmarks 264 281 Unprinted 239 Unslashed 17 Up left 281 UPC Numbering System 350 superset 341 342 UPC as 128 168 201 232 248 341 342 350 351 358 UPC E0 351 UPC E1 353 UPC Version 341 342 UPC Version E 341 342 UPC EAN 39 99 333 UPC EAN bar 168 UPC A 3 351 UPC A barcode 350 UPC A Code 350 UPC A EAN 13 355 UPCCODE as 128 UPCCODE LIKE 3s 128 UPCCODE LIKE 12130 7 AND ITEMNUM 284 UPC E 351 460 Update Database 39 48 99 128 Update Format 23 269 Updating Database 281 Updating 281 Uploading Report Files 385 Uploading 385 Upper Case Alphabetic 4s 107 124 128 146 Upper Case Alphanumeric 4s 107 124 128 146 Upper Case Characters 4s 107 124 128 146 Upper Case International 200 232 248 UPS Bar Code 39 99 UPS Bar Code Specifications 39 99 UPS Code 364 UPS GroundTrac 39 99 UPS GroundTrac symbology creating 39 99 UPS GroundTrac symbology 39 99 Use Center Horizontally 158 Center Vertically 158 code s 360 Command File 388 down right 281 FMTNAME 275 HOME 82 90 HP 201 248 labelc dll 394 ODBC 320 PgDn key 264 PgUp 269 Save As 87 SHIFT TAB
42. 381 Configure CL408 221 Configure 215 221 Connect MRP II 3 Connect 3 Content 347 Control Characters 106 124 146 Control txt 320 Controlled Access Areas 23 Converting Formats 36 Convolutional Code Algorithms 360 COPIED 39 99 Copied Field Name 108 150 394 Copied Field 108 150 394 Copy Field so Copy 10 48 80 81 84 89 108 128 150 Copy Dr 381 Correcting codewords 369 Correcting 369 Correction 362 Corresponding ECI 000003 353 355 369 RAM 177 182 187 194 204 210 241 Corresponding 177 182 187 194 204 210 241 353 355 369 Country Code 171 181 186 193 199 206 215 231 236 246 341 342 Courtesy Reply Mail 343 CR 15 Create ASCII Replace file 3 bar 394 Barcode Field 403 Command File 320 Formats 36 Human Readable 4s 128 New 94 New Database 275 New Database Structure 275 Report 311 Index RPS bar as 128 Serial File 309 Text 385 The New Database Structure 275 UPS GroundTrac symbology 39 99 Create 31 36 39 48 94 99 128 275 309 311 320 385 394 403 Create Bar Code 39 99 Create Box Field Specification 69 112 Create Database File icon 281 Create Job 317 Create Line Field Specification 67 118 Create Replace File 3 Create Serial Number File Screen 309 Create Shortcut 394 Created edited 86 311 Created edited Formats 85 Created edited Serial Files 86 309 Cross Hairs 96 158 CTRL 10 CTRL key 81
43. 388 Appendix D File Types 22 A A A ia ea av a aia aa ed 391 Appendix E Installing Code Page 850 si nce eae ave aba A Aa 394 Appendix F Hexad cimal Codes 2000 ave ata nan asa adnan dea van 394 Appendix GuLabelcom Util oo ia ae avant a A ee aa AS 394 Appendix H Advanced Programming Functions 2cc cccceseceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeesceaeeesceeeeseaeeeseeaeeseeeeeseeeeseieeeeeee 403 Appendix l Creation of a Connection String ooocconncccnccccconoccnconocononnncnnonnonnnnn nc nono nc nnnn nn cane nn rra n nn nenn nn n nene nn rnannranannncnnnnes 406 A O ONE 409 xi 2866 Nationwide Parkway P O Box 798 Brunswick OH 44212 USA TEL 330 273 4408 FAX 330 225 0099 www tharo com General Information tharo tharo com Sales sales tharo com Software Support techsupport tharo com Printer Support printersupport tharo com What Can the Software Do What Can the Software Do What is it For fast on site labels with bar codes this software is the time tested industry standard The software is a product identification and bar code labeling software package that enables you to custom design your own labels on demand quickly and easily Combining a database for storage of variable information and a separate capability for serialized fields this software has been designed to meet the requirements of a wide variety of users What can it do Offering a user friendly interface it s easy to print bar codes graphics tex
44. 67 are indistinguishable Advanced Functions 1 Create a text field and name it BARDATA For Source of Data choose F Fixed For Fixed Data enter 010583005 NOTE This is your starting data string you may want to change 400 Appendices this to a When Printed source of data or whatever type of data source meets you application s needs 2 Create another text field and name it DIGIT1 For Source of Data choose A Arithmetic For Calculation enter SUBSTRING BARDATA 1 1 NOTE This is selecting the first digit of the starting data and making it its own field 3 Create 8 more text fields and name them DIGIT2 through DIGIT9 For Source of Data choose A Arithmetic For Calculation enter SUBSTRING BARDATA x 1 x 2 for the second 3 for the third Up to 9 for the last text field NOTE This is selecting the next 8 digits of the starting data and making them own fields 4 Create another text field and name it TOTAL For Source of Data choose A Arithmetic For Calculation enter DIGIT1 9 DIGIT2 8 DIGIT3 7 DIGIT4 6 DIGIT5 5 DIGIT6 4 DIGIT7 3 DIGIT8 2 DIGIT9 1 9 For Decimal Places enter 2 For Special Formatting choose 6 Custom Numeric Amount Format For Format String enter 99 99 NOTE Each digit is multiplied by its position weight then added together and divided by 9 The result is then forced to have 2 digits past the decimal
45. 83 True Type 4s 83 128 True Type Fonts 201 218 231 TRUEDATE use 385 TRUEDATE 385 TRUETIME use 385 TRUETIME 385 TrueType USES 4s 128 TrueType 31 48 128 173 177 182 187 193 194 201 218 231 241 244 TrueType Fonts 201 218 231 Truncate Symbol 39 99 Truncated PDF417 366 Tutorial 109 126 148 264 388 TWO 34 171 Two dimensional 353 366 Two dimensional bar 3 Two Dimensional Matrix 360 TXT 287 Txt file 264 267 Txtfilename 320 Type Character Height s 128 Data Checking 107 124 146 Files 309 Increments 128 Increment Decrement 39 99 incrementation 4s 128 Port 161 168 177 182 187 194 204 208 210 216 221 234 241 250 262 263 Type 27 39 48 99 107 124 128 146 161 168 177 182 187 194 204 208 210 216 221 234 241 250 262 263 275 309 391 Type ALL 388 Type Mismatch 381 U U S 347 UCC 347 350 351 372 UCC Application Identifier 347 Index UCC Company Prefix 350 UCC EAN 339 372 UCC EAN 128 az 128 UCC EAN APPLICATION IDENTIFIER 347 UCC EAN Application Identifiers 347 UCC EAN 128 3 347 362 372 UCC EAN 128 bar 347 UCC 128 EAN 128 SSCC 18 SCC 14 347 Unable 260 Unbalanced Quote 381 UNC 3 262 Undefined Field Name Used 381 Undo 84 89 Undo Function 10 Undo Icon 84 89 UnFreeze 258 259 UnFreeze All 259 Unfrozed 225 Unfrozen 225 258 260 Unicode 333 Unicode 2 0 333 Unicode 2 1 333 Uniform Code Council
46. 99 Bar Code Field 39 99 Bar Code icon 39 99 Bar Codes Scanning 331 Bar Codes 38 331 Bar no bar 343 Bar space 372 Bar Space Adjustment 28 BAR1 38 Barcode Width Magnification 39 99 Barcodes 27 264 333 BARDATA 394 403 BARSUPP 388 Batch Number 267 Print 264 267 388 Batch 161 168 177 182 187 194 204 208 210 216 221 234 241 250 264 267 388 Batch Mode 28 Batch Size 173 257 264 267 388 414 Batch Peel Off 168 Batch Lot Number 347 Batchsize 320 Baud Rate 161 168 177 182 187 194 208 216 221 234 241 250 394 Before You Begin 9 Bi directional 225 BIDIRECTIONAL 221 Bidirectionally Decodable 333 Bi directionally Decodable 362 369 372 Black 391 BLANK as 128 284 311 Blanks Allowed 107 124 146 BMP 391 BOTH Header 39 99 Box Adding 69 112 Box 38 69 112 Box Field Adding 69 112 Box Field 69 112 Bps 225 Browse 17 Browsing 275 Brunswick 1 Bullseye 353 Business Reply 343 Byte Compaction 365 Bytes Received 394 c C ltoh 181 C ltoh Cables 179 C ltoh Notes 181 C Itoh Setup 177 Calculating Check Digit 403 Checksum 350 Sell By 385 Calculating 350 385 403 Calculation 385 394 403 Called Create Job 317 Serial Shipping Container Code 347 Called 317 347 Cancel 23 173 225 258 279 281 287 309 314 315 Cancel Selecting Cancel 264 Cancel All 259 Cancel All button 259 Cancel Current Function 94 Cannot 261 381 Cannot Add 261 Cannot Add Thi
47. A FULL REFUND IF APPLICABLE 1 GRANT OF LICENSE The various software products are licensed in similar ways with a few exceptions The Multi User product comes standard with a certain number of client seats The number of authorized concurrent users covered by the license for the software will be visually displayed to you by pressing F3 while the software is running You may add additional clients to your license at any time The Terminal Server product is licensed on per server basis Any number of users may use the software on a single Terminal Server machine The Platinum Gold Silver Print Only and Start products are to be used only on a single computer 2 DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS NOT FOR RESALE SOFTWARE Software identified as Not For Resale or NFR may not be sold or otherwise transferred for value or used for any purpose other than demonstration NO RENTAL COMMERCIAL HOSTING You may not rent lease lend or provide commercial hosting services with the Software You may modify or make backup copies of this software only in support of your use of the software on the single computer You may transfer this software and license to another party only if the other party agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this license and only if you do the following you must transfer all copies in printed or machine readable form in whole or in part to the same party or at the time of the transfer you must de
48. AAA anal AA ii Wen tied Chetan tata 339 EAN IUCE Brin aa ciate aoa eatin A E el caves adi Sd CE 341 BAN IUCE Titi SA awa tae A alia aaa aaa tala Sh 342 lirica ioneina a a neta tan SAA E aba dre aa bead a i A ta aoa 343 Interleaved 2 AAA NO 344 MS A A A A A A ti 346 PLANET G6d sitio A AA AE A A A AL 346 PICSSY sont acute ah Malai aba a iar ae ee ave A ta a a a ae os inte ae a a 347 ROS INET cts iva dice al aie AS A EA laa A E annals 347 UCG 128 EAN 128 SSCC 18 SCC 14 sii alanine Waban a aba A alanine 347 WGG 12 URGIA iinn cence naa A A ae cavalier eats 350 UPC Eli tc 351 UPG Edi A A ae 353 DO aia 353 LOBA desidia 353 AE Coden i 353 ARM ii 355 CODABLOGK ii ba 357 Eolo E Ke eohit ae 358 DM T E iio id 360 EAN UCC Composite ninio ito 362 MAC Ida iaa 364 Micro PD aaa 365 POR A ia 366 QR Codey nica ae Aaa 367 SUperCode O NN 369 COMPO S O r aceite nan dnei oA Mis cane ca ie iA ci cho 371 Composite Bar Gode Aansen al adie A Sin Ale ee Ae envied CE 372 Table Of Contents GS AdA ati tan ots 372 Formally known as RSS Reduced Space SyMbolOGy cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeceeeeseeeeseneeeseneeeeeas 372 Appendices zonani oa A ae A oe aa au ala ae aS 381 Appendix A Error Status Messages cool A A Aaa 381 Appendix BzADPliCAtiONn Notesi tanins A AA A EA 385 Appendix C ALL Function and Tutorial 0 cccccccccccscsccscssesscsecsesscsecsscsecsesaeseessssecsessesassecsesaesaesecsecaesecsasaecatcaecasaeseeats
49. Commands and Command File Clauses Drag and Drop Support Command File Monitoring What is a Command File The software provides the ability to print formats using commands contained in a Command File This is similar to the DOS batch file facility How Do I Create a Command File Any text editor or word processor can create command Files or it could be generated by another computer program 320 Advanced Using Command Files To use this function you must create a Command File following certain rules This file can reside on any drive and must have the file extension of cmd The file contains the name of the format or formats to be printed the value of any variable fields the value of any database search fields which printer to send the formats to and the quantity to be printed for each particular set of formats Command File Clauses jobdescription append dbase singlejob___ sortdbase testprint where cancel job cancel fieldvalue dian getstatus useprinter y useprinter useprinter outputfile clear useprinter printername orasarocorde close displayms dbase playmsg formatname The formainame clause is of the form formatname lt name gt lt name gt specifies which format is to be printed in this set lt name gt must be a valid format name without the fmt extension If the format is located in the software s default directory only the name of the format excluding the extension is needed If the f
50. Composite Symbology 362 EAN UCC item 372 424 EAN UCC Reduced Space Symbology 372 EAN UCC RSS 372 EAN UCC RSS bar 372 EAN UCC Composite 362 EAN UPC 362 EAN 13 341 342 347 EAN 14 item 347 EAN 8 341 342 347 EASY EXE 381 391 EasyTutor 9 ECC 000 140 360 ECC 140 360 ECC 000 360 ECC 140 ECC 000 360 ECC 140 360 ECC 200 360 ECI 333 353 355 369 ECI 000003 353 355 369 ECI Protocol Support 333 Edge Trailing 206 Edge 206 Edge Violations 206 Edit Database 275 281 return 78 Edit 23 48 73 78 79 80 81 82 84 89 90 106 121 124 128 146 257 262 275 279 281 287 313 Edit button clicking 281 Edit button 281 Edit Format 320 Edit Job 257 EEC 341 342 ELabelBatch 317 ELabellnfo 317 ELabelJob 317 ELabelOCX doc 317 ELabelPrinter 317 Ellipse 38 76 116 Ellipse Field 76 95 116 ENABLE 320 Enable Printing 39 48 67 69 73 76 99 112 116 118 121 128 394 Encodable 362 Encodation 333 335 336 338 339 341 342 344 351 360 366 Encoded Information 336 338 339 341 342 344 351 END 10 37 79 82 90 END key 37 79 Ending Record 264 Ending 264 ENDING RECORD NUMBER 388 English 4s 128 151 English Ing 391 394 Index Enhanced Image Processing 17 168 ENTER 10 23 48 67 69 76 78 79 81 82 90 112 116 118 128 269 281 287 314 315 388 Enter Data Field Name 330 Enter key 15 78 Enter Search Fi
51. Data means that the software will look for the graphic file at the location specified in the database record Please 387 Printed Documentation refer to Adding a Text or Paragraph Field and Adding a Picture Field for more information 3 Once the format is designed the format can be printed When printing the format the software will merge the correct text file and graphic with the correct database information when the operator enters a value for the database search key TRUEDATE TRUETIME The TRUEDATE and TRUETIME functions force the software to send the current system date and time with each format that is sent to the printer To use the TRUEDATE function create a Text field with the data source of Print Date and use the field name TRUEDATE To use the TRUETIME function create a Text field with the data source of Time and use the field name TRUETIME TRUECOUNT The TRUECOUNT function tells the software to use the value of this field for the default value for the number of batches To use TRUECOUNT add a text field to the format named TRUECOUNT The value of this field will become the default number of batches of the label to be printed in the Print Request screen It is also possible for batchsize to be specified ina TRUECOUNT field The syntax is the same as for the formatcount command in a command file two numbers separated by commas give the number of batches and the batchsize For example to print 10 batches of 2
52. Definitions civ eciavecdi nai tases deren ae 273 Internal dBase Data Seiniassnnnssda u anna a a anes ast wean i cast i ra riete cate a aA 275 Database FUNCOMS iii A A ideada nicas 275 Adding a Database tii A toa 275 Moditying a Database Field oi a ista 279 Erasing a Database Field nic isis 279 Indexing a Database iioioi ista 279 Adding an Indek lucia isis 280 Erasing anmindex FilB ioaici aid isis 281 Updating a Databases tii ies ele 281 Changinga DatabaseStruclUr sninen eeraa Ea Aa EAER ANA EAA ETE pa aaar edeak a an aiiai 281 Editinga Database tiroides 281 OAA EA E E E E E A E E as ia atadi 284 Datasheet ViCW A ANNO 284 Printing the Dat base RecordS isinira eraa aa Ear a EA aa Kaaa Aa AEEA aoa Eara Ree 284 Compressing the Databases inii ana e aea a AE been ABS 285 S rting the Databases inenen aeaea E 286 Writing Database Records to a Text Fil8 oooooocccnnncccnnnocccionoccconanccononcnnonannnnono canon cnn nono conan cana n cnn rn cenar nan r rra n rara 286 Appending Records to a Database ccooococonoccccconccccconcccnonaccnnanocononnn conan cnn nann cnn nan cnn nan nn Ran RR nn nn nr RR a nR nn nnn rra nannn ra nan rca nannncannes 287 vii Table Of Contents Erase ALLR COrdS icc ccaeitiar cnc carl ant crake dentin Aaa ab 287 Database view A aaa tedio 289 Databaseview FUNCIONS aa ts 289 Dada OU aaa ala 289 Gross Reference Wizard 0 a a a 290 Adding aN Access Database iii A anal Mae avant 293 Opening a Table iii A
53. Documentation Set Printer Clock Select Yes to set the printer clock to match the computer clock Select No to NOT set the printer clock to match the computer clock Darkness Adjustment Enter a number from 3 to 3 to adjust the base level of print darkness Negative numbers make the print lighter Offset Adjustment Adjust the form edge offset Offset adjustment is the number from 99 to 999 needed to change the formats starting print position Negative numbers will move the starting position down from the top of the format Positive numbers will move the starting position up towards the top of the format Pause Before Printing Select Yes to pause the printer before printing each job Pausing the printer is a safety precaution that protects the operator when an applicator is being used Select No to print each job without pausing the printer Standard Code Sizes Select Standard Code Sizes to use standard SCx symbol sizes for UPC EAN bar codes otherwise leave blank Deselect Standard Code Sizes to print UPC and EAN symbologies with user defined values Selecting Standard Code Sizes allow you to print UPC and EAN symbologies using the European standard code sizes You are also given the option of choosing from a list of available sizes on the bar code specification screen Download Graphics Format Use IMG for traditional imaging PCX for higher quality imaging IMG processing is faster whereas PCX processing produces
54. Documentation Unit Price NN N or N NN If selected the fixed data will be printed in this format Displayed is a unit price e Price Header N if N gt 1 Price Header N if N gt 1 If selected the fixed data will be printed in this format For example If items sell 3 for 2 00 choosing this option will allow the price to be printed as 3 2 00 e Price Header N FOR if N gt 1 Price Header N FOR if N gt 1 If selected the fixed data will be printed in this format For example If items sell 3 for 2 00 choosing this option will allow the price to be printed as 3 FOR 2 00 Report Data To record the value of this field whenever the format is printed select Yes Otherwise Select No The data in this field will be stored each time the format is printed If no fields are specified with this option no format tracking data file will be created Add On Characters You may specify a character string of up to 10 characters to always be appended to the front and or end of the bar code These characters will always be encoded in the bar code The following options are available 136 Insert e None e Header e Trailer e BOTH Header and Trailer Enable Printing This selection will allow you to define a field from any of the available sources of data and not have that field printed on the format You could also use this function to put a message on the screen for your operator Such as the color or s
55. ELabelJob control allows for examining and modifying jobs that are in the print queue Jobs that are currently being printed can be queried for current print status or the job can be cancelled Jobs that are not being printed can be modified to change label counts or the destination printer for example 317 Printed Documentation ELabellnfo The ELabellnfo control allows for read only access to many of the properties of a label format In addition some of the field properties can be accessed None of the properties of the label or its fields can be modified by this control Documentation and Examples For descriptions of the methods and properties available see the documentation file ELabelOCX doc that is installed in the software s directory For more information about the ActiveX documentation and sample programs please visit our website BACK to TOP Application Programming Interface API What is API LabelCommand LabelJobQuery Time Test API vs LabelJobCancel DDE_PrinterStatus Command File Monitoring PO API Examples i The Application Programming Interface is included with the software for legacy purposes If you are doing any type of middleware programming it is strongly recommended that our ActiveX controls be used Application Programming Interface API The software s Application Programming Interface API was called DDE in earlier documentation API is a non interactive printing method in which
56. ESC The field will not be added and you will return to the Edit screen or when entering format size data the new format will not be added BACK to Top Placing a Field on the Format 79 Printed Documentation When you have completed the definition of a bar code or text field the Edit format display screen will return showing your print area On the display screen is a box representing the area that will be taken up by the field To position the field you can drag on the box with the mouse use the arrow keys or the keys marked HOME and END Each arrow key moves the box in the direction indicated by the arrow printed on the key Each keystroke represents a movement of 01 inches or 1mm To make larger movements hold the SHIFT key down while using the arrow keys This will cause each keystroke to move the box in steps of 10 inches or 1 0mm The coordinates of the upper left corner of the box are shown on the lower right side of the format display The horizontal or H coordinate shows the distance in inches from the left edge of the format print area The vertical or V coordinate shows the distance in inches from the top edge of the format print area When you have placed the box at the desired location release the mouse button or press ENTER The field will be drawn on the format display The process of adding the bar code or text field is now complete If you later decide to place the field in a new location you may do so by usi
57. EXTENDED memory installed more that 512K Upper Case International Deselect to disable uppercase International Characters This allows a smaller cell size for each character Select to enable uppercase International Characters This will protect International Characters with uppercase ascenders accent marks umlauts etc from being omitted when the top of that character is placed along the outside edges of a format Please be aware that this option will move the field away from the outside edge of the printed label BACK to TOP HP Notes Laser Jet Bar Code Downloaded Compatible Communications Verification Fonts Printer Printable Bar Width Printable Area ars Paper Size Multipliers Printing a Set of Field Direction Pamat Print Queue True Type Fonts Laser Jet Communications The HP LaserJet Series Il IIP III IV and V should be set to factory defaults The only exception being Parallel I O Following are the specific settings which were tested Auto Continue Off Symbol Set Roman 8 Copies 1 Manual Feed Off 201 Printed Documentation Font Source Font Number 00 Form 60 Lines Parallel I O Bar Code Verification Bar codes were tested using an original HP cartridge with the printer s darkness control set to a five 5 Refilled cartridges had varying results All bar codes were verified as being in spec in all resolutions using a Quick Check IV verifier Downloaded Fonts A r
58. Feed Allow blank label feed before printing first job or suppress label feed Allowing an initial label feed will align the print head to the leading edge of die cut label stock BACK to TOP C Itoh Cables 9 Pin Cable 25 Pin Cable Western Telematic 8 l Switchbox 41 Dip Configuration Configuration Switches Western Telematic Western Telematic Western Telematic Switchbox 41a Dip Switchbox 81c Dip Switchbox 161a Dip Switches Switches Switches Western Telematic Switchbox 41 41a 161a Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switchbox 81c Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switch Box Printer Assignments 179 Printed Documentation 9 Pin Cable Configuration 25 Pin Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switch Boxes You have the ability to increase the number of printers you can drive with your PC by using a Western Telematic CAS 41 4 way switch box a Western Telematic CAS 81 8 way switch box or a Western Telematic CAS 161A 16 way switch box These switching devices may be obtained from WESTERN TELEMATIC INC 5 Sterling Irvine CA 92718 USA 714 586 9950 800 854 7226 Fax 714 583 9514 www wti com If you are using a Western Telematic Switch formats that contain TrueType font text fields cannot be downloaded as a font to the printer through the Western Telematic Switch Box The Western Telematic does not allow TrueType fonts to be downloaded When using TrueType font text fields on a
59. Fonts 250 255 Optional Keyboard 171 Options 31 221 271 Options Tab 215 OR 403 Oracle 3 Oracle 3 Order 441 Printed Documentation Cancel 225 Order 225 Orderby 320 Orientation Angle 67 118 Orientation Independence 367 Orientation Independent 353 355 Orion 244 OSHA 3 Other Features 358 364 366 Other Messages 261 Other RSS 362 Outlined Circle 76 116 Outlined Ellipse 76 116 Output File 173 264 267 314 Outputfile specifying 320 Outputfile 320 Ovation 190 197 Overview 333 335 336 338 339 341 342 343 344 346 347 350 351 353 355 357 358 360 362 364 366 367 369 372 P Packet Structure 369 Page Breaks 34 Page Header 34 Page Layout ss 38 Pallets drums 347 Paper 201 248 Paper Motion 27 442 Paper Size 201 248 Paper Ribbon Out 239 Paradox 3 Paragraph 38 Paragraph Field 4s 128 385 Parallel 161 168 177 182 187 194 204 210 216 221 225 234 239 241 250 Parallel I O 201 248 Parallel Printing 225 Parity 225 394 Parity None 206 215 Partially Blank 107 124 146 Pass Through s1 PASSWORD 320 Passwords 9 Past 10 Paste so 84 89 Path 262 Path name enter 17 Serial File 109 151 Path name 17 109 151 Pause 260 Pause Option 31 PAX Printer 255 PC 3 9 31 34 37 109 126 148 171 173 179 184 190 197 213 225 244 253 320 385 388 PC Paintbrush 391 PC1 RS ON OFF 221 225 PC1 RS ON OFF Protocol 225 PC
60. Linked Field Link data from 2 12 fields This function will allow you to tie together data from different fields on a format to be printed together in one large field Number of Link Fields The number of fields that will be combined to form this field You can choose a number between 2 and 12 Link Field n The source of the data for each linked field you have defined Choices of existing fields or special identifiers appear in the dialog box You may also enter a value enclosed in double quotes To link a bar code Function 1 Function 2 Function 3 or Function 4 character select the appropriate function character from the list BACK to TOP Serialized The data is read from a Serial File If the data is changed by incrementing or decrementing the field then the next available serial number will be rewritten to the Serial File Serial File Name The path name of the Serial File that contains the serial number Print Date The current system date is used to fill the field Unless a special format is selected the date will be printed in the Windows default format For example if Windows default is English date format the date Jan 01 2003 will print in the form mm dd yy 01 01 03 To print the date in the European format of dd mm yy Printed Documentation select Special Formatting option K The same can also be achieved by changing the Windows default date format to be European Date Offset The following three date offsets can b
61. MOON Bis 94 Standard A TON O NAO 94 DAWN ii il 95 EU CN aia 95 TOA O is 96 Navigator a iii 96 O A O NN 96 LO is 97 LOMO DU iia 97 LOMA tias 97 LO tias 97 ME NORTE 99 Bar Code li a oo 99 Adding a Bar Code Field ici ad 99 SOUICe NN 106 Table Of Contents BOX lia A IA A E dale eli Gaal ab al iad Saeed eer Aue 112 Adding a Box Fi ldvaiacacannn A aoa id eas A eee A ae a ae 112 Gircle or Ellipse Fieldin 3200 n8 ewe iii A ba ia ately ait eta ee ae a 116 Adding a Gircle or Ellipse Field A eh Bee aa ee 116 Line Field uci A tS ain ane alae Weed Outen all ee 118 AQUINO INS FOO A A A eee aa a ell ee 118 Picture Piel iii a ate 121 Adding aiPicture Field andiae seventies A A a A ee ae Ae 121 SOULS OF Datars A NN 124 TextField ca vad ava AA aren pire dy AA a ha ot ae einen ah 128 Adding a Textor Paragraph Field 2 2 oitenctaiaiac ai asa a ava edd a ae eae aca la nt ees 129 So rce DA A duced Ueaevedavedgavncacdetgieds 146 O O O AN 157 Print Format Dent ideada 157 Gross acid 158 O NA 158 Align Left NN 158 Genter Horizontal idad 158 NON 158 Space Horizontally ereina ar A dad 158 AiO iW A iaa 158 Genter Vertically ui dad 158 AMADA bad 159 Space Vertical licua tad 159 Printing A NS 161 A ORO 161 Avery De MN SON cia ater tecnica ied nein ee catenin 161 CI A AA a de 162 Table Of Contents Cd tran AS awake A Meee aun a A A O A e 177 A O NN NN 182 DO a 187 AO ni A AS A a AD A I ea ita a S 194 NN 200 O NN 203 NOWOXX A NN
62. Microsoft Access 317 Microsoft Jet Database 391 Microsoft Paintbrush 3 73 121 Microsoft Windows 391 Microsoft Windows Control Panel 391 Microsoft Windows User s Guide 385 Middleware 317 Mils 201 232 248 Minimum Durability Date 347 Mirror Image 31 Missing codewords 369 Missing 369 MM as 128 152 MM DD YY az 128 Mm dd yy 151 MMM Jan 4s 128 MMM as 128 MMMMMMMMM as 128 MOD 403 Mod 10 Check Digit 39 99 Mod 10 Only 39 99 Mod 43 Check Digit 39 99 Mod 43 Only 39 99 Mode Message 438 includes 355 Mode Message 355 Mode S Options 225 Model 259 262 Model 8480s 221 Modify Field 279 Modify Field icon 279 Modifying Database Field 279 Database Structure 275 Modifying 275 279 Modules Printer Task 391 Modules 391 Modulo 10 344 346 347 350 Modulo 103 339 Modulo 43 336 357 Modulus 10 341 342 344 351 Modulus 103 339 Modulus 16 335 Modulus 43 336 338 Monitoring Port 394 Monitoring 394 Monochrome 391 Month Abbreviated Name 4s 128 Digit Day 4s 128 Month zs 128 Month Name 4s 128 Move Field 82 90 Format 37 LOWER RIGHT CORNER 67 118 Selected 311 Move 37 67 79 82 90 118 311 Move Down 258 Move Down button 258 Move Field 82 83 90 94 Move Up 258 Move Up button 258 Move View Change 81 MRP 113 MSI 346 347 MSI Plessey 347 MSI Plessey barcode 346 MSI Plessey Code 346 Multi 262 Multi Buffer 225 Multi Buffer Settings 225 Multiply 153 Multi Port 262 N N da
63. Printer Darkness Select Yes to allow software to set printer darkness This will override any darkness settings defined in the printer Select No to use the printers darkness settings 238 Printing Set Printer Speed Select Yes to allow the software to set printer speed This will override any print speed settings defined in the printer Select No to use the printers speed settings Initial Label Feed Allow blank label feed before printing first job or suppress label feed Allowing an initial label feed will align the print head to the leading edge of die cut label stock BACK to TOP TSC Cables 9 Pin Cable Configuration Tharo Gemini Gemini Gemini 2 and A2 Gemini Setup Printer Description Printer Manufacturer Printer Model Type of Port Darkness Adjustment Paper Ribbon Out Printer Name The Printer Name parameter is optional You may specify a name to uniquely identify this printer This name will show up in the print request screen and the queue s printer list It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX interface Printer Description The Printer Description parameter is optional You may enter a description that further identifies the printer for the user The location of the printer Shipping and Receiving and size type of media loaded 4 inch X 6 inch paper media are examples of what can be stored here 239 Printed Documentation Printer Manufacturer Select the Man
64. Printer Manufacturer Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided Printer Model Select the printer model to be used Type of Port Select the type of port the device is attached to The options are Serial Parallel USB Network Windows or IP Some of these options may or may not be available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected Port Enter the port to which the printer is attached Concurrent Access Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture computers If serial port interrupts are not known do not select concurrent access This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing ZNET Serial Network Select Yes to enable the use of the Zebra ZNET or Zebra Multi Drop serial port networking This allows multiple Zebra printers to be connected to the same serial port This works only for specific Zebra printer models that are chained together and requires special cables available from Zebra Baud Rate Indicate the baud rate used Baud rates may vary on different printers Device Attached 251 Printed Documentation Select the type of device that is attached to the port The choices are Printer Western Telematic 4 way Switch 8 way Switch or 16 way Switch Printer Address When configuring a printer that is attached to a Western Telematic Switch Box
65. Readable Optional although it is typically used Check Digit Optional however Modulus 10 required when using the SCC 14 specification 345 Printed Documentation Encoded Information Contingent upon data requirements although an even number of digits is required A leading zero is used if there is an odd number of digits available Allowable Size Minimum X Dimension 0 075 inches Wide to Narrow Ratio 2 1 to 3 1 with X Dimension gt 020 inches 2 2 1 to 3 1 with X Dimension lt 020 inches The SSC 14 specifications outline magnifications that are allowable Allowable Symbol Height The greater of 25 inches or 15 of the symbol length MSI History and Overview MSI Plessey Code is a pulse width modulated non self checking code Each character is represented by 4 bars a narrow bar represents a binary O and a wide bar represents a binary 1 The bars have the binary weights 8 4 2 1 It is possible to encode the digits 0 through 9 and the letters A through F although this code is most often used just for numeric information In MSI code the zero bit is a one unit bar followed by a two unit space and the one bit is a two unit bar followed by a one unit space Complete four bit characters are thus 12 units wide which is large for a numeric symbology The MSI symbol includes a start pattern data characters one or two check digits and a stop pattern A MSI Plessey barcode always includes a Modulo 10 checksum a
66. Receiving and size type of media loaded 4 inch X 6 inch paper media are examples of what can be stored here Printer Manufacturer Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided Printer Model Select the printer model to be used S Model If the printer is an S Model select S Model Printer from the Options tab otherwise deselect S Model printer Type of Port Select the type of port the device is attached to The options are Serial Parallel USB Network Windows or IP Some of these options may or may not be available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected Port Select the port to which the printer is attached Concurrent Access 222 Printing Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture computers If serial port interrupts are not known do not select concurrent access This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing Bidirectional If you are using a serial cable you can select Bidirectional to use printer protocol STATUS 2 or STATUS 4 and a BIDIRECTIONAL cable Deselect Bidirectional to use printer protocol PC1 RS ON OFF and a DTR cable The software does not differentiate between the protocols STATUS 2 or STATUS 4 If you are using a parallel cable you can select Bidirectional to enable Status and the Cancel command with a parallel cable
67. Select Yes if your printer has the calendar option clock chip installed This will allow formats that contain date time fields to be handled internally in the printer and be updated to reflect the current date time when the label is printed Select No to download the date time from the program Set Printer Darkness 209 Printed Documentation Select Yes to allow software to set printer darkness This will override any darkness setting defined in the printer Select No to use printers darkness setting BACK to TOP Novexx Cables Lion Puma Tiger Tiger XXL and Lion Puma Tiger Tiger XXL and XXtreme 9 Pin Cable Configuration XXtreme 25 Pin Cable Configuration Lion Puma Tiger Tiger XXL and XXtreme 9 Pin Cable Configuration Lion Puma Tiger Tiger XXL and XXtreme 25 Pin Cable Configuration BACK to TOP Novexx Notes RS 232 Communications RS 232 Communications Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Handshake RTS CTS Standard BACK to TOP Printronix Printronix Setup Printer Description Printer Manufacturer 210 Printing Printer Model Type of Port Port Concurrent Access Use Hardware Direct Print Handshake Set Printer Clock Darkness Adjustment Offset Adjustment Initial Label Feed RFID Enabled OOOO Printer Name The Printer Name parameter is optional You may specify a name to uniquely identify this printer This name will show up in the print request screen and the queue s printer lis
68. Specification Options Select No if transfer printing with a ribbon Select Yes if printing on thermal paper without a ribbon Paper Ribbon Out Condition While printing a situation may occur where the Gemini will run out of label or ribbon stock When this occurs a message dialog box will appear explaining that there is an error on the printer The type of error condition and the number of unprinted labels will be displayed along with the following message Please correct the printer error then Press OK After replacing the paper or ribbon stock click OK The printer will automatically resume printing True Type Fonts TrueType fonts on the Gemini printers are supported on the Text Field definition screen Tharo Setup Includes 112 112 Plus Freedom Magic Orion Wizard and Hercules Printer Printer Printer Use i Concurrent Device Port Hardware Access Baud Rate Attached Handshake Printer Printer 7 Darkness Offset Translucent Initial Label Adjustment Ribbon Feed Printer Name 241 Printed Documentation The Printer Name parameter is optional You may specify a name to uniquely identify this printer This name will show up in the print request screen and the queue s printer list It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX interface Printer Description The Printer Description parameter is optional You may enter a description that further identifies the printer for the user The location
69. Stacked fields are not supported with Font H Tipton Gothic Fixed Font Tipton Gothic Proportional Font J Rotatable and TrueType fonts Void amp Reprint The RJS printer is designed to verify up to 15 bar codes as they are printed The printer will verify bar codes in orientations 1 and 3 Picket Fence only Bar codes in orientations 2 and 4 Step Ladder will not verify The Void and Reprint option will enable or disable bar code verification If enabled any labels with invalid bar codes will have a checkerboard pattern printed over the invalid bar code The printer will then try to reprint the label up to 3 times If more than 3 invalid labels are printed the printer will lock up and must be reset by turning the printer off and then on again or by pressing the Red Reset button located inside the printer Printing a Set of Formats 219 Printed Documentation When using a Command File to print you formats all jobs will be released to the printer immediately rather than being held in the print queue If you turn the printer off for any reason you must exit the program and restart it so the printer will re initialize The RJS printer limits you to 32 serialized incremented fields on a format Bar code fields with interpretations count as two since both the bar code and the interpretation must be serialized Lines will automatically reverse when crossing another field If a line that doesn t reverse when crossing anothe
70. Tharo Datamax Printers 391 Tharo Fargo Datamax 391 The New Database Structure Creating 275 The New Database Structure 275 The PASSWORD 381 The software s ActiveX 317 The USER ID 381 Thermabar 218 Thermabar Parallel Centronix Dip Switches 218 Thermabar RS 232 Communications 218 Thermabar RS 232 Communications Dip Switches 218 Thermal Transfer 28 Thermal thermal 3 262 284 Thermal Thermal Transfer bar 28 ThermaLine T3306 215 These Als 347 THIS FUNCTION WILL PERMANENTLY ERASE ALL MARKED RECORDS 285 TIFF 391 Tiger 210 Tiger XXL 210 Time 152 318 385 457 Printed Documentation Time Format 152 Time Out 263 Time Stamp 152 Time Test 318 Toleranced intercharacter 336 Too Large 381 Too Small 381 Tool menu 79 Toolbars 19 94 95 96 Tools choosing 271 selecting 81 89 Tools 81 83 89 96 157 173 269 271 273 331 Tools Tool Bar Select View display 96 Tools Tool Bar Select View 96 Tools Toolbar 96 Top Margin ss 157 271 273 284 311 TOTAL 261 369 388 394 403 Traceability Numbers 347 Tracking Header 313 Tracking 313 Tracking Report printing 272 Tracking Report 86 272 Trailer 39 99 Trailing 458 Characters 39 99 Edge 206 Edge Violations 206 Trailing 39 99 206 Trailing Edge causing 206 Trailing Edge 206 Transaction References 347 Translucent Ribbon 241 Transmissive Sensor 28 Transportation Department 3 Transportation 3 Trim Trailing Blanks 34 109 126 148 True Type contains
71. The printer must have the multi buffer toggle turned on This option is only available on the E series printers Baud Rate Indicate the baud rate used Baud rates may vary on different printers Device Attached Select the type of device that is attached to the port The choices are Printer Western Telematic 4 way Switch 8 way Switch or 16 way Switch Printer Address When configuring a printer that is attached to a Western Telematic Switch Box enter the number on the switch box that the printer is connected to Direct Print Select direct print to send data directly to the port For a shared or network printer be sure direct print is not selected This option appears for those printers that can be configured for parallel printing This option only appears when using Windows 95 98 or ME Printer Memory This option allows you to define which card slot the memory card is connected to Memory card options vary based on the printer used This item only appears when configuring for a CL408 a CL412 a CL608 ora CL612 223 Printed Documentation Cutter Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability While designing the format if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you may choose e Donotcut e Cut after each Format e Cut after each Batch e Cut after each Job Calendar Option Select Yes if your printer has the calendar option clock chip installed This will allow fo
72. User Account Expires Disabled Changing Users Deleting User User Sign On Password Protection In order to prevent unauthorized use of the software the program is supplied with user sign on requirements and user password protection Each user may be assigned a separate password and individual access to Menu Functions The Manager Functions allows the person responsible for maintaining security to view or change any or all passwords as well as program configuration options and printer configuration Adding a User To add a user choose Settings Users from the main screen click the Add a User icon or choose Edit Add from the menu bar 23 Printed Documentation User Identifier Up to 16 characters to identify a user of the software This is the name the user will log into sign in the software under May contain a space digits letters or a period Password Enter the initial password to be used by the user must be 16 characters or less User Name This is an optional field where the user s real name can be entered User Description This is an optional field where a description of the user can be entered Controlled Access Areas You may select Yes to allow or No to disallow access to the following functions e Update Format e Edit in Print Format Mode e Print Format e Print Report e Database Functions e Manager Functions User can change password Select Yes if you want user to be able to change their passwor
73. Valid Format Name Found A valid format name was not found in the command file Non alphabetic characters in field Non alphanumeric characters in field Non numeric characters in field Not a valid file or directory name Printed Documentation Not an existing file in directory Picture Error Cannot read picture or picture too large Probable Cause The specified picture file cannot be found or the size of the picture is too large for the printer Please enter a name that has not already been used Please enter a valid number Please enter valid data Queue Error Error loading job in queue or cannot read queue file Probable Cause A job file cannot be found while restoring the Print Queue Rename failed Software Key Not Responding The Software Key may be missing defective or you may not have the Software Key device drivers installed Please download the drivers from out website www tharo com and install them This condition can be caused by a bad connection to the PC no Software Key drivers installed or a Software Key failure Please press F3 for help in diagnosing the problem Starting Job Number Not Found in Command File A starting record number specified on the command line was not found in the associated command file Syntax Error in Index Expression An invalid operation in an index expression The Format Request List is Full Cannot Add This Job Cause EASYLABEL folder is write protected or 220 jobs in Que
74. Week Number within Year WWW 3 Letter Day of Week WWWWWWWWW Day of Week Name Example MM DD YY Custom Spacing Custom Spacing This option allows for compliance with various industry standard formats for bar code human readable interpretations You may use a character string of 9 s to represent positions to be filled by data The allowable separators are any special characters you desire for your format including spaces This meets the needs of different standards such as NDC which requires dashes and spaces or UCC EAN 128 which requires parentheses and spaces 53 Printed Documentation 54 Custom Numeric Amount Format Custom Numeric Amount Format This option allows you to format a string of numeric data If you would like to suppress the printing of leading zeroes or only print specific parts of the numeric data such as the first 3 digits you can use a character string of 9 s X s or Z s to represent positions to be filled by data O RPS Interpretation with Checksum RPS Interpretation with Checksum This option allows you to create the Human Readable interpretation for an RPS bar code To properly create an RPS bar code with interpretation refer to your RPS Bar Code Specifications Price NN or N NN Price NN or N NN If selected the fixed data will be printed in this format Displayed is a price with decimal points but no currency sign s Price NN or N NN Price NN or N NN If selecte
75. When using Maxicode with Apollo printers that support it data must be entered in the following format CCCSSSHZZZZZXXXXH data 166 Printing Where CCC Country Code SSS Service Code ZZZZZXXXX Zip Code 4 Digit Extension optional Must be enclosed in signs data Alphanumeric Data maximum length 84 characters Example 123999 442120798 This is an example Flash Memory Card Downloads Select Memory Card Download to mark this format to be intended for download to the memory card Note that some software features will not be accessible during label creation due to printer and memory card limitations Cut Offset Enter the distance from the point at which the label stops printing and the point at which the label is to be cut in hundredths of inches This value should be approximately 60 To make TWO cuts per label enter two offsets separated by a comma For example to cut a reflective marking out of a label the first offset should be approximately 60 and the second offset should the amount of space between the end of the first label and the start of the second label Using an Optional Keyboard An optional keyboard can be attached to the printer This allows faster input for variable data entry for formats stored on the memory card that require operator input Please see the printer Operators Manual for additional information Disable Reprint Select Disable Reprint to prevent the printer from re
76. You may enter a description that further identifies the printer for the user The location of the printer Shipping and Receiving and size type of media loaded 4 inch X 6 inch paper media are examples of what can be stored here Printer Manufacturer Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided Printer Model Select the printer model to be used Type of Port Select the type of port the device is attached to The options are Serial Parallel USB Network Windows or IP Some of these options may or may not be available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected Use Hardware Handshake Select Yes to use a hardware handshake Select No to use an XON XOFF handshake Baud Rate Indicate the baud rate used Baud rates may vary on different printers Port Select the port to which the printer is attached 161 Printed Documentation Concurrent Access Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture computers If serial port interrupts are not known do not select concurrent access This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing Cutter Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability While designing the format if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you may choose Do not cut Cut after each Format Cut af
77. a at 20 A O NOS 23 D signingi Formats viii A A ea aaa A LD ES AE 27 Format Specifications sion A A AA A A A eal 27 A NN 27 Printer Settings ii i aah eee ava adelante a ena ea eta earl adie 28 CU cea A a ada 34 CutOptions oi ES A A A E ES ES 34 Page Header it A aunt ave A A au vant dl A A 34 Creating eissi arnt A A aaa ea ia lied A DS ae aad 36 Label UP ira Aaa ees Ga AA aa vane tab Bae eta aba deans 36 Greating Formats unica A el a eee 36 Moving onithe Formalne csccvienedceete inane tie aia ae ei eid ele el leery 37 Maximum Fields ofa Format iniciar e ardid 37 Erasing a Format id 38 Viewing Changing Format Silicio ada 38 Adding a New ld tatoo 38 Create a Bar Code Using the Wizard oooonncccinnncccinncccnnoncccnononcnonnocononnnnn non aa E nEaN A EEEE nc nana n aran EAE ENAT RAEE 38 Adding a Bar Code Field aldo 39 Adding a Multi Source Bar Code Field oooooooconnccccnnnccccnancccconcccnnonccononnccnnnnnnnnnnnnn cnn nc cnn n nana n carr nn crm n cnn nn nc nn n cnc nnnncacane 47 Adding a Textor Paragraph Field acacia 49 Adding a Multi Source Text field miii ads 65 Adding a Line Field iaa ii cee aati 67 Adding a Box Elli Can eis ete nave idee cee ett 69 Adding a Picture Field arenei sarv Alda leans acid 73 Adding a Circle or Ellipse Fieldiis cis stsnctecic tee algae Can aeaa a Vaa a racine Ge Weer ee cenit 76 Entering Specification Data nuca dica 78 Placing a Field on the Format 025 aie eesad GareGia auc inne ane S
78. a square grid with a square central bullseye finder The smallest Aztec Code symbol is 15x15 modules square and the largest is 151x151 This small version encodes 13 numeric or 12 alphabetic characters while the largest Aztec Code symbol encodes 3832 numeric or 3067 alphabetic characters or 1914 bytes of data No quiet zone is required outside the bounds of the symbol There are 32 sizes in all with user selected amounts of Reed Solomon error encoding from 5 to 95 of data region The recommended level is 23 of symbol capacity plus 3 codewords All 8 bit values can be encoded Values 0 127 are interpreted as the ASCII character set while values 128 255 are interpreted as ISO 8859 1 Latin Alphabet No 1 Two non data characters can be encoded FNC1 for compatibility with some existing applications and ECI escape sequences for the standardized encoding of message interpretation information Specifications Character Set a All 8 bit values can be encoded The default interpretation shall be 1 for values O 127 ABSI X3 4 i e ASCII and 2 for values 128 255 ISO 8859 1 Latin Alphabet No 1 This corresponds to ECI 000003 Two non data characters can be encoded FNC1 for compatibility with some existing applications and ECI escape sequence for the standardized encoding of message interpretation information Representation of Data A dark module is a binary one 1 and a light module is a binary zero 0 Symbol Size a The sm
79. a zero the digit will print Fixed Data For example if the data is and you want to suppress the 3 leading zeroes enter the following for the Format String screen item The data that will print will be This example will suppress only the first three leading zeroes If there are more than three leading zeroes in the data stream only the first three leading zeroes will be suppressed Variable Data When the data is unknown such as database input or operator input and you want to suppress all leading zeroes it is best to enter the following for the Format String screen item Entering the format string this way will always suppress the leading zeroes no matter what the actual data is For example if the data is Insert The following will print If the data is 000000123 The following will print 123 The X place holder should be used to always suppress a digit in a specific position For example if the data is and you want to print only the last six digits enter the following for the Format String screen item The data that will print will be The number of place holder characters specified for Format String must match the number of characters in the data string a If data is coming from a database or if the data is When Printed and the maximum field length is 10 there should be 10 characters specified in the Format String will suppress any leading zeroes For example if the data is The charact
80. access Add Records Change Records Unmark All Mark for Erase Mark for Print Viewing the Data Add Records The highlight bar will move to the first field of a blank record Field data will be entered to the right of the field name The TAB key will move among the fields If there are more fields than can be displayed at once the fields will be displayed in sets called pages When the last field data is entered press ENTER to add the Printed Documentation record You can change the data and press ENTER to add additional records Press ESC to stop adding records If you did not change any field data but pressed ENTER again a Dialog Box will be displayed asking whether the record should be added Click OK to add the record This will make a duplicate record in the database Click Cancel to not add a duplicate record While adding several records to the database the last record entered is left on the screen Similar field data will not have to be retyped for subsequent records For example this allows you the ability to change only a single character in a 10 character part number field without retyping the entire part number When entering paragraph information you can use a text editor From within the edit box you can open and edit an existing text file save the paragraph data as a file cut text to copy or paste text from the Windows clipboard or delete text Once you have finished modifying the paragraph data you can retur
81. allow a user to be added unless the length of the User ID is equal to or greater than this number Leaving this option set to 0 means there is no Minimum User ID Length Minimum Password Length Enter the number of characters to be used as the minimum length for a Password The Software will not accept password unless the length of the password is equal to or greater than this number Leaving this option set to 0 means there is no Minimum Password Length Complex Password Select Yes to force passwords to contain at least one numeric 0 9 or special etc character Select No to allow simple passwords composed of letters only Password Reuse Times Enter the number which defines the password reuse policy The number entered here will be the number of passwords the software emembers The software will not allow a user to re use one of these passwords Leaving this option set to 0 means no passwords are remembered and the user would be able to keep using the same password For example entering a 3 here will prohibit users from re using their 3 last used passwords Password Expiration Date Enter the number of days after which the password will expire The next time the user logs on with the old password they will be prompted to enter a new password before being able to use the software Username password is required for saved changes Select Yes to require the user to enter a username and password for any changes
82. and ellipses you have the ability to adjust the thickness of the circle or ellipse border The left arrow will increase the thickness of the circle or ellipse and the right arrow will decrease the thickness of the circle or ellipse When you have successfully placed and sized the area for the circle or ellipse press ENTER The circle or ellipse will be added to the format and displayed If Circles and or Ellipses are not supported for the printer the menu option will be grayed Each of the Circle Ellipse data field items are described below Field Name A name to associate with the field Can be up to 32 characters long The name is necessary if you will be recording the value of this field in a format tracking report copying data from this field into another field using this field s data in a Linked Field or filling this field using the Command File facility Comment Enter a comment for this field Horizontal Position Enter the horizontal position of the field Vertical Position Enter the horizontal position of the field Enable Printing Select Yes to print the field on the format Select No to display the field on the format but do not print the field Select Conditional to specify a print criterion for the field Field Width Enter the Width of the field in inches and hundredths of inches Field Height Enter the Height of the field in inches and hundredths of inches 117 Printed Documentation Line Thickness E
83. and select which data type the field will be Adding a Record To add a new record click the Add New icon from the Standard toolbar or select Edit Add New Record from the Menu bar Enter the appropriate data in the fields and press the tab key on the keyboard to navigate through the data cells A new record will automatically be added when the tab key is selected in the last field of that record Deleting a Record To delete a record in a table first select any data cell in that record then click the Delete icon from the Standard toolbar or select Edit Delete Record from the Menu bar The software will verify with you that it is ok to delete the record if it is click OK Changing Fonts Databaseview allows you to specify the Font Font Style and Font Size that the records in your table will be displayed in The changes will effect the entire table it is not possible to change the Font attributes for a specific record To specify a Font Font Style or Font size select any record in the database table To change the font that the records are displayed in select the appropriate font from the font drop down text box To make the text bold click Bold To make the text italics click Italics To underline the text click underline 300 Databaseview Navigating a Database Table You have the ability to move through records in a table in both Form View and Datasheet View The navigation buttons are located on the Navigate t
84. another application can use Command File functions to directly communicate with the software to initiate label printing cancel print jobs query job status or retrieve printer status An application communicating using API functions sends the first label to the printer more quickly than if running the software with Command File Monitoring enabled The software s API supports the following functions LabelCommand The LabelCommand function allows the commands to be entered exactly in the same format as for a batch command file The single operand points to a data string which may contain line feeds and carriage returns but must be terminated 318 Advanced by a final NULL character Keyword operands must be separated by blanks and a semicolon must terminate each job like in a batch file Example LabelJobQuery The LabelJobQuery function can be used to obtain the current status of any active or waiting job using its job number as an argument The information displayed in the Print Queue is the information that can be returned with LabelJobQuery Example status LabelJobQuery jobnumber name description status amp total remain LabelJobCancel The LabelJobCancel function cancels an active or waiting job in the Print Queue Example LabelJobCancel jobnumber DDE_PrinterStatus The DDE_PrinterStatus function can be used to retrieve the current status of any jobs currently printing A file called n d
85. be available while editing a format Cent Substitute Select Yes to print the tilde as a cent symbol International Characters Select ANSI if Text Files command data etc are created under Windows using ANSI characters Select OEM if created under DOS Use Slashed Zero Select No to use Unslashed zero Select Yes to use Slashed zero if available Image Processing Indicate the type of processing to be used Enhanced Image Processing will allow you to open many more types of images To display and print in color you must use Enhanced Image Processing Command File Monitor Select Yes to enable continuous automatic checking for the existence of a command file whenever the application window is minimized Select No to disable monitoring Default Command File When command file monitoring is selected enter the path name of the command file Delete Command File Select Yes to delete the default command file after processing This is useful when an external program needs to know that the command file has been processed Select No to retain the default command file after processing Command files that are processed by drag and drop onto the EASYLABEL window are NEVER deleted regardless of the setting of the Delete Command File program option BACK to TOP Program Options Appearance a f Primary Highlighted Text Phantom Fields Background Alternate Format Background Background Placement Grid Large Tool
86. be installed in order to design and print labels to a printer driver delivered with Microsoft Windows or supported under the Windows Control Panel LABELPRO DLL Printer dependent module for the RJS printers LABELPSO DLL Printer dependent module for the SATO printers LABELPTO DLL Printer dependent module for the TEC printers 393 Printed Documentation LABELPXO DLL Printer dependent module for the Printronix printers LABELPZO DLL Printer dependent module for the Zebra printers LABELTO DLL A library containing routines used by the Windows printer drivers to printa PDF417 bar code This module must be present if you are printing PDF417 using a Windows Printer driver logreader exe the Log Reading Utility used to read the encrypted user logs QRENCODE DLL A library that contains routines used to print a QR Code README TXT Release Notes for the Software RSS14BAR DLL A library that contains routines used to printa RSS 14 bar code SftTv32 DLL Used to create the Datasheet view in the Databaseview editor UNINST ISU The UNinstallshield information file for the uninstallation of the Software UTD DLL A utility library for the Software s Active X BACK to TOP Appendix E Installing Code Page 850 For additional information on installing Code Page 850 in Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows 2000 Windows NT or Windows XP please refer to the following page on our website by clicking HERE Appendix F Hexadecima
87. be set again in the printers front panel MaxiCode 206 Printing When using MaxiCode with Intermec printers that support it data must be entered in the following format CCCSSS ZZZZZXXXX data Where CCC Country Code SSS Service Code ZZZZZXXXX Zip Code 4 Digit Extension optional Must be enclosed in signs data Alphanumeric Data maximum length 84 characters Example 123999 442120798 This is an example Print Speed and Image Bands The print speed and image bands determine the rate at which the printer processes the images of your labels In the printer label printing and image processing occur simultaneously For this reason it is very important that these settings be synchronized If the Image Band command is too low the imaging process is unable to keep up with the print speed In this case the printer stops printing and starts again at the lowest print speed If the Image Band command is set too high the printer spends too much time imaging which slows down label production To optimize the number of image bands for your print speed set the image bands at the lowest number and then print a label at the desired speed If the label prints the Image Band setting is correctly optimized To optimize the number of image bands for batch printing you must select enough image memory to allow the printer to retain the entire label image PLUS ONE INCH one image band is equal to 1 inch Therefore if t
88. by a matrix of columns and rows in a multi row symbology Specifications Character Set 1 Values 0 127 in accordance with ANSI X3 4 i e all 128 ASCII characters equivalent to the US national version of ISO 646 2 Values 128 255 in accordance with ISO 8859 1 Latin Alphabet No 1 NOTE This corresponds to ECI 000003 Character Structure n k m symbology of 16 modules n 4 bar elements k with the largest element 6 modules wide m Maximum Number of Data Characters per symbol at the lowest level of error correction 1 Alphanumeric data 4 083 characters 2 8 bit byte data 2 546 characters 3 Numeric data 5 102 digits Symbol Size 1 Number of packets 3 to 1023 2 Maximum codeword capacity 1023 per single block 2046 per double block 3 Maximum data codeword capacity 2044 including Symbol Structure Header Selectable Error Correction 32 levels of error correction requiring 2 to 1056 error correcting codewords per symbol Non data Overhead 1 Per packet 1 address codeword 370 Bar Code Information 2 Per row 6 modules for start pattern 3 modules for stop pattern 20 modules for quiet zone a total of 29 modules 3 Per symbol 2 4 codewords for header plus error correction codeword Code Type Continuous Character Self checking Yes Bi directionally Decodable Yes Additional Features The following summary is of additional features which are inherent or optional in SuperCode a Packet Structure In
89. characters CODABLOCK F is used in medical areas as HIBC Health Industry Bar Code for things such as labeling blood plasma or implants CODABLOCK 256 This variety has the same structure of CODABLOCK F but has special start and stop characters It can consist of 2 to 44 rows each containing 4 to 62 characters totaling maximum 2 725 characters Each row contains error correction so that minor damage can be repaired Advantages Increased reliability of data of one single CODABLOCK label with respect to several separate labels to encode one message Flexibility in adapting the information to encode to a given area thanks to variable height and information density All the reading devices on the market can be used as the CODABLOCK is based on already existing bar code symbologies Re assembling each line to reproduce the complete message in the right sequence can also be achieved by means of an overhead calculation system Disadvantages The stacked structure must be respected during the reading process Code 49 358 Bar Code Information History and Overview Code 49 was developed by David Allais in 1987 at the Intermec Corporation to fill a need to pack a lot of information into a very small symbol It is a multiple row continuous variable symbology encoding the full ASCII 128 character set Each row is composed of 18 bars and 17 spaces There are between two and eight adjacent rows each divided by a separator bar Each row
90. contain an explicit linkage flag UCC EAN 128 emulation Readers set to the UCC EAN 128 emulation mode transmit the data encoded within the Composite symbol as if the data were encoded in one or more UCC EAN 128 symbols Composite Component escape mechanism a mechanism to support future applications which require data content beyond the ISO 646 subset encodable in the standard form of the EAN UCC Composite Symbology Examples MaxiCode History and Overview A fixed sized 2D matrix symbology MaxiCode originally called UPS Code was developed by United Parcel Service This public domain code is made up of offset rows of hexagonal elements arranged around a central bulls eye finder pattern Hexagonal elements allow dense packing and provide fixed center to center spacing of all elements The central finder pattern and fixed symbol size allow for easy scanning on high speed conveyors MaxiCode is made up of 1 inch by 1 inch array of 866 interlocking hexagons This allows the code to be at least 15 denser than a square dot code but requires higher resolution printers thermal direct transfer or laser to print it A central bulls eye allows a scanner to locate the label regardless of orientation ASCII data is encoded in six bit symbol characters There are five different code sets A single MaxiCode symbol can encode up to 144 characters of data provides two levels of Reed Solomon error correction and can be read when up to 25 o
91. correct 381 Printed Documentation Field is too small not changed Field is too small not created Field Length is Too Large The field length is greater than 255 Field Length is Too Small The field length is zero Format request list is full Cannot add this job Format Saved With DEMO Version Cannot do production print Cannot do a production print of a format that was saved using the DEMO version General Protection Fault GPF Application Error An error has occurred with the application Contact your reseller if any such error occurs You will need to contact your reseller AFTER recording the information and printing it out General Protection Faults can be recorded while running a utility program called DR WATSON Dr Watson is provided with Windows 98 and higher If a system error occurs Dr Watson creates a special file called DRWATSON LOG Dr Watson will prompt you for details about the circumstances under which the application error occurred After recording the information it is recommended that you exit Windows then restart Windows and the application You can print the contents of the LOG file and send the results to your reseller Some General Protection Faults are not reproducible therefore it is also recommended that you have DR WATSON running in the background while you are working with the software or any other application The location of Dr Watson can be different depending on what version of Window
92. ends with a 5 type the following expression ITEMNUM LIKE A_5 Where ITEMNUM is the field name in your database The length of ITEMNUM is 3 LIKE is the comparison operator LIKE A is the starting character of the ITEMNUM to match _ is a substitute for any single character 5 is the last character of the ITEMNUM to match The database will be searched for all records where the ITEMNUM is 3 characters in length begins with an A ends with a 5 and has any character in the second position Only those records will be printed BACK to TOP Adding a Multi Source Text field Adding a Multi Field Properties Source Text Field Button OK Button Literal Strings Existing Fields Field Data Cancel Button Segments 65 Printed Documentation Existing Data Segments Adding a Multi Source Text Field Field Properties Button Clicking the Field Properties button will allow you to modify the properties of the final text field excluding source of data Please see Adding a Text Field for details OK Button Clicking the OK Button will create the Multi Source Text Field Cancel Button Clicking the Cancel button will cancel the creation of the Multi Source Text Field Field Data Segments This list shows all of the data segments that will be part of the completed Text Field The data segments will be listed in the order that they will appear in the text field You can change this order by selecting a segm
93. enter the number on the switch box that the printer is connected to Direct Print Select direct print to send data directly to the port For a shared or network printer be sure direct print is not selected This option appears for those printers that can be configured for parallel printing This option only appears when using Windows 95 98 or ME Cutter Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability While designing the format if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you may choose Do not cut Cut after each Format Cut after each Batch Cut after each Job Optimize DataMatrix Select Yes to optimize the DataMatrix 2D symbology If the printer supports this symbology internally has correct firmware version it will print much quicker Select No to produce DataMatrix as a graphic This is supported for all printers but prints slower Set Printer Darkness Select Yes to allow software to set printer darkness This will override any darkness setting defined in the printer Select No to use printers darkness setting Print ID Label Select Print ID Label to have a printer identification label printed at initialization Deselect Print ID Label if no printer identification label is needed If you have specified to have an ID label printed the software will cause an ID label to be printed at the start up of each session The ID label shows a number indicating 252 Printing
94. for replication Integer Integer whole number data from 2 31 2 147 483 648 through 2 31 1 2 147 483 647 Storage size is 4 bytes Long Binary Default Stores numbers from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 no fractions Long Char Real Smalllnt Integer data from 2 15 32 768 through 2 15 1 32 767 Storage size is 2 bytes VarBinar Variable length binary data with a maximum length of 8 000 bytes VarChar Variable length non Unicode character data with length of n bytes n must be a value from 1 through 8 000 Storage size is the actual length in bytes of the data entered not n bytes The data entered can be O characters in length Length When defining a variable field the maximum length of the field must be entered Constraint This option determines whether a value is required to be entered for a specific field Selecting May Null specifies that the field does not need to have data entered Selecting Not Null specifies that the field must have data entered The Table Definition portion of the Create a New Table dialog box is used to insert defined fields into your table and to modify the placement of those fields 295 Printed Documentation Insert to Table After a field has been defined in the Column Definition section selecting this button will insert it sequentially into your database structure Remove Will remove an inserted field from your database structure Move Up Will move an inser
95. format and a Western Telematic Switch you must download the font as a graphic Western Telematic Switchbox 41 Dip Switches Western Telematic Switchbox 41a Dip Switches Western Telematic Switchbox 81c Dip Switches The CAS 81C 8 way Switch Box is equipped with a set of 8 position or 10 position Dip Switches as follows NOTE When purchasing the CAS 81c 8 way switchbox it must be equipped with firmware version 1 0a Western Telematic Switchbox 161a Dip Switches 180 Printing Western Telematic Switch Box Printer Assignments If a third CAS 41 Code Activated Switch is connected to the PC above printer assignments would be 9 through 12 The same would be true for the CAS 161A where the first switch box would go to Printers 1 through 16 the second switch box would go to Printers 17 through 32 and if a third switch box is connected it would go to Printers 33 through 48 Western Telematic Switchbox 41 41a 161a Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switchbox 81c Cable Configuration BACK to TOP C Itoh Notes MaxiCode RS 232 Communications MaxiCode CCCSSS ZZZZZXXXxX data Where CCC Country Code SSS Service Code ZZZZZXXXX Zip Code 4 Digit Extension optional Must be enclosed in signs data Alphanumeric Data maximum length 84 characters Example 181 Printed Documentation 123999 442120798 This is an example RS 232 Communications Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1
96. horizontal sides Pressing the arrow keys while holding down the shift key will result in movements of 10 inches or 1 0mm When the box s borders are the proper thickness press ENTER The box will be added to the format and displayed For printers that support shaded boxes or polygons you will be presented with the Create Box Field Specification screen Each of the specification screen items are described below Field Name A name to associate with the field Can be up to 32 characters long The name is necessary if you will be recording the value of this field in a format tracking report copying data from this field into another field using this field s data in a Linked Field or filling this field using the Command File facility Horizontal Position Enter the horizontal position of the field Vertical Position Enter the vertical position of the field 113 Printed Documentation Comment Enter a comment for this field Shape You will be presented with an on screen list of available shapes from which to choose The available choices for box fields are Rectangle Solid Rectangle Rounded Rectangle Solid Rounded Rectangle Regular Polygon Solid Polygon Number of Sides You will be presented with an on screen list of available choices from which to define the number of sides the polygon should have A polygon can be designed to have any number of sides from 3 to 12 Fill Pattern You will be presented with an
97. in double quotes 144 Insert The LIKE comparison operator allows you to perform pattern matching You can substitute a percent or an underscore character for a whole word a group of characters or a single character A percent sign represents a whole word or any GROUP of characters in the data The _ underscore represents any SINGLE character in the data For example if you need to print all records where the UPC code begins with the number 6 and ends with any character type the following expression UPCCODE LIKE 6 Where UPCCODE is the field name in your database LIKE is the comparison operator LIKE 6 is the starting character of the UPC code to match designates the remaining characters in the UPC code The database will be searched for all records which begin with the number 6 and only those records will be printed If you need to print all records where an Item number begins with A and ends with a 5 type the following expression ITEMNUM LIKE A_5 Where ITEMNUM is the field name in your database The length of ITEMNUM is 3 LIKE is the comparison operator LIKE A is the starting character of the ITEMNUM to match _ is a substitute for any single character 5 is the last character of the ITEMNUM to match The database will be searched for all records where the ITEMNUM is 3 characters in length begins with an A ends with a 5 and has any character in the second position Only those records will be
98. interrupts are not known deselect Concurrent Access This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing Baud Rate Indicate the baud rate used Baud rates may vary on different printers Direct Print Select Direct Print to send data directly to the port For a shared or network printer be sure direct print is not selected This option appears for those printers that can be configured for parallel printing This option only appears when using Windows 95 98 or ME Cutter elect Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability While designing the format if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you may choose e Donotcut e Cut after each Format e Cut after each Batch e Cut after each Job Darkness Adjustment 217 Printed Documentation Enter a number from 10 through 10 to adjust the base level of print darkness Negative numbers make the print lighter This screen only appears for the RJS Qualibar 440 and 450 BACK to TOP RJS Cables Thermabar 9 Pin Cable Thermabar 25 Pin Cable Configuration Configuration Qualabar 25 Pin Cable Qualabar 9 Pin Cable Configuration Configuration Thermabar 9 Pin Cable Configuration Thermabar 25 Pin Cable Configuration Qualabar 9 Pin Cable Configuration Qualabar 25 Pin Cable Configuration BACK to TOP RJS Notes Printable oa Field Direction Stacked Fields Void amp Reprint Printing a Set of Prin
99. is of the form where condition The purpose of the where clause is to print database records based on a condition The condition in the where clause consists of a valid database field name one or more comparison or logical operators and a field value For example if you need to print all records where Aisle number is 100 the where clause in the command file would be where AISLENUM 100 orderby The orderby clause is of the form orderby lt fieldname gt The purpose of the orderby clause is to print database records in a specific order If the order in which records are printed is important you can select one or more database fields in which to sort on The records will be printed based on the values in the database field s chosen This clause is only valid when using a format that uses an ODBC data file ou putfile The outpuifile clause is of the form outputtile filename 324 Advanced The purpose of the outputfile clause is to print the labels to a file instead of to a printer When specifying the outputfile clause you must provide the name of a file Specifying the name of an existing file will append new information to previous information Specifying a new file name will create the new file The outputfile clause cannot be specified if the useprinter clause is being used in the same command file record For example if you need to print the labels to a file called control txt the outputfile clause in t
100. labels the entire format 97 Insert Bar Code Field Adding a Bar Code Field Adding a Bar Code ee Vertical l Field Horizontal Position Position Field Name Control and Function Comment Symbology Subset ri ni Height UPS GroundTrac Check Digit Multiplier Row Size Error Security Level Truncate Symbol Bar Code Height Added Characters Bar Code Ratio Bar Width Field Direction Multiplier Increment Decrement Field Type of Increment Decrement Change Update Database Increment Decrement Sequence Amount i Trailing Add On Characters Leading Characters Enable Printing Random Print Criterion peAa Weight g Check Digit Increment Decrement Increment Decrement Maximum Minimum Adding a Bar Code Field You will now be presented with the Create Bar Code screen Click on entering specification data for details Source of Data Center Data Report Data Once you have entered all items correctly the format display screen will again be shown with the box representing the area for the bar code You should now position the bar code field 99 Printed Documentation The available bar code symbologies are listed here Bar code symbology selections vary by printer Horizontal Position Enter the horizontal position of the field Vertical Position Enter the vertical position of the field Field Name A name to associate with the field Can be up to 32 characters long The name is necessary if you will be recording the value of
101. of the printer Shipping and Receiving and size type of media loaded 4 inch X 6 inch paper media are examples of what can be stored here Printer Manufacturer Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided Printer Model Select the printer model to be used Type of Port Select the type of port the device is attached to The options are Serial Parallel USB Network Windows or IP Some of these options may or may not be available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected Port Select the port to which the printer is attached Use Hardware Handshake Select Yes to use a hardware handshake Select No to use an XON XOFF handshake Concurrent Access Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture computers If serial port interrupts are not known do not select concurrent access This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing Baud Rate Indicate the baud rate used Baud rates may vary on different printers 242 Printing Device Attached Select the type of device that is attached to the port The choices are Printer Western Telematic 4 way Switch 8 way Switch or 16 way Switch Printer Address When configuring a printer that is attached to a Western Telematic Switch Box enter the number on the switch box that the printer is connected
102. opaque trailer If translucent ribbon is selected the logic of the ribbon out sensor is reversed so that with the proper ribbon you will be able to run the printer in thermal transfer mode and get a proper Ribbon Out indication Initial Label Feed Allow blank label feed before printing first job or suppress label feed Allowing an initial label feed will align the print head to the leading edge of die cut label stock BACK to TOP Tharo Cables Includes 112 112 Plus Freedom Magic Orion Wizard and Hercules 9 Pin Cable 25 Pin Cable 9 Pin Cable Configuration Configuration Configuration Orion 25 Pin Cable Western Telematic Western Telematic Switchbox 41 Dip Switchbox 41a Dip Switches Switches Western Telematic Switchbox 41 41a Configuration Orion Western Telematic Western Telematic Switchbox 81c Dip Switchbox 161a Dip i 161a Cable Switches Switches Configuration Western Telematic Western Telematic Switchbox 81c Cable Switch Box Printer Configuration Assignments 9 Pin Cable Configuration 25 Pin Cable Configuration 9 Pin Cable Configuration Orion 25 Pin Cable Configuration Orion 244 Printing Western Telematic Switch Boxes You have the ability to increase the number of printers you can drive with your PC by using a Western Telematic CAS 41 4 way switch box a Western Telematic CAS 81 8 way switch box or a Western Telematic CAS 161A 16 way switch box These swi
103. printed 145 Printed Documentation BACK to TOP Source Data Fixed Fixed Data Edt Control Characters Fixed Data Enter the exact data that you wish to be printed in the field Edit Click Edit to display a text editor Control Characters Choose from a list of predefined characters to be included in the data of defined fields When Printed What is a When Printed field The field data is variable When you print the format you will be prompted to fill in the value of the field It can be changed for each set of formats that are printed For a text field your input may come from the keyboard a serial port a Command File or a wedge type bar code scanner For a paragraph field you will type in the paragraph at the time of printing With the exception of TAB key usage the paragraph will be printed exactly as typed To force a new line break press CTRL ENTER simultaneously otherwise the text will automatically be arranged into lines when printed word wrap The following prompts will apply aai iii Prompt Repeats Prompt Number Data Checking Maximum Field Allow Blanks Selection List Length Operator Prompt Line 146 Insert Define the prompt you wish to appear at the time of printing The prompt will be displayed above the data entry area for the field Prompt Repeats Select to enable the printer to prompt for this field on every label This only applies when downloading to a memory card in the printe
104. printed in any of the following orientations on the format Normal left to right Bottom to top Upside down right to left Top to bottom Slanted Circular Arc When the Letter Orientation is Stacked the field can be printed in any of the following stacked orientations Stacked Right Stacked Up Stacked Left Stacked Down Slanted The software shows an example of each orientation in the box of the display when this item is being entered 131 Printed Documentation You should now rotate the box to the appropriate angle As you move the box the degree of the slant appears in the coordinates box on the lower right side of the screen When you have successfully placed and sized the area for the circular arc field release the mouse button or press ENTER When selecting a field direction of Circular Arc the field is placed on the label then expanded in an arc Once all specification data is entered you will be returned to Edit screen You will be instructed to define the location angle and the shape of the arc of the field You should now rotate the box to the appropriate angle As you move the box the degree of the slant appears in the coordinates box on the lower right side of the screen You will now be prompted to define the shape of the arc of the field Adjust SHAPE Use arrows then ENTER or drag with mouse Moving the pointer towards the top of screen will make the top of the letters curve more Moving the poi
105. replace the oldest events with the newest events Do Not Overwrite Events means none of the events will be overwritten Log Add Event Select Yes to log the addition of a new user These events will then be stored in the User log Log Change Event 21 Printed Documentation Select Yes to log any changes that are made to a user s information These events will then be stored in the User log Log Delete Event Select Yes to log the deletion of a user These events will then be stored in the User log Log Login Event Select Yes to log all successful user logins These events will then be stored in the User log Log Failed Login Event Select Yes to log all failed login attempts These events will then be stored in the User log Log Logout Event Select Yes to log all program shutdown logout events These events will then be stored in the User log Log Password Change Event Select Yes to log all occurrences of when a user changed their password during program sign on in the User log Format Change History Select Yes to keep a history of all changes made to label format files This will create a backup format file anytime a format is saved The format must have its Save Backup Format option enabled Format History Path Enter the path of the directory where the label format backup files will be stored Leave this option blank to store backup files in the same directory as the label format file Log Fi
106. retail industry in the United States and Canada since 1973 UPC is a coding system as well as a symbology it is designed to uniquely identify a product and its manufacturer There are three versions in UPC code Version A Version E and Version D Version D was originally defined but never used The actual UPC code is a 12 digit code In February 2000 the UCC Uniform Code Council implemented a change to the UPC A barcode If you applied for and received your UCC Company Prefix before February 2000 the first 6 digits represent the manufacturer of the labeled item The next 5 digits will identify the product and digit 12 is a check digit If the UCC Company Prefix was assigned to you after February 2000 it will be variable in length For example the manufacturer s identification may now be 8 digits and the product identification would be only 3 The last digit remains a check digit The first digit of the UPC A Code represents the number system as well as being part of manufacturer s identification Number systems 0 6 and 7 are assigned with the five digits to identify the manufacturer UPC A Numbering System The final digit it a check digit whose value is mathematically calculated based on the first eleven digits encoded in the symbol A weighting scheme the weighting alternates between 1 and 3 is used in its calculation So the check digit also protects against transportation errors if the data is manually entered Calculating t
107. smaller than this value The width of the characters is changed proportionally to the change in height This option is useful when designing ingredient labels to make the best use of the available label space Print Criterion Enter the condition for which this field should be printed The condition entered is an expression that can contain currently defined field names numeric or alphabetic constants mathematic operators comparison operators or logical operators Numeric or alphabetic constants need to be enclosed in double quotes The LIKE comparison operator allows you to perform pattern matching You can substitute a percent or an underscore character for a whole word a group of characters or a single character A percent sign represents a whole word or any GROUP of characters in the data The _ underscore represents any SINGLE character in the data For example if you need to print all records where the UPC code begins with the number 6 and ends with any character type the following expression UPCCODE LIKE 6 Where UPCCODE is the field name in your database 64 Designing Formats LIKE is the comparison operator LIKE 6 is the starting character of the UPC code to match designates the remaining characters in the UPC code The database will be searched for all records which begin with the number 6 and only those records will be printed If you need to print all records where an Item number begins with A and
108. snap Accompanied with a utility program called LABELCOM RS 232 communications with external accessories such as a scale or bar code scanner are made easy Printed Documentation By allowing you to preview your selection you will save time with the thumbnail feature available for fonts graphics and label formats The ability to use variable graphics allow you to define a single format and bring in the correct graphic along with other database information Pictures can be created using Microsoft Paintbrush Adobe Photoshop Jasc Paint Shop Pro and many other graphics applications Files with the EPS extension can only be included on formats designed for a Postscript printer Not only are linear bar codes such as UPC A UCC EAN 128 and Code 39 supported but also two dimensional bar codes such as PDF417 MaxiCode DataMatrix and QR Code based on the printer in use With its variety of supported bar codes the software complies with automotive government health care shipping container standards FDA Department of Transportation and OSHA labeling requirements Powerful features like enhanced arithmetic functions format specific serial numbers user defined consecutive numbering date time stamping and the ability to calculate sell by dates will meet all of your demanding labeling needs Included is support for UNC Universal Naming Convention which allows you to use the assigned name for a network printer instead of the
109. specific path to access the printer While saving you time and money a multiple seat license is available for easy network use Print to any printer in the world that is either connected to a print or device server or one that has an internal Ethernet card using IP Printing Customized Reports provide tighter control over your label production by printing reports that display information specific to label formats that have been edited or printed With Data Validation you can increase label accuracy reduce human errors labor costs and label waste by controlling operator entered data Data can be verified before it is placed on the label By using the software you can connect to MRP II Manufacturing Resource Planning ERP Enterprise Resource Planning systems such as SAP Oracle PeopleSoft JD Edwards and BAAN as well as MES Manufacturing Execution Systems With its unique print queue you have the ability to manage over 200 print jobs at the same time while addressing up to 255 printers from only one PC BACK to TOP Software Licensing Agreement What Can the Software Do IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY The software in this package is sold on condition of your agreement with the terms and conditions of this licensing agreement YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT BY INSTALLING COPYING OR OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE IF YOU DO NOT AGREE DO NOT INSTALL COPY OR USE THE SOFTWARE RETURN THE PACKAGE FOR
110. specified with this option no Format Tracking Report will be created Recent Reports Choose File Recent Reports from the menu bar to display a list of recently created edited reports which can then be opened Printing the Format Tracking Report Printing the as l A Combine Top Margin Left Margin Print All Report Title Daily Subtotals Field Heading Field Width Include Fields Printing the Report When you define a format you can record the value of the bar code or text fields in a data file The report function allows you to output the accumulated data to your ink jet laser or dot matrix printer or to a file The available functions are Print the Report Test Print the Report Change Report Parameters Write all records to a Text file Erase Format Tracking Data and Erase ALL Tracking Data A sample report listing will be displayed 311 Printed Documentation The printer should be on and in the ON LINE READY mode prior to selecting a report to print You may use the test print function to assure that the paper is properly loaded After selecting to print the report you will be presented with the tracking report specification screen Destination Please select the destination for the report The selections are ePrinter to send report to the printer ePrinter Data File create a file which includes printer control characters eText File to create a fixed space ASCII text file Printer Setup Select No t
111. system date Type DATE 90 Decimal Places Number of decimal places may be defined as 0 to 9 in Arithmetic fields If the field is a When Printed Linked or Database field it will be displayed as a BACK to TOP External File The data is contained in a separate text file You will be prompted to specify the name of the file that contains the text data Name When Printed The name of the paragraph text file When you print the format you will be prompted to enter the name of the text file including the extension Database Indirect The text file name txt is read in from a database record You must specify the database name and the name of the database field containing the text file to be used If this is the first time that this database is being used the name of the search field and an operator prompt will be required To Print out the entire database refer to the ALL function for further information Insert 155 Tools Print Format Definition Print Format er f Top Margin Left Margin Print Format Definitions Open the format that you want to print definitions for and choose Tools Print Format Definition from the menu bar Next you are presented with the printing options for printing format definitions Each of the Format Definition Print option items are described in the following section Destination Please select the destination for the report The selections are ePrinter to send report
112. the database Add a New Field Sequentially Will add the new fields in sequential order Insert a New Field Will allow you to insert a new field in any order you wish For the above options the database field definition screen will be presented Field Name The name of the field may be up to 10 characters long The name must begin with a letter but may also contain numbers and the underscore character Embedded blanks are not permitted The field name can also be a Reserved Word 276 Internal dBase Database Data Type Valid field types are as follows Character Numeric Logical Memo Date Field Length This is the maximum number of characters or digits that are to be contained in the field Date logical and memo fields are fixed length fields Decimal Places The number of decimal positions in a numeric field The value entered here should be 2 less than the field length of the numeric field value Field Position The position to insert the field within the structure This appears after you have defined at least one field for the database Editing the Database Structure In order to edit the database you must first choose the option Create the New Database After creating a new database the Database Records Management screen will be presented Reserved Words There are four 4 reserved words that can be used for database field names FMTCOUNT BARSUPP LBLCOUNT and FMTNAME More information and an example of the
113. the first is the number that we need as the remainder The second umber is needed to act as a buffer for 401 Printed Documentation rounding of any extra digits past the second The format string assures that the data will be 4 digits even if the resulting data is less than 10 e 5 will be 05 00 not 5 00 this is important for the next step 5 Create another text field and name it CHECKSUM For Source of Data choose A Arithmetic For Calculation enter SUBSTRING TOTAL 4 1 NOTE The fourth position is selected for use as the remainder The decimal occupies a position so the fourth position is actually the first digit to the right of the decimal 6 Create another text field and name it DATA For Source of Data choose L Link For Number of Link Fields enter 2 For Link Field 1 enter BARDATA For Link Field 2 enter CHECKSUM NOTE The starting data and the resulting checksum is combined to make the bar code data with the mod 9 weighted check digit 7 Create a bar code field and name it BARCODE For Source of Data choose C Copied For Name of Copied Field enter DATA Any fields that you do not want to print can be made into PHANTOM FIELDS by selecting NO for Enable Printing These fields can then be placed out of the way on the format Steps 2 and 3 were added for explanation purposes There is a way to 402 Appendices shorten this process by eliminating s
114. the keyboard at the time of printing This function is quite useful if you are printing labels for multiple locations Key points on ideas of how to use a Command File are 390 If you serviced 10 locations that needed price update labels you would have 10 identical Command File records You could create a separator to be printed after the database had been run each time Each one of these would be a separate Command File record If you use multiple types of stock you could use DISPLAYMSG to prompt you to change to a different stock based on the format being printed If you were printing location specific replacement labels our recommendation would be to use a location specific format that accesses Appendices a location specific replacement database Then each week copy the location specific replacement database to the one created the previous week e Using the ideas listed above it is completely possible to service 50 to 100 locations from one central location printing out your labels in separated and collated form by typing nothing at the PC except EASY and a Command File name FORMATNAME STORE FORMATCOUNT ALL BARCODE ALL TESTPRINT ON BACK to TOP Appendix D File Types Common File Extensions BMP A bit mapped picture graphic file CMD A Command File created by an external text editor Similar to the DOS batch file utility used to print formats externally DBF A database file created by the internal
115. the needs of different standards such as NDC which requires dashes and spaces or UCC EAN 128 which requires parentheses and spaces Custom Numeric Amount Format Custom Numeric Amount Format This option allows you to format a string of numeric data If you would like to suppress the printing of leading zeroes or only print specific parts of the numeric data such as the first 3 digits you can use a character string of 9 s X s or Z s to represent positions to be filled by data O RPS Interpretation with Checksum RPS Interpretation with Checksum This option allows you to create the Human Readable interpretation for an RPS bar code To properly create an RPS bar code with interpretation refer to your RPS Bar Code Specifications Insert Price NN or N NN Price NN or N NN If selected the fixed data will be printed in this format Displayed is a price with decimal points but no currency sign s Price NN or N NN Price NN or N NN If selected the fixed data will be printed in this format No decimal point for fixed data of 2 characters or less Price NN or N NN Price NN or N NN If selected the fixed data will be printed in this format Displayed with decimal points and currency signs Price NN or N NN Price NN or N NN If selected the fixed data will be printed in this format Displayed with decimal points and the dollar sign Unit Price NN N or N NN 135 Printed
116. the number that is assigned to the printer Selecting to have the ID label printed is useful when more than 1 printer is attached Override Label Offset Select Yes to override printer s setting of label offset Normally a label offset of zero means to keep the printer s current setting Setting this option to Yes will allow the software to always set the printer s label offset Select No to disable this option Print Mode Override Select print mode override if you want to control the print mode when designing the format Deselect print mode override if you want to control the print modes from the printers front panel This option allows you to choose if the print modes should be controlled based on the format or from the printer For Zebra printers that have no front panel such as the Stripe 300 Stripe 500 105s and 160s this option will not be displayed Optional Fonts Indicate the number of optional fonts installed on the printer There may be from 0 to 9 optional fonts available BACK to TOP Zebra Cables 9 Pin Cable 25 Pin Cable Western Telematic l i f Switchbox 41 Dip Configuration Configuration Switches Western Telematic Western Telematic Western Telematic Switchbox 41a Dip Switchbox 81c Dip Switchbox 161a Dip Switches Switches Switches Western Telematic Switchbox 41 41a 161a Cable Configuration Western Telematic Western Telematic Switchbox 81c Cable Switch Box Printer Configurat
117. the operator enters a search value the database will be searched to find the given value in the Search Field The corresponding record will then be used to supply data This item must be entered once and may be entered as many as 3 times for each database used If you have previously specified a field using the same database this item will not appear unless the number of search fields you have specified was more than 1 The choices of field names appear in the dialog box Operator Prompt Line Define the prompt you wish to appear at the time of printing The prompt will be displayed above the data entry area for the field Variable Table Prompt Define the variable table prompt you wish to appear at the print time The prompt will be displayed above the data entry area for the field Data Field Name 149 Printed Documentation The name of the database field from which this format field will be filled When the database record to be used is found data for this format field will be extracted from the field matching the Data Field Name The field name choices are displayed in the dialog box Trim Trailing Blanks Select Yes to suppress trailing blanks in an extracted database field Select NO to use the field as it appears Maximum Field Length Enter the maximum number of characters to extract from a database field A value of 0 indicates that all characters should be used Typical Field Length Enter the typical field length of a da
118. the switch box that the printer is connected to Direct Print Select direct print to send data directly to the port For a shared or network printer be sure direct print is not selected This option appears for those printers that can be configured for parallel printing This option only appears when using Windows 95 98 or ME Printer Memory If a memory cartridge is installed select the option corresponding to the memory module that is inserted into the top cartridge slot A memory module is required in the Prodigy and Prodigy Plus printers to store picture information and TrueType fonts If the memory module is not present the printer will still work but any graphic that is downloaded will not be printed Cutter Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability While designing the format if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you may choose Do not cut Cut after each Format e Cut after each Batch e Cut after each Job Set Printer Clock Select Yes to set the printer clock to match the computer clock Select No to NOT set the printer clock to match the computer clock Darkness Adjustment Enter a number from 3 to 3 to adjust the base level of print darkness Negative numbers make the print lighter Offset Adjustment 189 Printed Documentation Enter a number from 99 to 999 to adjust the form edge offset This allows you to compensate for slight mechanical differe
119. this field in a format tracking report copying data from this field into another field using this field s data in a Linked Field or filling this field using the Command File facility Comment Enter a comment for this field Symbology The available bar code symbologies are specific to the printer being used Subset When using a Code 128 bar code you will be able to choose which Subset to use for the symbol Selecting Automatic will let the software choose a Subset to create the shortest symbol When it is required you may also select a specific Subset to force the symbol to stay in that Subset Subset A Subset B or Subset C Control and Function Characters The software allows you to embed control codes or function codes into a bar code when permitted by the symbology For example Code 128 or PDF417 A pop up menu enables easy selection of the correct code To insert control codes click on the Control Characters button and select the desired code from the pop up list Control codes are displayed in the user interface as the control code name surrounded by angle brackets lt gt For example inserting a carriage return in a field is displayed as lt CR gt 100 Insert You may also use the following character sequences to specify control codes xHH Where x specifies the beginning of a hexadecimal string HH represents a 2 digit hexadecimal value For those users that require embedded function characters t
120. to a file Each of the Database Print option items are described in the following section Destination Please select the destination for the report Select Printer to send the report to the printer Printer Data File to create a file which includes printer control characters or Text File to create a fixed space ASCII text file Internal dBase Database Where This should be a LOGICAL expression using the field names listed along with constants arithmetic operators comparison operators and logical operators String constants should be enclosed in single quotes The LIKE comparison operator can be used to perform pattern matching A percent sign represents ANY STRING of characters and an _ underscore represents ANY SINGLE CHARACTER Printer Setup Select No to use the current default printer options Select Yes to change the printer options for this report Modified printer settings are specific to the currently selected report Font Setup Select No to use the default printer font or Yes to select a different font for this report Top Margin Enter the distance from the top of the paper to the beginning print position in hundredths of inches or tenths of millimeters Left Margin Enter the HORIZONTAL OFFSET of the print image area from the left edge of the paper in hundredths of inches or tenths of millimeters Report Title Enter the Report title that should appear on each page For the default Report title leav
121. to be read correctly even if part of it is missing Each Datacode symbol has two adjacent sides printed as solid bars while the remaining adjacent sides are printed as a series of equally spaced square dots These patterns are used to indicate both orientation and printing density of the symbol Two main subsets of Datamatrix symbols exists Those using convolutional coding for error correction which were used for most of the initial installations of Datamatrix systems these versions are referenced as ECC 000 to ECC 140 The second subset is referenced ECC 200 and uses Reed Solomon error correction techniques ECC 000 to 140 symbols all have an odd number of modules along each square side ECC 200 symbols have an even number of modules on each side Maximum data capacity of an ECC 200 symbol is 3116 numeric digits or 2335 alpha numeric characters in a symbol 144 modules square The most popular applications for Datamatrix is the marking of small items such as integrated circuits and printed circuit boards These applications make use of the code s ability to encode approximately fifty characters of data in a symbol 2 or 3mm square and the fact that the code can be read with only a 20 percent contrast ratio The code is read by CCD video camera or CCD scanner Symbols between one eight inch square to seven inches square can be read at distances ranging from contact to 36 inches away Typical reading rates are 5 symbols per second Specificatio
122. uniquely identify this printer This name will show up in the print request screen and the queue s printer list It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX interface Printer Description The Printer Description parameter is optional You may enter a description that further identifies the printer for the user The location of the printer Shipping and Receiving and size type of media loaded 4 inch X 6 inch paper media are examples of what can be stored here Printer Manufacturer Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided Printer Model Select the model of printer to be used Type of Port Select the type of port the device is attached to The options are Serial Parallel USB Network Windows or IP Some of these options may or may not be available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected Port Select the port to which the printer is attached Direct Print 200 Printing Select direct print to send data directly to the port For a shared or network printer be sure direct print is not selected This option appears for those printers that can be configured for parallel printing This option only appears when using Windows 95 98 or ME Printer Memory Indicate how much memory or whether an additional memory card or cartridge is installed in the printer Select S to indicate that the printer has STANDARD memory 512K installed Select E to indicate that the printer has
123. when the field was defined When you have made the desired changes and have chosen to make the changes effective by selecting the OK button the screen will return to the format display and you may re position the field or leave it in the same position The updated field will be re displayed with its new attributes BACK to TOP Rotating a Label The label and its fields will rotate in 90 degree increments However if the printer that the label format was created for has a maximum width and it is exceeded by rotating the label 90 degrees it will be rotated 180 degrees Resizing Fields Fields can be resized by clicking once on the field and using the mouse to drag it to the desired size eUse the handles on the top and bottom of the field to stretch it vertically eUse the handles on the left and right sides to stretch it horizontally 83 Printed Documentation eThe corner handles will simultaneously resize the field vertically and horizontally to create a proportionally sized field Pointer The small arrow on the document interface that moves as the mouse is moved Commands can be selected by positioning the arrow over a desired selection and clicking one of the mouse buttons Cut Removes the selected object from the active format and places it on the Clipboard Copy Places an exact copy of the selected object to the Clipboard Paste Inserts the contents of the Clipboard at the insertion point and repla
124. width representation Typing in a string of characters allows you to more precisely represent the actual printed data which can allow more characters to define on a line Field Fill With this option set to Yes if less characters are inputted than specified for the maximum field length the characters will be bigger in both height and width Select No for normal operation Force Fit When designing paragraph or Multi source block text fields you can enable the Force Fit option This option will allow the font size to shrink or grow so that the text best fills the available field area Once this option is enabled you will be prompted to enter the upper and lower limits for the text height The upper limit is determined by the value entered in the Max Fit Height prompt the text will grow no larger than this value The lower limit is determined by the value entered in the Min Fit Height prompt the text will not shrink smaller than this value The width of the characters is changed proportionally to the change in height This option is useful when designing ingredient labels to make the best use of the available label space Print Criterion Enter the condition for which this field should be printed The condition entered is an expression that can contain currently defined field names numeric or alphabetic constants mathematic operators comparison operators or logical operators Numeric or alphabetic constants need to be enclosed
125. will occupy a fixed number of spaces equal to the field length in spaces in the database field There are no separators between fields 286 Internal dBase Database Appending Records to a Database This function allows you to add records from a standard text file to the database currently selected such as records that are resident on a host computer system Before appending any records you must first create a database in the software to accept the data Make sure that this new database structure is exactly the same as the one you are appending from It should contain the same number of fields name of fields field types and field lengths so that no data is lost When selected you will be instructed to enter the name of the file that contains the records to be read At the same time the software displays a list of currently defined TXT files in alphabetical order When entering the file name you may include a drive designator a path and file extension The text file must contain one line for each database record See Writing Database Records to a Text File Within the record each field should occupy a fixed number of columns equal to the field length in the database There should be no separators between fields A carriage return line feed sequence must terminate each record If a record contains more data than can fit in a database record then data beyond the columns for the last database field will be ignored If a record contain
126. y Variable Table Database System Enter the name of the Database System to use for accessing a database file You can choose the software s non SQL database to connect to an internal dBase database or choose Other Database System to retrieve data from other types of database files 148 Insert Database File If the field is defined as being from the software s non SQL database then the name of that database must be entered A list of the currently available databases will be displayed in the dialog box If you have previously entered a database name you can use the same name by pressing TAB Connection String To connect to other types of database files enter the appropriate connection string to the data source here or you can click the Prompt button to be prompted to create the connection string This string is created by first choosing a Database provider and then creating or choosing a connection to the database How this is done will depend on your Database Provider Variable Table With this option enable you will be able to choose which language table will provide the data to populate the field Table Name Enter the name of the TABLE containing the data to be printed This item allows you to select the appropriate database file table Search Fields The number of fields used to search for a specific record Search Field Name The name of the database field that will be used in searching the database When
127. 0 will create a linear GS7 DataBar Stacked witha human readable of 01 00012345678909 The 01 is the Application Identifier and the last 9 is the check digit 01 00012345678905 When creating a composite barcode data entered as 0341234567890 17010200 the 0103412345678900 will be encoded in the linear part of the barcode and 17010200 will be in the 2D portion of the composite barcode 01 03412345678900 17 010200 GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional 375 Printed Documentation Description Formally known as RSS Stacked Omnidirectional The GS7 DataBar Stacked Omni directional barcode is used when width might be an issue The data is split in half and encoded as a split level barcode The height of the upper part of the barcode is 5 times the X dimension The height of the lower part of the barcode is 7 times the X dimension The separator pattern between the upper and lower part of the barcode contains no data The GS7 DataBar Stacked Omni directional barcode uses a 01 Data Identifier It also uses a linkage flag which would be 0 false or 1 true A 1 is used only if the barcode has a 2D barcode attached to the linear barcode Neither the Data Identifier nor the linkage flag needs to be entered by the user as part of the data The linkage flag will not appear in the scan There are 17 characters ina GS7 DataBar Stacked Omni directional that make up the linear barcode but only 13 digits are entered data plus a check digit that is calcul
128. 02000150 will create a linear GS7 DataBar Expanded with a human readable of 01906141410000153202000150 The 01 is the Application Identifier 01 90614141000015 3202 000150 Expanded Stacked 01 90614141000015 3202 000150 When creating a composite barcode data entered as 019371234567890 3103001234911A2B3C4D5E the 019371234567890 will be encoded in the linear part of the barcode and 3103001234911A2B3C4D5E will be in the 2D portion of the composite barcode 01 93712345678904 3103 001234 91 1A2B3C4D5E BACK to TOP 378 Bar Code Information 379 Appendices Appendix A Error Status Messages Choose the letter that the error message begins with below ACDEFGIMNPQRSTU At least 1 printer must remain defined You have tried to Delete the ONLY printer that is defined Cannot change active or completed job Cannot change config while jobs are in print queue Cannot complete requested operation insufficient memory available Cannot create please specify another name Cannot create field Cannot UNDO previous change no action taken Duplicated Keyword There is a duplicate keyword in the command file Enter a Valid Field Length A field length of 0 or a field length greater than 255 was entered Erase error Error reading file Error Occurred Saving Print Queue Error writing file disk may be out of space Expecting Keyword Directive or Field Name Check the command file to be sure that all phrases or fields are
129. 1 264 269 281 287 311 315 388 All 128 ASCII 333 358 All 128 ASCII Characters 366 All 128 Extended ASCII Characters 366 All 256 ASCII Characters 364 All 65 536 Unicode 333 All 8 bit 353 355 All ASCII Characters 360 All EBCDIC Characters 360 All fieldvalue 320 ALL FOR ENTIRE DATABASE 388 411 Printed Documentation ALL Function 109 126 148 264 388 All Intermec 206 All ISO Characters 360 All Menu 10 All PLANET barcodes 346 ALL Tracking Data Erasing 315 ALL Tracking Data 315 ALL Tutorial 388 ALL VALUES ARE 394 403 Allocated ECI 369 Allocated 369 Allow Aztec Mesa 355 backfeed 255 non rectangular 369 Allow 255 320 355 369 Allow Blanks 107 124 146 Allowable Sizes 335 336 338 339 341 342 344 351 Allowable Symbol Height 335 336 338 339 344 Alphabetic 4s 128 Alphanumeric 4s 128 Alphanumeric Data 171 181 186 193 199 206 231 236 246 Alt 10 Alt key 10 ALT E 412 pressing 281 ALT E 281 Alternate Background 19 Alternate Print 267 271 Alternate Printer 264 267 271 AM 152 American National Standards Institute 336 An Encapsulated Postscript 391 AND 403 AND SERIALNUM 284 And or 39 99 317 372 391 Andy Longacre Welch Allyn Inc 353 Andy Longacre 353 Angle 67 118 Angled Lines 67 118 Anker 347 Annex 367 ANSI 10 17 336 ANSI X3 4 355 369 ANY SINGLE CHARACTER 284 ANY STRING 284 API 318 320 API Examples 31
130. 177 182 187 194 Prodigy Plus 177 182 187 194 Product Code Council 341 342 Product Identification Number 341 342 351 Production Date 347 Products www tharo com 7 Products 7 Program Configuration Options 320 Program File 391 Program Options 95 168 271 446 Programming Interface 318 PROGRAMMING NOTES 394 Programs 381 Prompt Number 34 107 109 124 126 146 148 Prompt Repeats 107 124 146 Property dialog 83 90 Protocol XON XOFF 206 215 Purchasing 179 184 190 197 213 225 244 253 Q QR Code 3 353 367 QualaBar 218 Qualabar Parallel Centronix Dip Switches 218 Qualabar RS 232 Communications 218 Qualabar RS 232 Communications Dip Switches 218 Qualibar 440 218 Qualibar 450 218 Quantities 347 Queue 258 261 381 Queue Error 261 381 Quick Check IV 232 Quick Response Code 367 Quick Check IV 201 248 Quiet Zone excluding 358 including 364 Quiet Zone 358 364 Quit 281 331 Quit button Clicking 394 Quit button 394 Quit Search 281 R RAM 177 182 187 194 204 210 241 RAM Extension 241 Random Weight Check Digit 39 99 Range Entering 264 print 264 Range 264 Rastering 353 362 Raw Data Port Number 263 Re Send Downloaded Data 17 Read write 281 Reader Configuration Symbols 355 README 9 README file 9 Ready Busy 225 Receive Buffer Size 225 Receiving Field 394 Receiving 394 Recent Batch Formats 85 Recent Database Files 85 Recen
131. 1a 161a Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switchbox 81c Cable Configuration BACK to TOP Datamax Notes RS 232 Communications MaxiCode RS 232 Communications Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Handshake RTS CTS on Printer MaxiCode CCCSSS ZZZZZXXXX data Where Printed Documentation CCC Country Code SSS Service Code ZZZZZXXXX Zip Code 4 Digit Extension optional Must be enclosed in signs data Alphanumeric Data maximum length 84 characters Example 123999 442120798 This is an example BACK to TOP Fargo Fargo Setup Printer Printer Use Hardware Concurrent Device Attached Darkness Offset ae Printer Name The Printer Name parameter is optional You may specify a name to uniquely identify this printer This name will show up in the print request screen and the queue s printer list It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX interface Printer Description The Printer Description parameter is optional You may enter a description that further identifies the printer for the user The location of the printer Shipping and Receiving and size type of media loaded 4 inch X 6 inch paper media are examples of what can be stored here Printer Manufacturer Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided 194 Printing Printer Model Select the model of printer to be used Type of Port Select the type of port the devi
132. 208 A NN 210 RUS iS A AA A A A 216 A NANA 221 NO A A 232 TEC a ele 234 RN 237 A NON TAN 239 Mi Siagents 247 Lets ac 250 Adding a Prime annann ae aiaa iia aid 257 Adding a Printers seinnaa aaa ee waea Eaa Eaa aaea A EAA TA r AEAEE aed 257 Deleting a Pte ss erae di a aae aR dD 257 Deleting a Printe sentrene ida 257 Changing and Existing Printer a EA a e a aa a aaar aeaiia aeae 257 Changing an Existing Printer sisirig sek een grae esas 257 AA incase cede EEE A NO 257 View Changing the Print QUS E oeccicccisesteccceeeceesseedsecsseesstassecoedsneevecesseassteossensoasonsseatendabensseasseassenentsnateassbeadsteaeadunes 257 Change Single J b Stat Sicuanin an a eate va asada 257 Change all jobs associated with Printer c ccccccecceseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeseaeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeaeeeeecaeeeseeeeseieeeeeas 259 HAU aneranga idare aia Ka ra NA EA E aaa ANa EECa aO EAEE EAK EAA a e V AETA AAEE EER A i 259 Advanced Printinge aene AAA ee a eae a eae nd Sane ade ae 261 vi Table Of Contents Multi Port Serial Printings atai A aa ie ae dea aa Oe 262 Network Printing UNC Universal Naming Convention ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeecaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseieeeeeas 262 IPPO ii A a ei eae a ea ee Oe ed eeu nia a E 263 Printi NN NA 264 Print Batch of Formats iii Aa ata 264 A O NN 271 Print Format Dei iii aaa 271 Report Printing O ea a a 272 Print Repos tia A al eta AA A ee ae a 272 Print Format
133. 3 is a variable length continuous symbology employing four element widths Each Code 93 character has nine modules that may be either black or white Each character contains three bars and three spaces Each character begins with a bar and ends with a space This is a 9 3 code hence the name Code 93 has 47 characters in its character set The start stop code is represented by the symbol and the four unique circle codes and are used as precedence characters to unambiguously represent all 128 ASCII characters in a similar fashion to Code 39 s Full ASCII feature Because the special circle codes are used for the Full ASCII feature the ambiguity problem present with Code 39 is eliminated Specifications Character Set 47 characters 0 9 A Z space and Encodation Three bars and three spaces are required to encode a character Start Stop Pattern The symbol and the four unique circle code and Code Type Binary varying length 338 Bar Code Information Human Readable Optional although it is typically used Check Character Optional Modulus 43 calculation Encoded Information Contingent upon data requirements Allowable Sizes Minimum X Dimension 0075 inches Wide to Narrow Ratio 2 1 to 3 1 with X Dimension gt 020 inches 2 2 1 to 3 1 with X Dimension lt 020 inches Allowable Symbol Height The greater of 25 inch or 15
134. 37 203 685 477 5807 with accuracy to a ten thousandth of a monetary unit Storage size is 8 bytes DateTime Date and time data from January 1 1753 through December 31 9999 with an accuracy of three hundredths of a second or 3 33 milliseconds Double Stores numbers from 1 79769313486231E308 to 4 94065645841247E 324 for negative values and from 1 79769313486231E308 to 4 94065645841247E 324 for positive values Guid Globally Unique Identifier GUID A 16 byte field used in a Microsoft Access database to establish a unique identifier for replication Integer Integer whole number data from 2 31 2 147 483 648 through 2 31 1 2 147 483 647 Storage size is 4 bytes Long Binary Default Stores numbers from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 no fractions Long Char Real Smalllnt Integer data from 2 15 32 768 through 2 15 1 32 767 Storage size is 2 bytes VarBinar Variable length binary data with a maximum length of 8 000 bytes Databaseview e VarChar Variable length non Unicode character data with length of n bytes n must be a value from 1 through 8 000 Length When defining a variable field the maximum length of the field must be entered Constraint This option determines whether a value is required to be entered for a specific field Selecting May Null specifies that the field does not need to have data entered Selecting No Null specifies that the field must have data entered
135. 4 Write All Records Text File 286 Text File icon 286 Write All Records 286 Writing Database Records 286 Report 314 Writing 286 314 WW az 128 WWW az 128 Www tharo com Products 7 Www tharo com 1 7 239 Www tharo com techmain htm 7 330 394 Www wti com 179 184 190 197 213 225 244 253 WYSIWYG 3 X X0D 39 99 394 XOD x0A 394 XHH 39 99 Xi Series printing 255 Xi Series 255 Xill Series Printer 255 XON XOFF 161 206 208 218 241 255 X S 48 128 XXtreme 210 XXtreme 25 Pin Cable Configuration 210 XXX999999 as 128 XXXX s 153 Y Year Digit Day 4s 128 ISO Week 15 Year 15 48 128 Yes Custom Processing 394 Flip Formats Selecting 15 31 39 73 99 121 set as 128 Yes 15 23 31 39 48 73 99 121 128 264 284 394 YY 4s 128 z Zebra 250 255 320 391 Zebra Cables 253 Index Zebra Notes 255 Zebra Programming Language 255 Zebra Setup 250 ZIP 347 Zip Code 171 181 186 193 199 206 215 231 236 246 Zoom In 79 97 Zoom Level 95 97 Zoom Out 97 ZPL 255 Z S 48 128 ZZZ9 48 128 ZZZ999999 4s 128 ZZZZZXXXX 171 181 186 193 199 206 215 231 246 ZZZZZZ9 a3 128 ZZZZZZZZ9 38 128 ZZZZZZZZZ9 43 128 465
136. 41A s plastic cover to the chassis Remove the cover from the chassis 2 Locate the jumpers on the CAS 41A circuit J2 Port 2 board As you face the instrument back panel the jumpers are located in the lower left J3 Port 3 hand corner of the circuit board Move the jumpers as shown to monitor pin4 3 Replace the plastic cover on the CAS 41A chassis Reinstall the four screws that secure the cover to the chassis Reconnect the power cable and switch the power on J1 Port 1 J4 Port 4 Western Telematic Switchbox 81c Dip Switches The CAS 81C 8 way Switch Box is equipped with a set of 8 position or 10 position Dip Switches as follows On the inside of the box a set of jumpers located behind the 25 pin port are labeled CTS and DCD In order to have proper handshaking the CTS jumper should be set so that both pins are covered and the DCD jumper should be set so that only one pin is covered Western Telematic Switchbox 161a Dip Switches 227 Printed Documentation Western Telematic Switch Box Printer Assignments If a third CAS 41 Code Activated Switch is connected to the PC above printer assignments would be 9 through 12 The same would be true for the CAS 161A where the first switch box would go to Printers 1 through 16 the second switch box would go to Printers 17 through 32 and if a third switch box is connected it would go to Printers 33 through 48 Western Telematic Switchbox 41 41a Cable Configuration
137. 44 250 253 264 269 271 275 279 281 285 311 320 330 331 347 369 385 394 403 Notes 199 385 Novexx Cables 210 Novexx Notes 210 Novexx Setup 208 NT 27 280 NT 4 0 2000 XP 12 NULL 318 Number 10 350 Batches 267 Fields 403 Formats 173 264 Link Fields 394 Reed Solomon 362 Sides 69 112 symbologies 369 unprinted 239 Number 69 112 173 239 264 267 350 362 369 394 403 Number Across 33 NUMBER OF IDENTICAL COPIES OF EACH FORMAT 388 Numbering System UPC 350 Numbering System 350 Numbering System Character 341 342 351 Numeric Incrementation Decrementation ONLY 173 Numeric Keypad 10 Numeric Month 4s 128 NW 7 335 0 Object Clipboard 84 89 Object 84 89 OCR 343 Octal 4s 128 ODBC establishing 330 uses 320 ODBC 17 34 109 126 148 320 330 OFF LINE 260 381 Offset Adjustment 168 177 182 187 194 210 241 OK 9 12 23 78 239 279 281 287 309 314 315 320 330 394 OK button 38 83 90 Index Omnidirectional 372 Omni directional 367 Omni directionallly 364 Omnidirectionally 372 ON 225 381 388 One dimensional symbologies 347 ON LINE READY 14 264 271 284 311 Only 39 99 381 Only NAMED 394 Open DataBase Connectivity 3 330 Open Dialog 82 85 Open icon 82 85 267 309 311 Opening File 85 Opening 82 85 267 309 311 Operator Prompt Line 34 107 109 124 126 146 148 Operator entered controlling 3 Operator entered 3 Operators Manual 171 Optional
138. 48 LaserJet Plus 201 248 Index LaserJet Series II 201 248 Last Update display 27 Last Update 27 Latin 367 Latin Alphabet No 353 355 369 Lbf 36 Lem 394 Leading Characters 39 99 Leading 39 99 Left clicking 97 Right 218 Left 10 97 218 Left Align 158 Left arrow Show 281 Left Justify as 128 Left Margin 33 157 271 273 284 311 Left Mouse Button 10 Letter Day Week 4s 128 Letter Day 4s 128 Letter Orientation 4s 128 Levels Reed Solomon 364 367 435 Printed Documentation Levels 364 367 LIKE 15 39 48 99 128 284 403 Like POSTNET Codes 346 Limit 25 37 Limit 37 Line Field Adding 67 118 Line Field 67 118 Line icon 67 118 Line Length 67 118 Line Thickness 67 76 116 118 Linear 362 Linear barcodes 333 Lines 38 201 248 Link 39 99 109 151 153 403 Linked Field 39 67 69 73 76 99 109 112 116 118 121 151 394 403 Linked Fields Window Available Fields window 109 151 Linked Fields Window 109 151 Lion Puma 210 Literal Value 109 151 LLD 369 Locate Details button 173 Locate 173 Location Numbers 347 LOG file 381 436 LOGICAL 284 394 403 Logical AND 403 Logical Layer Designator 369 Logical NOT 403 Logical OR 403 Long Date 4s 128 LOWER RIGHT CORNER Move 67 118 LOWER RIGHT CORNER 67 118 LPT1 239 LPT2 239 LPT3 239 M M 15 367 M D Y as 128 Machine readable 4 Magnifying Change Mouse
139. 64 365 366 367 369 372 Symbology Type 333 Symbology s start stop 336 Synergystex Setup 232 Syntax Error 381 System DSN 330 System Requirements 12 T T3306 215 TAB pressing 34 109 126 148 TAB 34 48 78 109 126 128 148 TAB key like 15 456 pressing 269 use 78 TAB key 10 15 78 107 124 146 269 281 TAB TAB 10 Tabbed Dialog Boxes 19 TABLE 34 109 126 148 Table Name 34 109 126 148 TABS 10 TCP IP 263 Tear Off 168 255 Tear Off Mode 28 TEC 28 236 TEC 416 4s 128 TEC Cables 236 TEC Notes 236 TEC Setup 234 Technical 7 Technical Support 7 TEL 1 Telxon 347 Terminal Server 14 TerminalServer doc 14 Test Print Disabling 271 Format Tracking Report 313 Report 311 use 318 Test Print 17 94 271 311 313 318 Test Print icon select 271 Test Print icon 271 313 Test Print Request Screen 271 TEST FMT 86 TESTPRINT precede 320 TESTPRINT 320 388 Text Adding 4s 128 create 385 generated 38 Text 38 48 128 385 Text Characters 366 Text Color 4s 128 Text Compaction 365 Text Field 4s 128 201 218 231 255 Text File records 311 See Writing Database Records 287 Write 314 Write All Records 286 Text File 17 157 271 273 284 286 287 311 314 Text File icon Write All Records 286 Text File icon 286 287 Text Bar Code Field Specification Screen 320 Index Thai 31 Tharo 244 246 Tharo 112 241 Tharo Cables 244 Tharo Notes 246 Tharo Setup 241
140. 66 Error Detection 362 372 Error Occurred Saving Print Queue 381 Error Processing 17 Error Security Level 39 99 Error Status Messages 381 Error correction codewords 366 ESC 10 23 78 264 279 281 314 315 ESC key 10 331 Ethernet 3 European 151 168 385 European Article Numbering 341 342 European Date 385 Example 317 394 Excluding Quiet Zone 358 Excluding 358 Executible file 320 Execution Systems Manufacturing 3 Execution Systems 3 Existing Format Changing 82 Existing Format 82 Existing User Changing 23 Existing User 23 Expecting Keyword Directive 381 Expecting 381 EXTENDED 200 Extended Channel Interpretation 333 355 369 Extended Cross Hairs 79 158 Extends Code 93 symbology 333 Extends 333 External Database Selecting 330 External Database 330 388 External File 4s 128 154 Extract Data 394 F F2 10 93 257 F2 key 320 Facing Identification Mark 343 Fargo 199 Fargo Cables 197 Index Fargo Setup 194 Fargo Datamax 320 Fashion Code 39 s Full ASCII 338 Fashion 338 FAX 1 FDA 3 Federal Government 385 Field Copying so Erasing 82 90 Moving 82 90 Number 403 Placing 79 Receiving 394 Resizing 83 Selecting 81 Viewing Changing 83 90 Field 79 80 81 82 83 89 90 394 403 Field Color 73 121 Field Contrasts 73 121 128 Field Direction 39 48 73 99 121 128 201 218 248 Field Fill 4s 128 Field Heading 311 Field Height 73 76 116 121 Field Length 275 381
141. 66377488 the 0111010064149094 will be encoded in the linear part of the barcode and 372772892887 166266377488 will be in the 2D portion of the composite barcode GS1 DataBar Stacked Description 374 Bar Code Information Formally known as RSS Stacked The GS7 DataBar Stacked barcode is used when width might be an issue The data is split in half and encoded as a split level barcode The height of the upper part of the barcode is 5 times the X dimension The height of the lower part of the barcode is 7 times the X dimension The separator pattern between the upper and lower part of the barcode contains no data The GS7 DataBar Stacked barcode uses a 01 Data Identifier It also uses a linkage flag which would be 0 false or 1 true A 1 is used only if the barcode has a 2D barcode attached to the linear barcode Neither the Data Identifier nor the linkage flag needs to be entered by the user as part of the data The linkage flag will not appear in the scan There are 17 characters in a GS7 DataBar Stacked that make up the linear barcode but only 13 digits are entered data plus a check digit that is calculated by the software Instructions Thirteen digits must be entered for a GS7 DataBar Stacked If thirteen digits are not entered padded leading zeros will be added When creating a composite barcode a pipe symbol must be used when separating the data between the linear and 2D barcodes Example Using the data 000123456789
142. 75 Erasing Records From 275 Indexing 279 Searching 275 Sorting 286 Updating 281 Database 34 39 73 99 109 121 126 148 153 255 275 279 281 285 286 287 330 385 Database Field Erasing 279 Modifying 279 Database Field 269 279 Database Files 34 109 126 148 275 Database Functions 23 275 Database Indirect 4s 128 154 385 Database Indirect Source 385 Database Print 284 Database Records Printing 284 Writing 286 Database Records 284 286 Database Records Management 275 281 284 285 286 287 Database Source Data 385 Database Source 385 Database Structure Changing 281 Modifying 275 Database Structure 275 281 Database Structure Creation 275 Database Structure Management 279 280 281 Database Structure Management icon 281 Index Database System 34 109 126 148 Databasefile 320 Databasefile inputfile 320 Databasefile orderby 320 Datacode 360 Datafile dat 287 DataMatrix 3 353 360 Datamax 193 318 Datamax Cables 190 Datamax I Class 39 99 Datamax Notes 193 Datamax Ovation 190 197 Datamax Setup 187 Datasheet 284 Datasheet View 284 Datasheet View icon 281 DATE 153 385 Date Format as 128 Date time 3 Dates Source 385 Dates 347 385 Day Week Name 4s 128 Day 4s 128 DBASE 275 279 320 DBASE lll 275 279 388 391 421 Printed Documentation DBASE IV file 388 DBASEIII 275 Dbf 82 85 275 388 391 DCD 225 DD as 128 DDD as 128 DDE 318 320 DDE Print
143. 78 Snap 94 symbology 372 TAB key 78 Test Print 318 TRUEDATE 385 TRUETIME 385 TrueType 4s 128 up left 281 wildcard 281 Use 48 78 82 87 90 94 128 158 201 248 264 269 275 281 318 320 360 372 385 388 394 Use IMG 168 Use mmm as 128 Use Ribbon Saver 28 Use Slashed Zero 17 Use Standard Handshake 241 Useprinter 320 User DSN 330 User icon Add 23 Index Delete 23 selecting 9 User icon 9 23 User ID 9 320 User Identification 23 User Identifier specify 320 User Identifier 9 320 User Sign on Required 15 User Signon 320 User Sign On Password Protection 23 Users Adding 23 Changing 23 Deleting 23 Users 9 23 User s Manual 394 User selectable 353 355 Using Command 320 Using Command Files 320 Using Normal Labels 28 Using Preprinted Labels 28 Vv Valid Field Length Enter 381 Valid Field Length 381 Valid Format Name Found 381 Validation 4s 107 124 128 146 461 Printed Documentation Value Fixed Listas 128 incremented decremented 39 48 99 128 partno 394 singlejob 320 Value 39 48 99 128 320 394 Value Indexed 279 280 Variable Data 4s 128 Variable length symbology 358 VARIABLENAME 394 Variabletext 320 Version 350 Version 14 L 367 Version 40 L 367 Version D 350 Version E 350 Vertical Lines 67 69 76 112 116 118 Vertical Position 39 48 67 69 73 76 99 112 116 118 121 128 Vertical Separation 33 232 Vertical Thickness 69 112
144. 8 Western Telematic Switchbox 41 41a 161a Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switchbox 81c Cable Configuration BACK to TOP Citizen Notes RS 232 Communications MaxiCode RS 232 Communications Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Handshake RTS CTS on Printer 186 Printing MaxiCode CCCSSSHZZZZZXXXXidata Where CCC Country Code SSS Service Code ZZZZZXXXX Zip Code 4 Digit Extension optional Must be enclosed in signs data Alphanumeric Data maximum length 84 characters Example 123999 442120798H This is an example BACK to TOP Datamax Datamax Setup Printer Name Printer Printer Printer Model Ea Manufacturer Concurrent Device Attached Printer Address Direct Print Printer Memory Darkness Offset set Printer Clock Adjustment Adjustment Optimize Optimize QR Initial Label Feed DataMatrix RFID Enabled Printer Name The Printer Name parameter is optional You may specify a name to uniquely identify this printer This name will show up in the print request screen and the queue s printer list It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX interface 187 Printed Documentation Printer Description The Printer Description parameter is optional You may enter a description that further identifies the printer for the user The location of the printer Shipping and Receiving and size type of media loaded 4 inch X 6 inch paper media are examples of wha
145. 8 Apollo printing 39 99 Apollo 28 31 39 99 168 171 173 318 391 Apollo Cables 171 Apollo Notes 171 Apollo Setup 168 Apollo A Series 39 99 Appearance 19 Append Records 287 Appending Records 287 Appending 287 Appendix A 381 Appendix B 385 Appendix C 109 126 148 388 Appendix D 391 Appendix E 10 394 Appendix F 394 Appendix G 394 Appendix H 403 Application Identifier 347 Application Programming Interface 320 Arabic 355 Arithmetic 153 385 Arithmetic Source Data 385 Arithmetic Source 385 Arithmetic Expression 394 403 ARROW Keys ARROW Keys 10 Article Numbering Association 341 342 AS 400 31 Ascending 286 Index ASCIl 31 157 271 273 275 284 311 333 336 338 339 347 353 355 360 364 365 366 369 385 388 391 394 ASCII 128 358 ASCII Replace file create 31 ASCII Replace file 3 Attempt 381 Auto Continue 201 248 Auto Field Name 27 38 Auto Submit 15 Auto discriminate 347 Automatic Identification 333 Autorun 9 12 Auto Size Input Field 15 Available Fields 109 151 311 Available Fields list 311 Available Fields window Linked Fields Window 109 151 Available Fields window 109 151 Avery Dennison Cables 162 Avery Dennison Setup 161 A Z 39 99 336 338 339 Aztec Code 353 355 Aztec Mesa 355 B B fmt 394 B 872 236 413 Printed Documentation Backfeed 255 Backfeed Speed 255 Background Color s 128 Bands Imaging 31 Bands 31 Bar Code Field Adding 39
146. 85 394 403 Date 385 Source 73 96 109 121 126 148 153 255 330 385 394 403 Space Horizontally select 158 Space Horizontally 96 158 Space Vertically select 159 Space Vertically 96 159 453 Printed Documentation Space bar 372 Spacing characteristics 3 Spacing 31 Spec 201 232 248 Special Effect Character 4s 128 Special Features 333 Special Formatting 4s 128 151 385 394 403 Special Options 193 Specification Data Entering 78 Specification Data 78 Specification Screen 10 Specify edit 109 126 148 153 Specifying Character Heights 128 Format String 4s 128 intercharacter 336 outputfile 320 User Identifier 320 Specifying 48 128 244 320 336 SS 152 394 403 SSC 14 344 SSCC 347 SSCC Al 347 454 SSS 171 181 186 193 199 206 215 231 236 246 Stacked 4s 128 218 Stacked Downs 128 Stacked Fields 218 Stacked Left 4s 128 Stacked Letter Orientation 218 Stacked Rights 128 Stacked Ups 128 STANDARD 200 Standard Code Size Selecting 168 Standard Code Size 168 Standard Codes 225 Standard Tool Bar 94 271 Standard Tool Bar Select View display 94 Standard Tool Bar Select View 94 Start Job Number Not Found 381 Position 267 Record 264 Wizard 262 Start 9 12 247 262 264 267 333 381 Start Menu 381 Start Up 381 Start stop 335 336 338 339 Start Stop Pattern 336 338 339 341 342 344 351 STARTING RECORD NUMBER OR ALL 388 STAT
147. 89 269 CTRL ENTER as 107 124 128 146 CTRL ENTER 107 124 146 CTRL TAB key 10 CTRL Z 84 89 CTS 225 Current 260 Current Message 394 419 Printed Documentation Currently Defined 257 Currently Defined Printers 262 Custom 19 48 128 Custom Date 4s 128 385 Custom Numeric Amount Format as 128 Custom Numeric Amount 4s 128 Custom Numeric Amount Format as 128 Custom Spacing 4s 128 Customer s Purchase Order Number 347 Customized Reports 3 Cut 10 84 89 Cut Offset 34 171 Cut Options 34 267 Cutter 34 171 Cutter Installed 216 Cutter Option 206 Cyrillic 355 369 D Daily Subtotals 311 Darkness Adjustment 168 177 182 187 194 210 216 239 241 Dat file 320 Data Arithmetic Source 385 Database Indirect Source 385 Database Source 385 420 Representation 367 Select Source 330 Source 73 96 109 121 126 148 153 255 330 385 394 403 Viewing 281 Data 34 39 48 73 96 99 109 121 126 128 148 153 173 255 281 330 347 353 355 367 385 394 403 Data Bits 171 181 186 193 199 206 210 215 218 225 255 394 Data Capacity 355 360 Data Capture 333 Data Character Density 333 Data Characters 367 369 Data Checking 4s 107 124 128 146 Data Field Name 109 126 148 Data Matrix 360 Data Sequence 364 Data Structure 347 Data Type 275 Data Type Validation 173 Data Validation 3 Database Adding 275 Compressing 285 Editing 275 281 Erasing 2
148. 9 Enter 15 ESC 264 H79 H key 10 Red Reset button 31 218 SHIFT TAB key 269 TAB 34 109 126 148 TAB key 269 Pressing 10 15 31 34 79 109 126 148 218 264 269 281 Price Header s 128 444 Primary Background 19 Primary Message 355 Print Apollo 39 99 Batch 264 267 388 Color 391 Database Records 284 File 264 267 Format Tracking Report 272 311 HP LaserJet Series II 201 248 Mark 281 New Format 267 PDF417 391 PDF417 bar 391 RANGE 264 Records 284 Report 311 Set 201 218 248 thermal thermal 262 Tracking Report 272 Xi Series 255 Print 39 48 73 99 107 121 124 128 146 154 173 199 201 218 248 255 258 261 262 264 267 272 275 281 284 311 313 318 320 388 391 Print All 311 Print All Records 284 Print All Records icon 284 Print Area Heightss 218 Print Area Width 33 Print Batch Formats 264 388 Print Batch 264 388 Print Criterion 39 48 99 128 Print Darkness 28 Print Date 4s 128 151 385 Print Format 23 Print Format Definition 157 271 273 Print Head Temperature 218 Print ID Label 250 Print Job 93 257 Print Mode 28 168 206 255 Print Mode Override 250 Print Q button 257 Print Q icon 93 Print Queue Change 93 257 commands 264 Displays 10 entering 173 restoring 261 381 save 264 view 320 View Changing 257 Print Queue 10 93 94 173 201 225 257 259 260 261 264 318 320 381 388 Print Queue Menu 206 Print Report 23 272 313 314 315
149. 99 128 336 338 339 341 342 344 351 Human Readable Interpretation 39 99 IBM 15 ID cause 250 enter 320 ID 168 250 320 350 Identification Numbers 347 Identifier 347 111201 248 275 279 388 391 IIP 201 248 Image Bands 31 206 Image Processing 17 431 Printed Documentation Imaging Bands 31 Imaging 31 IMG 168 IMPORTANT NOTE 391 INC 179 184 190 197 213 225 244 253 372 Include Fields 284 311 314 INCOMPLETE 107 124 146 Incorrect Password 381 Incorrect User ID 381 INCREASE 28 Increment Type 4s 128 Increment as 128 Increment decrement Type 39 99 Increment decrement 39 99 267 Increment Decrement Data 39 99 Increment Decrement Field 39 48 99 128 Increment Decrement Sequence 39 99 Incrementation type 4s 128 Incrementation 39 48 99 128 Incrementation Decrementation 173 Incremented decremented 39 48 99 128 Indefinite Printer 173 432 Index Case Sensitive Database Searches 15 Index Case Sensitive Searches 15 Index Expression 381 Index File Adding 280 Erasing 281 Index File 280 281 Index File Name 279 280 Indexing Database 279 Indexing 279 Indicator 372 Indistinguishable 394 403 Industry Standard Architecture 161 168 177 182 187 194 208 216 221 234 241 250 Industry specific 355 369 Ineligible Field Name Used 381 Initial Label Feed 177 182 187 194 204 210 241 Inputs Sample Message 394 Inputs 394 Insert CD 9 12 New Fiel
150. A A eed AA o 296 Create a New Tables A a tt 296 Modifying a Fieldsin a A ea ha ee a a ela 299 Deleting a Field ii A A et et a ee ei 300 Adding a Fl ii NA A anata lve beta A Oa teehee an eae 300 Adding a Record it cerita senda ede aa a ea ad 300 Deleting a Recordad dt 300 Changing ROMS ib di 300 Navigating a Database Table ui ies aaa 301 Editing Table Records civic sita 301 To edit database records click the Form View icon or the Datasheet View icon on the Edit menu You can also select View Form View or View Datasheet View from the Menu bar cooccccinncccconoccnconoccconnncanononononnnccnnnn cn conan cc naar can nnn rca nana 301 DESIN VIEW E rta cid oo atte fare ne Mor lloc edo o a co eo el cnn de lo lance a ent 302 IS OE a NA NN 302 Datasheet VE A A AA AS A E AA TA S 302 Printing the Entire Table of RecordS ooooccoccocccococccconooccconancnononcncononnnnnn ocn cnn rra nene nn nn n nn ran nn nn nn nn nn ran nacen rra nene nn rnannrananencnnnes 302 Sorting the Table oonnoccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncccn naco nn 303 Writing Database Records to a Text Fil8 oooconoccccnnncccinoccccnnococonanccnonnnnconnrnn conan ncnnnn canoso ncn canon nn nan nn nn ercer cara r nr name rana 304 Appending Records to a Table cccecccecesccceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeecaaeeeseaeesseaaeesseaeeeseaaeesceaeesecaeeeseeeesenaeesseeeeseieeeeas 304 ROMS RECOU ie dE ON vets eye A E a En E AAA LA AED da 305 A A TO O RS TO ORT 305 A O UA O O O
151. ARTING RECORD NUMBER OR ALL DATABASE HAS 30 RECORDS ENTER ALL If you typed a number instead of ALL you would now see the following item ENDING RECORD NUMBER This would give you the ability to print a specific range of records from a data file if it were required because of a paper jam or some other situation The next item is e HOLD JOB Answer No to begin printing immediately Enter Yes to store this job in the Print Queue for printing later If you answered No shortly labels will start coming out of the printer A total of 60 labels will be printed Now you may exit the Print screen and enter the Change Format function to explore some of the attributes of the format named STORE One item of interest might be the bar code and how it accesses the database through the use of an operator prompt Once you are through exploring the format exit the software completely It s now time to explore the database that was used to print the labels that came off the printer 389 Printed Documentation The name of this file is STORE DBF It was created on a mini computer and downloaded to the PC for use with this software Following are the key points that may be viewed on the screen You may also see The structure of the file is fixed length fields padded with spaces and a carriage return line feed at the end of each record The file must have the extension DBF The first 9 lines define the structure of the file by field nam
152. ATO 8450 225 SATO 8480s 225 Sato Cables 225 Sato CL408 225 SATO CL412 225 Sato CL608 225 Sato CL612 225 Sato Model CL608 221 Sato Notes 231 Sato Setup 221 Save Format 86 Print Queue 264 Save 27 36 86 87 264 275 309 Save As use 87 Save As 87 Save As Function 385 Save Data 15 Save icon 86 Scalable 360 Scan Bar Codes 331 450 Scanning Bar Codes 331 Scanning 331 SCC 14 344 Script Character Set Select 4s 128 Script Character Setas 128 SCx 168 Search Back 281 Search Field Name 109 126 148 Search Fields 34 109 126 148 Search Next 281 Search Path 17 Search Paths 17 Searching Database 275 Searching 275 See Adding 269 See Appearance 39 99 See Examples 39 99 See Format Specifications 36 See Label Setup 36 See Printer Setup 257 See Software Sentinel Installation 12 See Through Sensor 28 See Users 9 See Writing Database Records 287 Select Datasheet 284 Delete icon 84 External Database 330 Field 81 File 281 Font Setup button 311 Form 284 Hold Job 267 Manufacturer 262 move 311 No 73 121 OK button 38 83 90 Script Character Setas 128 Settings 9 Space Horizontally 158 Space Vertically 159 Standard Code Sizes 168 Test Print icon 271 Tools 81 89 User icon 9 View 97 Yes 15 31 39 73 99 121 Select 9 15 31 38 39 48 73 81 82 83 84 89 90 97 99 121 128 158 159 168 262 267 271 281 284 311 330 Select All 264 Sel
153. Arithmetic for Source of Data Enter SUBSTRING TOTAL 4 1 for Calculation 6 Create another text field and name it DATA Choose Link for the Source of Data Enter 2 for the Number of Fields to Link Choose BARDATA for Link Field 1 Choose CHECKSUM for Link Field 2 404 Appendices 7 Create a Barcode Field and name it BARCODE Choose Copied for Source of Data Choose DATA for the name of the copied field Steps 2 and 3 were added for explanation purposes You may eliminate these two steps by changing step 4 to the following 4 Create another text field and name it TOTAL Choose Arithmetic for Source of Data Enter SS BARDATA 1 1 9 SS BARDATA 2 1 8 SS BARDATA 3 1 7 SS BA RDATA 4 1 6 SS BARDATA 5 1 5 SS BARDATA 6 1 4 SS BARDATA 7 1 3 SS BARDATA 8 1 2 SS BARDATA 9 1 1 9 for Calculation Enter 2 for Decimal Places Choose Custom Numeric Amount Format for Special Formatting Enter 99 99 for Format String Arithmetic Expression summary This is a Summary of the operators and functions which can be used in expressions arithmetic conditional print and in the procedures mentioned above Multiplication Division PA Division oS O Remainder Example 16 7 is 2 Aoo O or 405 Printed Documentation LIKE Pattern matching comparison operator NOT LIKE Negation of LIKE gt gt Greater than or equal comparison operator gt Greater than c
154. C 391 PCMCIA 173 PCMCIA Drive Downloading 173 PCMCIA Drive 173 PCX 168 391 PDF417 printing 391 PDF417 3 353 365 366 391 PDF417 bar print 391 PDF417 bar 39 99 391 PDF417 symbologies 366 Peel Off 255 Penalty 343 PgDn 10 27 269 PgDn key use 264 PgDn key 264 PgDn Show 281 PgUp use 269 PgUp 10 27 269 PgUp PgDn 10 PgUp Show 281 PHANTOM 394 Index Phantom Fields 19 Pharmaceuticals 385 Picket Fence 31 218 Picture 38 Picture Error 261 381 Picture Field Adding 73 121 385 Picture Field 73 121 385 Picture icon 73 121 Pin Cable Configuration 162 171 179 184 190 197 205 210 213 218 225 236 244 253 Pitch Sensor 225 Placement Grid 19 Placing Field 79 Placing 79 PLANET 346 PLANET Code 346 PLANET symbology 346 Plessey Code 347 Plessey Company 347 Plessy 347 PLUS ONE INCH 31 206 PM 152 Pointer 84 Port Monitoring 394 Type 161 168 177 182 187 194 204 208 210 216 221 234 241 250 262 263 443 Printed Documentation Port 161 168 177 182 187 194 204 208 210 215 216 221 234 241 250 262 263 394 Port Serial Printing 262 Position Starting 267 Position 267 Position Grid 79 94 Position Per Line 4s 128 Postal Service 347 POSTNET 346 347 Postnet symbology 343 Postscript 3 73 121 391 Postscript Printers 247 Presentation Position 28 PRESS ALT C FOR INITIAL SETUP 394 Pressing ALT E 281 C7
155. CII characters value 0 to 127 inclusive and provides for international character set support MicroPDF417 is designed for applications where the symbol must be smaller than PDF417 will allow PDF417 History and Overview PDF417 is a two dimensional stacked public domain barcode developed in 1990 by Symbol Technology It is a multi row continuous variable length symbology that has high data capacity of storing up to about 1 800 printable ASCII characters or 1 100 binary character per symbol The symbol is rectangular Its shape can be adjusted to some extent by setting the width and allowing the height to grow with the data It is also possible to break large amounts of data into several PDF417 symbols that can be logically linked Each symbol has between 3 and 90 rows Each row contains a start pattern a left row indicator from 1 to 30 data characters a right row indicator and a stop pattern Both the number of rows and their length are selectable allowing the aspect ratio to be adjusted to particular labeling applications There are no separator bars between rows Each symbol character consists of 4 bars and 4 spaces in a 17 module structure There are three mutually exclusive sets of symbol patterns or clusters Each cluster has 929 distinct patterns Adjacent rows use different clusters so it is possible for the decoder to tell if the scanning path is crossing row boundaries without the use of separator bars Every symbol inc
156. Code 39 making 336 structure 357 Code 39 3 333 336 338 339 355 357 358 Code 39 s Full ASCII 336 338 Code 49 353 358 Code 93 333 338 355 Code Height 39 99 Code One 353 Code Page 850 Installing 394 Code Page 850 394 Code Ratio 39 99 Code Type 336 338 339 341 342 344 351 353 355 360 362 367 369 372 Code Verification 201 232 248 Codes 173 388 Codeword 366 369 Codewords correcting 369 417 Printed Documentation missing 369 sequence 355 369 Codewords 353 355 362 367 369 COLOR 73 121 284 391 COM 262 394 Combine Reports 311 Comm 260 Command File Create 320 name 320 use 388 Command File 39 48 67 69 73 76 99 107 112 116 118 121 124 128 146 218 318 320 381 388 391 Command File Clauses 320 Command File Monitoring 17 318 320 Command File Monitoring Mode 320 Command Line 381 Command Monitoring 320 Command Monitoring icon 320 Commandfilename 320 Commands Print Queue 264 Commands 264 Common 391 Compatible Printers 201 248 Composite 362 372 Composite Component 362 Compressing 418 Database 285 Compressing 281 285 Computer Type 15 Concatenatable 347 Concatenation 364 Concatenation Global Label Identifiers 366 Concurrent Access 161 168 177 182 187 194 208 216 221 241 250 Concurrent Address 234 Conditional Entering 264 Conditional 264 Config
157. Cut after each Batch e Cut after each Job Set Printer Clock Select Yes to set the printer clock to match the computer clock Select No to NOT set the printer clock to match the computer clock Direct Print Select direct print to send data directly to the port For a shared or network printer be sure direct print is not selected This option appears for those printers that can be configured for parallel printing This option only appears when using Windows 95 98 or ME Darkness Adjustment 164 Printing Enter a number from 4 to 4 to adjust the base level of print darkness Negative numbers make the print lighter Offset Adjustment Adjust the form edge offset Offset adjustment is the number from 99 to 999 needed to change the formats starting print position Negative numbers will move the starting position down from the top of the format Positive numbers will move the starting position up towards the top of the format Pause Before Printing Select Yes to pause the printer before printing each job Pausing the printer is a safety precaution that protects the operator when an applicator is being used Select No to print each job without pausing the printer Standard Code Sizes Select Standard Code Sizes to use standard SCx symbol sizes for UPC EAN bar codes otherwise leave blank Deselect Standard Code Sizes to print UPC and EAN symbologies with user defined values Selecting Standard Code Sizes allow you to pr
158. E 280 Status set 225 Status 221 225 260 Step Ladder 31 218 Stop 264 333 Stop Bits match 394 Stop Bits 171 181 186 193 199 206 210 215 218 225 255 394 STORE 388 Store As 173 Store dbf 388 Stored run 394 String Q s 48 128 String 4s 128 STRINGS 394 403 Stripe 300 250 Stripe 500 250 Structure CODABLOCK F 357 Code 128 357 Code 39 357 SuperCode 369 Structure 357 369 Structured Append 355 Index Subdirectory 275 311 320 Subdirectory EASY commandfilename 320 Subfunction 281 Subfunctions 9 Submenu 82 85 Subset B 339 Subset C 339 SUBSTRING 394 Subtract 153 Super Code 353 SuperCode structure 369 SuperCode 369 Superset UPC 341 342 Superset 341 342 Supplementing 10 digit Code 128 355 Supplementing 355 Support Code 128 39 99 UNC 3 Support 3 39 99 Switch 241 320 Sybase 3 Symbol 367 Symbol Character 333 Symbol Character Structure 372 455 Printed Documentation Symbol Check Characters 333 Symbol Error Correction 360 Symbol Error Detection 360 Symbol Height 358 366 Symbol Length 333 358 Symbol Separator 362 Symbol Set 201 248 Symbol Size 353 355 360 364 367 369 Symbol Structure 372 Symbol Structure Header 369 Symbol Technology 366 Symbol Width 366 Symbologies 36 39 99 333 344 347 353 355 357 369 372 Symbology 39 99 335 336 338 339 344 346 347 350 358 360 362 3
159. FF Zebra Programming Language ZPL BACK to TOP 256 Printing Adding a Printer Adding a Printer To Add a New Printer choose Settings Printer Configuration from the menu bar or select the printer configuration icon from the Function Toolbar Then click the add printer icon See Printer Setup for more information Deleting a Printer Deleting a Printer To delete a printer choose Settings Printer Configuration from the menu bar or select the printer configuration icon from the Function Toolbar Next select the printer that you wish to delete from the list of Currently Defined printers and click the Delete button Changing and Existing Printer Changing an Existing Printer To change current printer configuration options choose Settings Printer Configuration from the menu bar or select the printer configuration icon from the Function Toolbar on the main screen double click on the printer that you want to change or highlight it and click the Change Printer Configuration icon or choose Edit Change from the menu Print Queue View Changing the Print Queue The Print Queue is a job staging area for your various printing jobs The Print Job files reside on the hard disk The software manages these files and loads a new job after each job is completed until it has exhausted the Print Queue This will allow you to load an entire day s work at the start of a shift The Print Queue can hold up to 220 jobs Change Single Job
160. Field Length Editing the Database Decimal Places Field Position Po Reserved Words Adding a Database Up to 7 index files per database may be specified This allows for much faster access to the data when printing formats When you are asked for a search field name when defining a database field in a format it should be one of your indexed fields When using a database search key an index file will be created based on your chosen search key thus making the search time faster Once the index file is created it will be saved as part of your database structure The structure of the internal database is the same as that used by the program dBASEIII This makes it possible to use many of the powerful features of dBASE on your database or to access a database created by dBASEIII You may use databases created under dBASE Ill III IV or an ASCII database directly without having to convert them first to ASCII text files Your dBASE files may be copied into this software s subdirectory if desired However this is not necessary because any file may be accessed simply by specifying the path The available database files will be displayed in alphabetical order for the default directory or subdirectory 275 Printed Documentation Since the software s database structure is compatible with dBASE III II and IV file structure databases can handle up to 128 fields per record over 4000 bytes per record and more than 1 mi
161. Icons Tabbed Dialog Boxes Normal Text Select the predefined color or create your own color by selecting the Custom button for all Normal Text Highlighted Text Select the predefined color or create your own color by selecting the Custom button for all Highlighted Text Phantom Fields Select the predefined color or create your own color by selecting the Custom button for all Phantom Fields Primary Background Select the predefined color or create your own color by selecting the Custom button for the Primary Background Alternate Background Select the predefined color or create your own color by selecting the Custom button for the Alternate Background Format Background Select the predefined color or create your own color by selecting the Custom button for the Format Background Placement Grid Select the predefined color or create your own color by selecting the Custom button for the Placement Grid Large Toolbar Icons Select Yes to show large icons in all of the toolbars Select No to show the standard size small icons Tabbed Dialog Boxes Select Yes to show dialog boxes in standard tabbed format where items are grouped by function Select No to use single page dialog boxes where all items are presented in a single list Printed Documentation BACK to TOP Security Minimum User ID Length Enter the number of characters to be used as the minimum length for a User ID The Software will not
162. In order to better identify the selected fields the selected fields will change color to blue by default This option allows you to choose more than one field so that you may move a group of fields erase a group of fields or copy a group of fields You may also Align a Group of fields by choosing the group and then selecting Tools Align from the menu bar Choose All Fields To select all fields on a format select Edit Choose All Fields from the menu or right mouse click anywhere on the format background and select Choose All Fields 89 Printed Documentation Erasing a Field To erase a field Select the field you wish to erase and click the Erase Field icon from the main toolbar or choose Edit Erase Field from the menu You will be prompted with a message asking you to confirm that you wish to erase the field Moving a Field To move a field to a new location on the format left click once to highlight it then select the move field icon from the toolbar The selected field will now be outlined in a grey box You can now drag the field to its desired position using the mouse You may also use the arrow keys or use the HOME and END keys to reposition the field When the box is in the desired location release the mouse button or press ENTER The field will be displayed in the new location You can also select Edit Move Field from the menu bar to move a field or group of fields Viewing Changing a Field This selec
163. Moving 37 Number 173 264 Print Batch 264 388 Saving 86 Format 36 37 38 79 85 86 161 168 173 177 182 187 194 201 204 208 210 216 218 221 234 241 248 250 260 264 267 388 Format Background 19 Format Being Added Format Request Queue 264 Index Format Being Added 264 Format Card 173 Format Data Changing 269 Format Data 269 Format Definition Print 157 271 273 Format Display 81 Format File 27 Format Name Entering 27 set 317 Format Name 27 260 267 317 394 Format Navigator 96 Format Request List 261 381 Format Request Queue Format Being Added 264 Format Request Queue 264 Format Saved With DEMO Version 381 Format Specification 168 255 Format Specification icon 38 Format Specification Screen 27 31 244 Format Specifications menu 38 Format String following s 128 specified 4s 128 Format String 4s 128 394 403 Format Tracking Data 429 Printed Documentation Erasing 314 Format Tracking Data 314 Format Tracking Report Printing 272 311 produces 86 Test Printing 313 Format Tracking Report 86 272 311 313 FORMATCOUNT 320 388 394 FORMATNAME 318 320 388 394 Formatname HAS BEEN SAVED 86 Formats Printed Report 385 Freeze 258 259 Freeze All 259 Frozen 225 258 Frozen Job 260 Frozen Status 225 Fuctions 96 Full 261 381 Full ASCII 333 336 338 Full Justify 4s 128 Fully Blank 107 124 146 Function 95 Function Tool Bar Select View display 95 Function To
164. N KEY ID DATA PHRASE R R2 S17 For this example the data source name is RISKSAFETY We are looking in the GERMAN table under the ID column for R2 and S17 We will then pull out the data stored in the PHRASE column for those two records Since we did not specify a DIVIDER one carriage return will be added after each record 292 Databaseview BACK to TOP Adding an Access Database Adding a Database TableName Name MoveDown S O Adding a Database The structure of the database is the same as that used by the program Microsoft Access This makes it possible to use many of the powerful features of Access on your database or to access a database created by Microsoft Access The data from these databases can be included in formats designed with the software A format field can be specified so that it contains the value from a particular database field in a specified database For each database that will be used in this way a particular field must be specified as the search field When the field s data is to be retrieved the database is searched to find a record that matches the desired value entered by the operator The following options will allow you to define new fields for the database Table Name Enter a name that will uniquely identify the contents of the table The following selections are available in the Column Definition portion of the Create a New Table dialog box In this section you will be pr
165. Name Select File New from the menu bar A dialog box will appear Click on Save as Type to choose the file type such as format database serial file You will be prompted for the name of the new Format File At the same time an alphabetized listing of the present files in your default directory will be displayed across the screen If there are more format names than can be shown on one screen the PgUp and PgDn keys will move to your next screen s or back to your previous screen s The file information box will display the Last Update and Description information of any of the presently defined formats Press the arrow keys to select a specific format name The description of the format will appear at the bottom of the dialog box To enter the New Format Name place the cursor in the data entry box below this prompt You will now be presented with the Format Specification Screen The information you enter controls specific aspects of the format The following describes the items that appear on your Format Specification Screen Printer Model Enter a choice in order to specify which model of printer is to be used Default Printer Select the default printer When this format is printed the selected printer will be selected as the default destination printer This is useful when more than one 27 Printed Documentation printer of the same type is installed to ensure that the job gets sent to the correct printer Description
166. Parity None Handshake RTS CTS on Printer BACK to TOP Citizen Citizen Setup Printer Printer Concurrent Use Hardware Darkness Offset bie Set Printer Clock Initial Label Feed Printer Name The Printer Name parameter is optional You may specify a name to uniquely identify this printer This name will show up in the print request screen and the queue s printer list It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX interface Printer Description The Printer Description parameter is optional You may enter a description that further identifies the printer for the user The location of the printer Shipping and Receiving and size type of media loaded 4 inch X 6 inch paper media are examples of what can be stored here Printer Manufacturer Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided Printer Model Select the model of printer to be used 182 Printing Type of Port Select the type of port the device is attached to The options are Serial Parallel USB Network Windows or IP Some of these options may or may not be available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected Port Select the port to which the printer is attached Concurrent Access Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture computers If serial port interrupts are not known do not select concu
167. Pointer 95 Magnifying 95 Maintain Aspect Ratio 73 121 Manager Functions 23 Manual Feed 201 248 Manufacturer select 262 Manufacturer 259 262 Manufacturer Identification Number 341 342 351 Manufacturers list 262 Manufacturing Execution Systems 3 Resource Planning 3 Manufacturing 3 Mark Entering 264 Erase 281 Print 281 Mark 264 281 MARKED 264 MARKED FOR ERASE 281 Marked Records 15 Match Data Field Name 109 126 148 Parity 394 Stop Bit 394 Match 109 126 148 394 Matrix symbologies 353 MaxiCode 3 171 181 186 193 199 206 215 231 236 246 353 364 Maximum codeword 369 Maximum Data Capacity 364 366 Maximum Durability Date 347 Maximum Field Length 34 48 107 124 128 146 Maximum Fields Format 37 Maximum Fields 37 Maximum Lines 4s 128 Maximum Message Length 358 Maximum Number Index Data Characters 369 Maximum Number 369 Maximum Numeric Data Capacity 362 372 Maximum Row Height 366 MB 12 215 MB RAM 12 Mdb 391 ME 12 168 177 182 187 194 200 204 210 216 221 239 241 250 Media Type 206 MEMO 109 126 148 Memory Card clicking 173 Download Format 173 Memory Card 173 Memory Card Downloads 28 171 Memory Card Functions 173 Memory Card Installation 215 Memory Card Limitations 173 Menu Functions 23 MES 3 Mesas 355 Message Board 7 Message file 391 Messages Received 394 Metric 4s 128 MG10 8M 336 Micro PDF417 365 MicroPDF417 365 437 Printed Documentation
168. Printed Documentation Table Of Contents What Can the Software Do aa ad stness Casey dk d i E a deian cane nea Ni 3 What Can th Software Dori a 3 Software Licensing Agreement Adi 4 Getting and Using Helpe one aaa ones ee ee ee la eae Aaa a ana ath lt 7 Online Hel piece ke ee ea es a ae ea in tae a AS 7 Visit OUR Website A ad 7 Problem Cause Solution vc ta a tees ir tans ae cadence dari casareeten tied 7 Getting Started ssr iiia A A ae ae Cee A ia ca ental eles 9 Howto get started 4 2 2ecne skeen A eae aaa E Ea a 9 Before You Beginve ia0 83 NA va aia neva da 9 PASSWOIUS ias 9 HOCKEY S case Bae A A A an ee A ee ea ea ee DA a 10 ISTMO esac cee aces ca bears cae Cae stig A daa teats ca AAA cad eg da cena ed toe Zap sae dab hed Deda ea ee date ead 12 System REQUIEM viii wen at a MA i ae ev a ig cae vie eae 12 SoftWare Installati n iriti nirean riaan A ibi 12 Software Key Installation sninen aiaeei iasta A ae 13 MulticUs r Key Installation iiri a aio 13 Running the Software inicia ected hein a ease evens tesa ieee adn 14 Running Windows Terminal Server cccccccceeseeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeeaaeeeeaaeeeseaaeeeseaeeseeaaeeseeesteneeesseaeeetsnaeesseasees 14 Program Opt ica a ii deine dae 15 Generaler ON OR NN OR NN 15 LANUS Lai A ias 17 SEA CUP aa 17 POCOS Simi at a a PAS 17 APPO MN Cetina ii iio 19 SOCUMILY A ii ba said dE Sa 20 Table Of Contents Logging tA A A Bia nals a ated eee A ea Da a i a ee
169. Status Edit Job 257 Printed Documentation The Edit function allows you to modify the attributes you defined for a job when you loaded the job in the Print Queue Items such as Batch Size the printer to send the job to and the Hold Job option are potential selections This function only applies to jobs that have not yet begun to print Cancel A Job This function will allow you to cancel any job individually You would use this function if you no longer needed a job you had previously loaded into the Queue if one of your printers has broken down or a format has started to print and you immediately recognize that incorrect information is being printed This function immediately resets the printer and rewrites any associated report to reflect how many formats if any had been printed Move Down This function should be used to prioritize when Non Printing jobs will be printed Select the job that you want to move down in priority Click the Move Down button until the job is in the desired location in the print queue Move Up This function should be used to prioritize when Non Printing jobs will be printed For example A truck just pulled up to your shipping dock and the freight is ready but not labeled The job is in the Queue but it is Job Number 25 Simply Freeze All of the jobs to that printer move Job 25 to Job 2 by selecting the job and clicking the Move Up button then resume all the jobs to that printer You can F
170. The ECI protocol enables characters from various character sets e g Arabic Cyrillic Greek Hebrew and other data interpretations or industry specific requirements to be represented e Structured Append Structured Append allows files of data to be represented logically and continually in up to 26 Aztec Mesas The symbols may be scanned in any sequence to enable the original data to be correctly reconstructed f Reader Configuration Symbols A distinct format of Aztec Mesa symbol is available for use in bar code menus for reader configuration The encoded message in these special symbols is never passed on to an application Examples CODABLOCK 357 Printed Documentation History and Overview CODABLOCK was developed as a stacked version of the standard bar codes Code 39 and Code 128 able to encode the information context when the label is not wide enough and therefore several shorter bar codes should be printed Each row indicator which shows the orientation of the reading and two check characters which guarantee the accuracy of the whole message There are three varieties of this code CODABLOCK A Based on the structure of Code 39 it can encode 1 to 61 characters with up to 22 rows totally maximum 1 340 characters The check digit over the whole message is calculated on Modulo 43 CODABLOCK F Based on the structure of Code 128 this code can contain 2 to 44 rows with 4 to 62 characters per row totalling maximum 2 725
171. The Table Definition portion of the Create a New Table dialog box is used to insert defined fields into your table and to modify the placement of those fields Insert to Table After a field has been defined in the Column Definition section selecting this button will insert it sequentially into your database structure Remove Will remove an inserted field from your database structure Move Up Will move an inserted field up the database structure Move Down Will move an inserted field down the database structure BACK to TOP Modifying a Field To modify a field the table must be open and be in Design View To enter Design View you can click the Design View icon on the Edit toolbar or select View Design View from the menu bar The Type and Column Size is modifiable The name of the field cannot be modified If you need to modify the name of the field you must first delete the field then add a new field 299 Printed Documentation Deleting a Field To erase a field column highlight the field to be erased then click on the Delete a Column icon on the Standard toolbar or choose Edit Delete Column from the menu bar Adding a Field To add a new field column to an existing table click the Add a new Column icon from the Standard toolbar or select Edit Add Column from the menu bar You will then be presented with the Create a New Column dialog box From this dialog box you can give your field a unique name
172. There are four different start stop characters A B C and D that are generally used in matching pairs and may not appear elsewhere in the barcode Codabar is used in libraries blood banks membership cards the overnight package delivery industry and a variety of information processing applications The numeric characters each have one wide bar and one wide space within the group of four bars and three spaces The alpha start stop characters are constructed with one wide bar and two wide spaces Quiet zone is 10 times the width of the narrow bar There is no checksum defined as part of the Codabar standard But when it is used it is inserted between the last data character and stop character Modulus 16 is generally used for the checksum Specifications Character Set 0 9 Sis q There are also four unique start stop characters designated A B C and D Encodation Four bars and three spaces are required to encode a character 335 Printed Documentation Allowable Sizes Minimum X Dimension 0075 inches Wide to Narrow Ratio 2 1 to 3 1 for X Dimension gt 020 inches 2 2 1 to 3 1 for X Dimension lt 020 inches Allowable Symbol Height The greater of 25 inches or 15 of the symbol length Code 39 History and Overview Code 39 is a widely used industrial barcode and is mandated for some automotive industry and Department of Defense labels because of its ability to represent alphanumeric data Code 39 is def
173. This concept is the same for graphics Many times the same graphic is needed for multiple chemicals By specifying the correct graphic s for a specific chemical the operator will not need to worry about printing an incorrect graphic with the incorrect chemical By including graphics and text files with specific records the data will be merged onto the label at print time Here we will demonstrate how to include a graphic or text file in a database record 1 The first step is to create the database with a database field that is a character data type and is big enough to include a filename and or path statement as the data For example to embed a text file or graphic in a database record the database field must be a minimum length of 12 This will be enough space for an 8 character filename and the file extension Ex DIAGRAM2 PCX the software will look for the file in the default directory If the text file or graphic is stored in a different location the length for the field must be long enough to include a drive designator and a path name Ex C WINDOWS CAUTION1 TXT 2 Next you will need to design the format so that the Source of Data is Database Indirect for a text file or Database for a graphic When adding the text field to the format the Database Indirect Source of Data means that the software will look for the text at the location specified in the database record When adding the graphic to the format the Database Source of
174. This item allows you to select the appropriate database file table Search Fields The number of fields used to search for a specific record Search Field Name The name of the database field that will be used in searching the database When the operator enters a search value the database will be searched to find the given value in the Search Field The corresponding record will then be used to supply data This item must be entered once and may be entered as many as 3 times for each database used If you have previously specified a field using the same database this item will not appear unless the number of search fields you have specified was more than 1 The choices of field names appear in the dialog box Operator Prompt Line Define the prompt you wish to appear at the time of printing The prompt will be displayed above the data entry area for the field Variable Table Prompt Printed Documentation Define the variable table prompt you wish to appear at the print time The prompt will be displayed above the data entry area for the field Data Field Name The name of the database field from which this format field will be filled When the database record to be used is found data for this format field will be extracted from the field matching the Data Field Name The field name choices are displayed in the dialog box Trim Trailing Blanks Select Yes to suppress trailing blanks in an extracted database field Select NO to use the
175. View choosing 97 Data 281 Field Specifications 10 Print Queue 320 selecting 97 View 10 34 38 93 97 257 281 320 462 View Datasheet 281 View Field Specifications 83 90 View menu 79 View Records 281 View Changing Print Queue 257 View Changing 257 VIEWING THE DATA 281 Viewing Changing Field 83 90 Serial File 309 Viewing Changing 83 90 309 Viewing Changing Format Size 38 Visit Our Website 7 Visual Basic 317 Visual C 317 Void 31 218 Void amp Reprint 218 Ww W Instructs 320 Want deselect 267 Recreate 281 Want 267 281 WARNING as 128 WATSON 381 W Class 39 99 Web 12 Web page 33 Website 7 317 318 330 394 Week Letter Day 4s 128 Week 4s 128 Week Name Day 4s 128 Week Name as 128 Weighted 403 Welch Allyn Inc 353 WESTERN TELEMATIC 179 184 190 197 213 225 241 244 253 Western Telematic 4 way Switch 221 Western Telematic CAS 161A 16 way 179 184 190 197 213 225 244 253 Western Telematic CAS 41 4 way 179 184 190 197 213 225 244 253 Western Telematic CAS 81 8 way 179 184 190 197 213 225 244 253 Western Telematic Switch 225 244 Western Telematic Switch Box Printer Assignments 179 184 190 197 213 225 244 253 Western Telematic Switch Boxes 179 184 190 197 213 225 241 244 253 Western Telematic Switchbox 179 184 190 197 213 225 244 253 WHEN DATA ITEMS ARE COMPLETED 78 When Printed 15 39 48 73 99 107 109
176. ZZXXXXHdata Where CCC Country Code SSS Service Code ZZZZZXXXX Zip Code 4 Digit Extension optional BACK to TOP RJS RJS Setup Printer Name Printer Printer Printer Model Description Manufacturer Concurrent Darkness Printer Name The Printer Name parameter is optional You may specify a name to uniquely identify this printer This name will show up in the print request screen and the queue s printer list It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX interface Printer Description The Printer Description parameter is optional You may enter a description that further identifies the printer for the user The location of the printer Shipping and Receiving and size type of media loaded 4 inch X 6 inch paper media are examples of what can be stored here Printer Manufacturer 216 Printing Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided Printer Model Select the model of printer to be used Type of Port Select the type of port the device is attached to The options are Serial Parallel USB Network Windows or IP Some of these options may or may not be available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected Port Enter the port to which the printer is attached Concurrent Access Select Concurrent Access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture computers If serial port
177. a 306 E TO NN NN 309 viii Table Of Contents Serial File FUNCIONA velssistees ccd cesta cveteeeel dat ovate ann eee abt annua t 309 Creating a Serial Fil cia a tee ea ea an aes dee ea A ae A eee a R 309 Recent Serial Files al aaa eat 309 Viewing Changing a Serial Fl cui A A ee ee AA 309 Erasing a Serial lO iio ia A a a aoe ES 309 RDS ti A A A AAA a aa 311 Creating A REPO A A O A As 311 Recent A O NN 311 Printing the Format Tracking Report tuu A A aie anaes 311 Test Printing the Format Tracking Report sssaaa tascanna eia aeia aaa a aaea a a E da aia 313 Changing the Report Parameter Saanti A e a Mla eh aan ne 313 Writing the Report to a Text File anaa gianna e anaes a 314 Erasing Format Tracking Data tutti end en ea aE a eaaa iaraa 314 Erasing ALL Tracking Data Wii ad ae dees ete ee ns Lael ani ee 315 Advanced i 317 A a 317 Application Programming Interface API ooonoccnnncccononcccnnnocacononcnonnncanononcnconnnonnnnn nn rca eran nn n nr nan n nc naar n nene rra nannnnrnannrananencnnnnes 318 Dynamic Data Exchange DD iii iii doa s 320 Command Files iii iia 320 Creating a Connection to an External Database ooonocccnnnccccconococonoccnonnnccnonnnnonnn cn conan canon cnn narra nnnnn cn nan nn naar nn anna cc nannncens 330 scanning Bar Cod S aniones inde 331 Bar Code MO al 333 A O ROO O 333 Linear Bat Code AAA A 333 aa 333 NN NS 335 A RAS 336 CO A A A A de Ae ali een Seen GA 338 Table Of Contents C0d6 128 ii A
178. a higher quality image This option only applies when Enhanced Image Processing is selected in the Program Options Print Mode The Print Mode option appears on the Format Specification screen and allows the user to select the desired mode of printing Batch Peel Off or Tear Off Size of Gap 170 Printing Entering the size of the gap between the labels allows for more accurate forms control BACK to TOP Apollo Cables 9 Pin Cable 25 Pin Cable RS 485 Cable Configuration Configuration Configuration 9 Pin Cable Configuration 25 Pin Cable Configuration RS 485 Cable Configuration BACK to TOP Apollo Notes RS 232 RS 485 Using an ficas Seira Cut Offset Optional Disable Reprint Keyboard RS 232 Communications For RS 232 Serial Communications Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Handshake RTS CTS on Printer Character Set Windows 1252 on Printer 171 Printed Documentation RS 485 Communications For RS 485 Serial Communications Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Character Set Windows 1252 on Printer Network Address Printer and Software MUST match In order to daisy chain Apollo printers the PC must have an RS 485 converter as supplied by your reseller The Apollo printer network can support up to 26 printers Using the Cutter On the format specification screen you have the ability to cut after each format cut after each batch or cut after each job if t
179. a single bar code The code is also very reliable Code 128 symbols use two independent self checking features which improves printing and scanning reliability UCC EAN 128 bar codes always contain a special non data character known as function 1 FNC 1 which follows the start character of the bar code It enables scanners and processing software to auto discriminate between UCC EAN 128 and other bar code symbologies and subsequently only process relevant data The UCC EAN 128 bar code is made up of a leading quiet zone a Code 128 start character A B or C a FNC 1 character Data Application Identifier plus data field a symbol check character a stop character and a trailing quiet zone The purpose of UCC EAN 128 is to establish a standard way of labeling a package with more information than just a product code It provides supplemental information such as batch number and use before dates There are two main components of UCC EAN 128 the data with its Application Identifier and the bar code symbology used to code the data UCC EAN APPLICATION IDENTIFIER Al An Application Identifier is a prefix code used to identify the meaning and the format of the data that follows it data field There are Als for identification traceability dates quantity measurements locations and many other types of information For example the Al for batch number is 10 and the batch number Al is always followed by an alphanumeric batch code no
180. acted Data message you can place brackets around the data to be used for each field For example if there are two fields that need to be filled the sample message would be as follows Sample Message 12345 x0D x0A123456789 x0D x0A and the extracted data message would be as follows Extracted Data 12345 x0D x0A 123456789 xOD x0A 397 Printed Documentation After the first input the LABELCOM program will wait for the second input before printing a label because the message will not be considered complete until it receives both carriage return line feed pairs Receiving Field Select the format field name or enter a variable name to receive the message data that will be input Only NAMED variable fields in a format can be filled in by this program In other words the field s must be When printed or database fields with a field name specified NOTE If there is another variable field on the format that is not filled in with the data from the received message a value can be specified for this field as well by entering the value in a separate prompt A separate screen item designating the field name appears along with an input box for the data Custom Processing Enter Y if you need to add statements to modify values of format variable fields or format name For example if you want to print a different format based on the value that was received select Yes Procedure This item appears if you selected Yes for Custom Processi
181. acters You may specify a character string of up to 10 characters to always be appended to the front and or end of the bar code These characters will always be encoded in the bar code The following options are available e None e Header e Trailer e BOTH Header and Trailer Leading Characters If you choose to attach header characters to the bar code enter the constant string of characters for the header Trailing Characters If you choose to attach trailer characters to the bar code enter the constant string of characters for the trailer Enable Printing This selection will allow you to define a field from any of the available sources of data and not have that field printed on the format You could also use this function to put a message on the screen for your operator Such as the color or size stock that this format should be printed on Enter Y to print the field on the format Enter N to display the field on the format but do not print the field Enter C to specify a print criterion for the field Print Criterion 105 Printed Documentation Enter the condition for which this field should be printed The condition entered is an expression that can contain currently defined field names numeric or alphabetic constants mathematic operators comparison operators or logical operators Numeric or alphabetic constants need to be enclosed in double quotes The LIKE comparison operator allows you to perform pa
182. age flag will either be a 1 372 Bar Code Information true or O false This character is not included in the entered data and will not appear in the scan The next 14 digits will be the entered 13 characters plus a check digit that is calculated by the software If less than 13 characters are entered zeros will be padded in the data after the linkage character to make up the correct amount of characters Instructions Thirteen digits must be entered for the linear GS7 DataBar If thirteen digits are not entered leading zeros will be added When creating a composite barcode a pipe symbol must be used when separating the data between the linear and 2D barcodes Example Using the data 2001234567890 will create a linear Standard GS7 DataBar with a human readable of 01 20012345678909 The 01 is the Application Identifier and the last digit is the check digit 01 20012345678909 When creating a composite barcode the data such as 2001324567890 0123456789 0120012345678909 will be encoded in the linear part of the barcode and 0123456789 will be encoded in the 2D portion of the composite barcode 01 20012345678909 GS1 DataBar Truncated Description Formally known as RSS 14 Truncated The GS1 DataBar Truncated barcode is used when size specifically height might be an issue The height of the barcode is set to the GS1 standard of 13 373 Printed Documentation times the X dimension the x dimension is the width of
183. all IBM compatible computers NEC is only relevant for NEC computers sold in Japan BACK to TOP 16 Program Options Language Help Language Choose the language that you wish to display the help system in Language Choose the language that you wish the application to display in BACK to TOP Search Paths Define Search Path Search Path Define Search Path Select Yes to define the search path for all picture files database files text files and serial files which are used by the format Search Path Enter the path to the files in the corresponding text box or browse to location by selecting the Browse button BACK to TOP Processing ne Sere Disable Test Error Processing Downloaded Print Cent Substitute Data Use Slashed Command File Characters Zero Processing Monitor Default Delete MO Command File Command File Error Processing This option affects the processing of command files when a database record cannot be found Select Yes if you want database field values set to O and the label printed Select No if you want to stop printing when a record cannot be found in the database Printed Documentation Re Send Downloaded Data Select Yes if you want a clear signal to be sent to the printer at the beginning of each job and all downloaded data graphics fonts etc will be re sent otherwise select No Disable Test Print Select Yes to disable the Test Print function from the print screen It will still
184. alled on the printer you may choose Do not cut Cut after each Format Cut after each Batch Cut after each Job BACK to TOP TEC Cables 9 Pin Cable Configuration 25 Pin Cable Configuration 9 Pin Cable Configuration 25 Pin Cable Configuration BACK to TOP TEC Notes MaxiCode 2D Barcodes B 872 MaxiCode When using MaxiCode with TEC printers that support it data must be entered in the following format 123456789SSSCCCdata Where SSS Service Code CCC Country Code 123456789 Zip Code 4 Digit Extension optional 236 Printing data Alphanumeric Data maximum length 84 characters 2D Barcodes If 2D barcodes do not print contact TEC for the latest version of firmware to correct this problem B 872 If the top of the format is being cut off change the feed adjustment on the printer s front panel to positive values as needed BACK to TOP TSC TSC Setup Printer Printer f Type of Port Concurrent Use Hardware yP Access Handshake Baud Rate di Set Printer Set Printer p Darkness __ Initial Label Feed Printer Name The Printer Name parameter is optional You may specify a name to uniquely identify this printer This name will show up in the print request screen and the queue s printer list It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX interface Printer Description The Printer Description parameter is optional You may enter a description that further identifie
185. allest Aztec Code symbol is 15x15 modules square and the largest is 151x 151 b No quiet zone is required outside the bounds of the symbol 354 Bar Code Information c Data capacity at recommended error correction level 1 The smallest Aztec Code symbol encodes up to 13 numeric or 12 alphanumeric characters or bytes of data 2 The largest symbol encodes up to 3832 numeric or 3067 alphabetic character or 1914 bytes of data Selectable Error Correction a User selectable from 5 to 95 of data region b Recommended level is 23 of symbol capacity plus codewords Code Type Matrix Orientation Independent Yes Aztec Mesa History and Overview Aztec Mesas also referred to as Mesas are a 2D matrix form of supplemental field used to form composite bar code symbols wherein a linear primary symbol is augmented by an attached 2D data field An Aztec Mesa is a graphical rearrangement of an Aztec Code symbol into layers of modules lying above and possibly also below the linear host symbol The entire symbol is referred to as an Aztec Mesa composite Mesas can encode from small to large amounts of data with user selected percentages of error correction The linear host symbol may be one of several established linear symbologies and it performs the role of finder horizontal metric and orientation for the attached Mesa as well as encoding primary license plate data that is conventionally scannable The Aztec Mesa field
186. always be appended to the front and or end of the bar code These characters will always be encoded in the bar code The following options are available None Header Trailer BOTH Header and Trailer Enable Printing This selection will allow you to define a field from any of the available sources of data and not have that field printed on the format You could also use this function to put a message on the screen for your operator Such as the color or size stock that this format should be printed on 56 Designing Formats Select Yes to print the field on the format Select No to display the field on the format but do not print the field Select Conditional to specify a print criterion for the field Font Style You will be presented with an on screen list of available font styles for the chosen typeface Font Size You will be presented with an on screen list of available font sizes for the chosen typeface Date Format A special string of characters that will represent how the date should be formatted The valid characters for the string appear in the Directions Box Format String A character string in which 9 s represent how the data should be formatted Other valid characters for the string include parenthesis periods commas hyphens and the space character If you had previously selected Custom Numeric Amount for your Special Formatting option you can type in a sequence of 9 s X s or Z s to represent
187. ar provides the following functions e Program Options e Printer Configuration e Users e Report File e Start the User Log View e Database e Start Databaseview 95 Printed Documentation e Serial File e Field Name Box To display the Function Tool Bar Select View Toolbars from the menu bar Ifa check mark appears next to its name it is already displayed Tools The Tools Toolbar provides the following functions e Display Grid e Snap to Grid e Cross Hairs e Rotate label format 90 degrees clockwise e Align Left e Align Right e Align Up e Align Down e Center Horizontally e Space Horizontally e Space Vertically e Center Vertically To display the Tools Tool Bar Select View Toolbars from the menu bar If a check mark appears next to its name it is already displayed Navigator The Format Navigator shows a thumbnail preview of the entire format The box indicates the area of the format that is being viewed By selecting an area within the Format Navigator you are able to move to a specific area of a format that may not be visible on the format display Field List Displays a list of fields organized in specific categories such Field Type Source of Data and Fonts This allows you to quickly and easily view the field types and sources of data being used on a label format 96 View A specific field can be selected by single clicking on that field s name in the Field List and its properties sheet can be
188. aracters available They are accessed by holding down the Alt key and typing the corresponding numbers on the Numeric Keypad found on the ANSI chart for the character of choice Character options Printed Documentation will vary depending on the printer in use If your keyboard is supplied with International Characters you may access them directly by typing the appropriate keys Refer to Appendix E for more information on producing extended characters ALT letter All Menu functions and Specification Screen items can be accessed using the ALT key and typing the corresponding underlined letter For Specification Screen items some letters are used more than once If a letter is used more than once press ALT the letter again to get to the correct screen item BACK to TOP Installation System Requirements To run the software you will need e Windows 98SE ME NT4 2000 XP Vista e A minimum of 32 MB RAM e 25 50 MB of hard disk space e CD ROM Drive e Internet Explorer 5 0 or higher e Parallel port or USB port e Software Enabling Key Software Installation To install the software follow these steps e Insert the CD into your CD ROM drive Follow the on screen installation instructions Getting Started e If Autorun is not enabled choose Start Run e Type d setup where d is your CD ROM drive click OK e Follow the on screen installation instructions Software Key Installation To use all the capabilities of the so
189. as a clock and supports time offsets then the commands are sent to use the printer clock If time offsets are not supported by the printer or the printer does not have a clock then the field will be sent as fixed data Hour Offset Enter the offset for the hour If this is set to something other than 0 that value is added to the current hour To print the current hour leave this value set to 0 Minute Offset Enter the offset for the minute If this is set to something other than 0 that value is added to the current minute To print the current minute leave this value set to 0 Second Offset Enter the offset for the second If this is set to something other than 0 that value is added to the current second To print the current second leave this value set to 0 Arithmetic Calculate a value based on expression You may Add Subtract Multiply or Divide and specify up to 9 decimal places Calculation This option appears if an Arithmetic field is chosen Enter an arithmetic expression using the currently defined field names numeric constants or a combination of the two with a mathematic operator You may also use the reserved word DATE to perform calculations that require the use of the current system date Valid mathematic operators are addition subtraction 153 Printed Documentation multiplication division For example to calculate a Sell By date for a product you can add a numeric constant to the
190. as being installed on the printer you may choose e Donotcut e Cut after each Format e Cut after each Batch e Cut after each Job Set Printer Clock Select Yes to set the printer clock to match the computer clock Select No to NOT set the printer clock to match the computer clock Darkness Adjustment Enter a number from 3 to 3 to adjust the base level of print darkness Negative numbers make the print lighter Offset Adjustment Enter a number from 99 to 999 to adjust the form edge offset This allows you to compensate for slight mechanical differences between printers This may also be accomplished with settings on the printer s front panel Initial Label Feed Allow blank label feed before printing first job or suppress label feed Allowing an initial label feed will align the print head to the leading edge of die cut label stock BACK to TOP Citizen Cables 9 Pin Cable 25 Pin Cable 184 Printing Configuration Configuration Switchbox 41 Dip Switches Western Telematic Western Telematic Western Telematic Switchbox 41a Dip Switchbox 81c Dip Switchbox 161a Dip Switches Switches Switches Western Telematic Switchbox 41 41a 161a Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switchbox 81c Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switch Box Printer Assignments 9 Pin Cable Configuration 25 Pin Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switch Boxes You have the ability to increase the num
191. at will be written to disk which will contain an 8 bit status string and a 4 bit label remaining count You could then write a function to read the n dat file The DDE_PrinterStatus function can retrieve status from Zebra Datamax and Apollo printers Example DDE_PrinterStatus printernumber printerdata Timing Test API vs Command File Monitoring Formats containing fixed fields were tested using two print methods supported by the software Method one used a sample API program Method two used the Command File functions with Command File Monitoring enabled With method one the time to 319 Printed Documentation print the first label was 1 2 second Using method two the time to print the first label using was 2 seconds If you would like the software to pause before printing a set of formats and allow you to test print or cancel the set you would use the Test Print option With the Test Print option turned on when a new set of formats is processed 3 options will be presented Test print the format Print all formats in the batch or do not print any formats in the current batch When the Print option is chosen all formats selected in the current set will be printed API Examples For more examples and further documentation regarding API please visit our website BACK to TOP Dynamic Data Exchange DDE See the Application Programming Interface API page Command Files What is a Command How do Create a f i
192. ata to all fields which specify the same database For a paragraph field a database MEMO field can be used on the label by supplying the name of the MEMO field at the Data Field Name prompt When the format is printed the operator will be prompted for the value of the search field to be found The software will search the database until a matching record is found The matching record will be used to supply data to all fields that specify the same database There is a method by which you can print out all of the records within a given database Refer to the ALL Function and Tutorial in Appendix C for further information Database F Connection System Database File String Table Name Search Field Operator Prompt Search Fields s TH Data Field Name Trim Trailing Maximum Field Typical Field Design Test Variable Table Database System Enter the name of the Database System to use for accessing a database file You can choose the software s non SQL database to connect to an internal dBase database or choose Other Database System to retrieve data from other types of database files Database File If the field is defined as being from the software s non SQL database then the name of that database must be entered A list of the currently available databases will be displayed in the dialog box If you have previously entered a database name you can use the same name by pressing TAB Connection String 110 Insert
193. atabase of products The most obvious limitation is the amount of data that can be stored in a linear barcode though other problems can exist with the substrate that the barcode is printed on providing insufficient contrast or poor ink receptivity which can cause the quality of the barcode to be less than ideal 931 History and Overview Many applications require certain capabilities that are not supported by current linear symbologies Some of these capabilities include the ability of encoding Unicode double byte characters the Extended Channel Interpretation ECI protocol a linked sequence an indication of the existence of an associated data carrier and error correction Additionally there are applications which require more efficient encoding of certain types of data than is currently available in linear symbologies including the encodation of bytes both for byte data and byte wise character sets extended and Full ASCII and mixed alphanumeric data such as the Code 39 character set 93i was developed specifically to support these applications as well as other general applications The 93i symbology encompasses and extends the Code 93 symbology Specifications 333 Printed Documentation Character Set 1 All 128 ASCII characters i e ASCII character values 0 to 127 inclusive in accordance with ISO 646 2 All extended ASCII characters i e ASCII character values 128 to 255 inclusive in accordance with ISO IEC 8859 1
194. ated by the software Instructions Thirteen digits must be entered for the linear GS7 DataBar Stacked Omni directional f thirteen digits are not entered leading zeros will be added When creating a composite barcode a pipe symbol needs to be inserted between the data that will be in the linear barcode and the 2D barcode Example Using the data 0003456789012 will create a linear GS7 DataBar Stacked Omni directional with a human readable of 01 00034567890125 The 01 is the Application Identifier and the last 5 is the check digit 01 00034567890125 When creating a composite barcode data entered as 0341234567890 17010200 the 0103412345678900 will be encoded in the linear part of the barcode and 17010200 will be in the 2D portion of the composite barcode 01 03412345678900 17 010200 GS1 DataBar Limited 376 Bar Code Information Description Formally known as RSS Limited The GS7 DataBar Limited barcode is designed for small items It uses a 01 Data Identifier It also uses a linkage flag which would be 0 false or 1 true A 1 is used only if the barcode has a 2D barcode attached to the linear barcode Neither the Data Identifier nor the linkage flag needs to be entered by the user as part of the data The linkage flag will not appear in the scan There are 17 characters in a GS7 DataBar Limited that make up the linear barcode but only 13 digits are entered data plus a check digit that is calculated by the sof
195. ats which can then be opened Recent Edited Formats Choose File Recent Edited Formats from the menu bar to display a list of recently created edited Formats which can then be opened Recent Database Files 85 Printed Documentation Choose File Recent Database Files from the menu bar to display a list of recently Edited Databases which can then be opened Recent Reports Choose File Recent Reports from the menu bar to display a list of recently created edited reports which can then be opened Recent Serial Files Choose File Recent Serial Files from the menu bar to display a list of recently created edited Serial Files which can then be opened Saving Saving a Format This function causes all the information which defines the format to be stored on your hard disk The saved format will have the file name consisting of the format name with the extension of FMT For example if the format is named TEST then the file name for the saved format will be TEST FMT Also if any fields were specified with the report data option a tracking data file will be created This file will have the extension RPT Enter a filename for the format Long filenames are supported therefore they can be up to 255 characters long Click Save If an error occurs you will hear a beep and a message describing the error will be displayed After the format is saved the following message appears The format formatname HAS BEEN SAVED
196. ber of printers you can drive with your PC by using a Western Telematic CAS 41 4 way switch box a Western Telematic CAS 81 8 way switch box or a Western Telematic CAS 161A 16 way switch box These switching devices may be obtained from WESTERN TELEMATIC INC 5 Sterling Irvine CA 92718 USA 714 586 9950 800 854 7226 Fax 714 583 9514 www wti com If you are using a Western Telematic Switch formats that contain TrueType font text fields cannot be downloaded as a font to the printer through the Western Telematic Switch Box The Western Telematic does not allow TrueType fonts to be downloaded When using TrueType font text fields on a format and a Western Telematic Switch you must download the font as a graphic Western Telematic Switchbox 41 Dip Switches Western Telematic Switchbox 41a Dip Switches 185 Printed Documentation Western Telematic Switchbox 81c Dip Switches The CAS 81C 8 way Switch Box is equipped with a set of 8 position or 10 position Dip Switches as follows Western Telematic Switchbox 161a Dip Switches Western Telematic Switch Box Printer Assignments If a third CAS 41 Code Activated Switch is connected to the PC above printer assignments would be 9 through 12 The same would be true for the CAS 161A where the first switch box would go to Printers 1 through 16 the second switch box would go to Printers 17 through 32 and if a third switch box is connected it would go to Printers 33 through 4
197. ble Table Prompt Define the variable table prompt you wish to appear at the print time The prompt will be displayed above the data entry area for the field Data Field Name The name of the database field from which this format field will be filled When the database record to be used is found data for this format field will be extracted from the field matching the Data Field Name The field name choices are displayed in the dialog box Trim Trailing Blanks Select Yes to suppress trailing blanks in an extracted database field Select NO to use the field as it appears 111 Printed Documentation Maximum Field Length Enter the maximum number of characters to extract from a database field A value of 0 indicates that all characters should be used Typical Field Length Enter the typical field length of a database field This will allow fields to be displayed during label creation using this length Note that if more characters exist than that specified for the typical length all characters up to the maximum amount specified will be used A value of 0 indicates that there is no typical field length Prompt Number If the field s Source of Data is When Printed or Database the software provides the user with control over the order of data input prompts by allowing the user to specify edit the order in which prompts will appear on the screen This feature will allow flexibility in designing user input screens Design Test Value L
198. bove BACK to TOP Windows Notes Upper Case LaserJet Bar Code Downloaded International Communications Verification Fonts Compatible l Bar Width ds Printing a Set of Formats Upper Case International Enables uppercase International Characters Selecting this option protects International Characters with uppercase ascenders accent marks umlauts etc from being omitted when the top of that character is placed along the outside edges of a format Please be aware that this option will move the field away from the outside edge of the printed label LaserJet Communications The HP LaserJet Series ll IIP Ill IV and V should be set to factory defaults The only exception being Parallel I O Following are the specific settings which were tested Auto Continue Off Symbol Set Roman 8 Copies 1 Manual Feed Off Font Source Font Number 00 Form 60 Lines Parallel I O 248 Printing Refer to your HP LaserJet Printer Manual for information on how to configure your printer and how to print a self test Bar Code Verification Bar codes were tested using an original HP cartridge with the printer s darkness control set to a five 5 Refilled cartridges had varying results All bar codes were verified as being in spec in all resolutions using a Quick Check IV verifier Downloaded Fonts A record is kept of what fonts have been sent to the printer If for any reason the printer is turned off during the course o
199. but do not print the field Select Conditional to specify a print criterion for the field Orientation Angle Enter the Angle in degrees and tenths of degrees Line Thickness If you would like to adjust the thickness of a line after you have already placed the line on the format this parameter permits you to enter a value for the line thickness Line Length Enter the length of the line in inches or millimeters Shape You will be presented with an on screen list of available shapes from which to choose The available choices for line fields are Solid Rectangle Solid Rounded Rectangle Arrow Double Arrow Triangle 68 Designing Formats Fill Pattern You will be presented with an on screen list of available fill patterns from which to choose The available choices are Solid Down Diagonal Up Diagonal Grid Diamond Horizontal lines Vertical Lines Dots Windows Wallpaper The choices vary based on the printer chosen Gray Level You will be presented with an on screen list of available gray level shading This option appears when a Solid fill pattern is chosen Once you have finished entering the specification data for the field the field can be placed on the format BACK to Top Adding a Box Field Adding a Box Field Name Comment ds rizontal osition p a i i Horizontal Vertical Position Enable Printing Field Width Thickness VEICA Shape Fill Pattern Number of Sides Thickness Gray Level Po
200. calable between a 1 mil square to a 14 inch square As an example of density 500 numeric only characters can be encoded in a 1 inch square using a 24 pin dot matrix printer It is capable of encoding a number of different character sets including all 128 ASCII characters The most popular application for this symbology is the marking of small items such as integrated circuits printed circuits boards surgical instruments lens identification and other items The DataMatrix code can be read by CCD video cameras or CCD scanners but it cannot be read by using a laser scanner or ordinary linear barcode scanner Data Matrix from CiMatrix is a 2 D matrix code designed to pack a lot of information in a very small space A Data Matrix symbol can store between one 360 Bar Code Information and 500 characters The symbol is also scalable between a 1 mil square to a 14 inch square That means that a Data Matrix symbol has a maximum theoretical density of 500 million characters to the inch The practical density will of course be limited by the resolution of the printing and reading technology used The code has several other interesting features Since the information is encoded by absolute dot position rather relative dot position it is not as susceptible to printing defects as is traditional bar code The coding scheme has a high level of redundancy with the data scattered throughout the symbol According to the company this allows the symbol
201. ce The database that contains the data to be accessed Variable Table This option is to be used when creating hazardous chemical labels with multi lingual text With it enabled you will be able to choose a table with a specific Noe Tn from within 10 be ena Table Name The table that contains the data to be accessed Search Field The search field is the field within the table that contains data your search will be performed on Data Field The field that contains the data you want to reference in your Cross Reference Records A listing of all the records selected in the Cross Reference Available Records A snapshot of the database table which only includes the Search Field and the Data Field Select Records A listing of all the records selected in the Cross Reference You can also create your own Database Cross Reference by following the rules below The Database Cross Reference string must start with the gt character and it contains the name of the data source file or system DSN the name of the table the name of the key field the name of the data field which record s to use as data and a divider to separate multiple records The software sees the text following the gt as a command and will only print the command as text if an error has occurred Clauses NAME short code N The NAME clause is of the form NAME datasourcename or N datasourcename 291 Printed Documentation Where datasourcename
202. ce in one sixth or one eighth inch increments from the top of one format to the top of the next one down Maximum vertical separation is 33 0 To specify from zero to seven eighths inch or zero to five sixths inch use the following decimal equivalents 233 Printed Documentation 0 eighths 0 O sixths 0 1 eighth 12 1 sixth 17 2 eighths 25 2 sixths 33 3 eighths 37 3 sixths 5 4 eighths 5 4 sixths 67 5 eighths 62 5 sixths 83 6 eighths 75 7 eighths 87 Examples 1 If vertical spacing is 4 and 3 8 enter 4 37 Print area height will then be 4 25 or less 2 If vertical spacing is 2 and 1 4 enter 2 25 Print area height could be as much as 2 13 3 If vertical spacing is 1 2 or 1 use 5 or 1 0 Bar Width Multipliers This function allows you to establish the density of your bar code Everything revolves around the dot size that the laser printer can print The dot size that the laser can print is 3 3 Mils Example UPC printed in 100 magnification has a 13 Mil narrow bar To achieve this you would use a multiplier of 3 which would give you approximately 102 magnification BACK to TOP TEC TEC Setup Printer Description Printer Manufacturer Printer Model Type of Port Concurrent Address Printer Name 234 Printing The Printer Name parameter is optional You may specify a name to uniquely identify this printer This name will show up in th
203. ce is attached to The options are Serial Parallel USB Network Windows or IP Some of these options may or may not be available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected Port Select the port to which the printer is attached Use Hardware Handshake Select Yes to use a hardware handshake Select No to use an XON XOFF handshake Concurrent Access Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture computers If serial port interrupts are not known do not select concurrent access This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing Baud Rate Indicate the baud rate used Baud rates may vary on different printers Device Attached Enter the type of device that is attached to the port The choices are Printer Western Telematic 4 way Switch 8 way Switch or 16 way Switch Printer Address When configuring a printer that is attached to a Western Telematic Switch Box enter the number on the switch box that the printer is connected to Direct Print Select direct print to send data directly to the port For a shared or network printer be sure direct print is not selected This option appears for those printers that can be configured for parallel printing This option only appears when using Windows 95 98 or ME 195 Printed Documentation Printer Memory If a memory cartri
204. ces any selection This command is available only if you have cut or copied an object Erase Select the Erase Field icon or choose Edit Erase Field from the menu bar to permanently remove a selected field from the active format Undo This function reverses your last action To Undo the last editing change click the Undo Icon or choose Edit Undo from the menu bar or press CTRL Z Opening 84 Designing Formats Opening a File To open an existing File click the Open icon from the toolbar or choose File Open from the menu bar A submenu will appear allowing you to choose which type of file you would like to open label format fmt database dbf report rpt or a serial file ser Select which type of file you wish to open You are prompted for the name of an existing file The last file used is the default name displayed At the same time an alphabetized listing of the present files in your directory will be displayed across the screen in the Open Dialog box To display information regarding a file highlight the filename and a description along with a thumbnail preview of the format will be shown at the bottom of the Open box From the File Menu you also have the ability to open eRecent Batch Formats eRecent Edited Formats eRecent Database Files eRecent Reports eRecent Serial Files Recent Batch Formats Choose File Recent Batch Formats from the menu bar to display a list of recently saved Form
205. codable symbol characters are used in accordance with the selected Linear and 2D Composite Components of the symbol 362 Bar Code Information Code Type Linear component continuous linear bar code symbology 2D Composite Component continuous multi row bar code symbology Maximum Numeric Data Capacity including implied application identifiers and calculated check digits where appropriate but not including any encoded FNC1 characters Linear component UCC EAN 128 up to 48 digits EAN UPC 8 or 13 digits RSS Expanded up to 74 digits Other RSS 16 digits 2D Composite Component CC A up to 56 digits CC B up to 338 digits CC C up to 2 361 digits Error Detection and Correction Linear component one check character for error detection 2D Composite Component a fixed or variable number of Reed Solomon error correction codewords depending upon the specific 2D Composite Component Character Self checking Yes Bi directionally Decodable Yes Additional Features 363 Printed Documentation Data compaction The 2D Composite Components utilize a bit oriented compaction mode designed to encode efficiently data using application identifiers Component linkage the 2D Composite Component of each EAN UCC Composite symbol contains a linkage flag which indicates to the reader that no data shall be transmitted unless the associated linear component is also scanned and decoded All linear components except EAN UPC also
206. contains a row number and the last row contains information indicating how many rows there are in the symbol Code 49 symbols can be read with modified moving beam laser scanners or CCD scanners Labels can be printed by standard printing technologies A disadvantage with Code 49 is its structure that requires a large amount of memory for encoding and decoding tables and algorithms Code 49 accomplishes this by using a series of bar code symbols stacked one on top of another Each symbol can have between two and eight rows Each row consists of a leading quiet zone a starting pattern four data words encoding eight characters with the last character a row check character a stop pattern and a trailing quiet zone Every row encodes the data in exactly 18 bars and 17 spaces and each row is separated by a one module high separator bar The code is a continuous variable length symbology that can encode the complete ASCII 128 character set Its structure is actually a cross between UPC and Code 39 Intermec has put the code in the public domain The minimum value of the x dimension is 7 5 mils for a symbol to be read by an unknown reader Assuming an x dimension of 7 5 mils and a minimum 8 row symbol height of 5475 inches the maximum theoretical density is 170 alphanumeric characters per square inch For a health industry symbol with a flag character a 10 digit NDC number a 5 digit expiration date and a 10 character alphanumeric lot code th
207. cremented field Select No to leave the database field unchanged Increment Decrement Maximum Enter the maximum value the field can reach before rolling over to the minimum value NOTE This option requires the computer to do the field incrementation and not the printer The computer will send the labels one at a time to the printer Increment Decrement Minimum Enter the value the field should be reset to after reaching the maximum value NOTE This option requires the computer to do the field incrementation and not the printer The computer will send the labels one at a time to the printer Add on Characters You may specify a character string of up to 10 characters to always be appended to the front and or end of the bar code These characters will always be encoded in the bar code The following options are available e None e Header e Trailer e BOTH Header and Trailer Leading Characters If you choose to attach header characters to the bar code enter the constant string of characters for the header Trailing Characters If you choose to attach trailer characters to the bar code enter the constant string of characters for the trailer Enable Printing This selection will allow you to define a field from any of the available sources of data and not have that field printed on the format 45 Printed Documentation For example If you want your customer s part number to be printed on the format but you do not want your par
208. d Select No if you do not want user to change their password If the user s password expires and they are not permitted to change their password they will be prompted to contact the administrator for a new password when they try to log in Password Never Expires Select Yes to set this user so that their password never expires User Account Disabled Select Yes to disable this user account If the account is disabled the user cannot access the program until the account is enabled Select No to enable user to access the program Changing an Existing User To change an existing user choose Settings Users from the main screen highlight the correct user then click the Change User Definition icon or choose Edit Change from the menu bar 24 Program Options The user definition screen will be displayed and is ready for editing Click Change to change any data for this user Click Cancel to leave data unchanged If any changes are made choose OK to save any changes for this user or choose Cancel to abort changes Deleting a User To delete an existing user choose Settings Users from the main screen highlight the correct user then click the Delete a User icon or choose Edit Delete from the menu bar BACK to TOP 25 Designing Formats Format Specifications General Entering a Printer Model Default Printer Description Format Name Display Fields Currently A Save Backup i Tracking Report Entering a Format
209. d the fixed data will be printed in this format No decimal point for fixed data of 2 characters or less Designing Formats Price NN or N NN Price NN or N NN If selected the fixed data will be printed in this format Displayed with decimal points and currency signs Price NN or N NN Price NN or N NN If selected the fixed data will be printed in this format Displayed with decimal points and the dollar sign Unit Price NN N or N NN Unit Price NN N or N NN If selected the fixed data will be printed in this format Displayed is a unit price Price Header N if N gt 1 Price Header N if N gt 1 If selected the fixed data will be printed in this format For example If items sell 3 for 2 00 choosing this option will allow the price to be printed as 3 2 00 55 Printed Documentation e Price Header N FOR if N gt 1 Price Header N FOR if N gt 1 If selected the fixed data will be printed in this format For example If items sell 3 for 2 00 choosing this option will allow the price to be printed as 3 FOR 2 00 Report Data To record the value of this field whenever the format is printed select Yes Otherwise Select No The data in this field will be stored each time the format is printed If no fields are specified with this option no format tracking data file will be created Add On Characters You may specify a character string of up to 10 characters to
210. d 275 Insert 9 12 38 39 48 67 69 73 76 99 112 116 118 121 128 215 275 INSTALLATION 394 Installing Code Page 850 394 Gemini Windows Printer Drivers 239 Printer 262 Windows 247 Windows Printer 247 Installing 239 247 262 394 Instructs 320 Intercharacter Space 218 Interleaved respect 344 Interleaved 333 344 Interleaved 2 5 355 Interline Spacing 4s 128 Intermec 31 206 320 358 Intermec 4100 206 Intermec 4400 If 206 Intermec Cables 205 Intermec Corporation 358 Intermec Notes 206 Intermec Setup 204 Internal Time Stamp 225 International 385 International Article Numbering Association 341 342 International Characters 10 17 200 232 248 International Data Matrix 360 International Settings changing 385 International Settings 385 Internet Explorer 12 Index Interpretations 4s 128 218 355 369 Invalid 260 Invalid Character 381 Invalid Command Line Option 381 Invalid Configuration File 381 Invalid Field Length 381 Invalid Operand In Clause 381 IP 161 168 177 182 187 194 204 210 216 221 234 241 250 263 IP Address 263 IP Printing 3 263 IP Address Printer Name 263 ISO 646 333 362 369 372 ISO 8601 15 ISO 8859 1 353 355 369 ISO Week 15 ISO IEC 8859 1 333 ISS Aztec Code 355 ITEMNUM as 128 ITEMNUM LIKE A_5 as 128 ITF 336 IV 201 248 275 279 391 IV file 275 IXL 391 Jan Mmm as 128 433 Printed Documentation Use mmm as 128 Jan 4s 128
211. d Architecture computers If serial port interrupts are not known do not select concurrent access This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing RS 485 Select RS 485 if using an RS 485 protocol otherwise leave blank The optional RS 232 to RS 485 adapter allows for up to 26 Apollo printers to be connected to the port Accessing individual printers is accomplished by assigning each connected printer its own network address from the printer s front panel Each printer is then configured to match this address At print time simply choose which printer in the print screen to send the job to Printer Address Used when the RS485 option is set to Yes Enter the sequential number or network ID of the printer from 1 to 26 within the list of printers on this port Baud Rate Indicate the baud rate used Baud rates may vary on different printers Direct Print Select direct print to send data directly to the port For a shared or network printer be sure direct print is not selected This option appears for those printers that can be configured for parallel printing This option only appears when using Windows 95 98 or ME Cutter Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability While designing the format if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you may choose Do not cut Cut after each Format Cut after each Batch Cut after each Job 169 Printed
212. d above the data entry area for the field Prompt Repeats Select to enable the printer to prompt for this field on every label This only applies when downloading to a memory card in the printer and when the printer prompts for the label quantity Prompt Number The order in which you wish the prompt to appear on the operator input screen This option will appear if there is more than 1 prompted field defined for the format Data Checking An indication of the type of validation to be done on operator entry for a When Printed field The types of Data Checking include eNo Validation eNumeric eAlphabetic eAlphanumeric eUpper Case Characters eUpper Case Alphabetic eUpper Case Alphanumeric eFixed List of Values Maximum Field Length If you define the field as When Printed you must supply the maximum length of the field in character positions Allow Blanks An indication of the allowable INCOMPLETE operator input for a When Printed field The choices are as follows eFully or Partially Blank ePartially Blank eFully Blank eNo Blanks Allowed Selection List Enter a list of values which the operator can choose from The values that you type in will appear as choices on the Print screen Each value must be separated 125 Printed Documentation by a space Short phrases must be enclosed in double quotes To advance to a new line press CTRL ENTER For example choices are RED GREEN BLUE To display this selectio
213. d as follows CAUTION Make certain to power off the CAS 41A and disconnect the power cable before attempting to remove the instrument cover 1 Remove the four screws that secure the CAS 41A s plastic cover to the chassis Remove the cover from the chassis 2 Locate the jumpers on the CAS 41A circuit J1 Port 1 board As you face the instrument back J2 Port 2 panel the jumpers are located in the lower left hand corner of the circuit board Move the J3 Port 3 jumpers as shown to monitor pin4 3 Replace the plastic cover on the CAS 41A chassis Reinstall the four screws that secure the cover to the chassis Reconnect the power cable and switch the power on J4 Port 4 Western Telematic Switchbox 81c Dip Switches The CAS 81C 8 way Switch Box is equipped with a set of 8 position or 10 position Dip Switches as follows NOTE When purchasing the CAS 81c 8 way switchbox it must be equipped with firmware version 1 0a Western Telematic Switchbox 161a Dip Switches 192 Printing Western Telematic Switch Box Printer Assignments If a third CAS 41 Code Activated Switch is connected to the PC above printer assignments would be 9 through 12 The same would be true for the CAS 161A where the first switch box would go to Printers 1 through 16 the second switch box would go to Printers 17 through 32 and if a third switch box is connected it would go to Printers 33 through 48 Western Telematic Switchbox 41 4
214. d busy Sending a graphic to printer printer busy e nvalid device Invalid device attached or specified ePaper out Printer is out of paper e Picture error Error reading picture file Printing e Port unavailable The specified port is unavailable e Printer paused Pause on the printer e Printing Current job or batch is printing e Printing Busy Current job or batch is printing and is unable to accept additional information or is OFF LINE e Ribbon out Printer is out of ribbon e There are no jobs in queue No jobs are in the Print Queue e Unable to open Unable to open a specified file e Waiting Job will print as soon as assigned printer is available Total The total number of identical formats in each batch To Do The total number of formats left to be completed Other Messages e Cannot Move a Job that is Printing eCannot Edit a Job that is Printing eCannot Freeze a Job that is Printing eThe Format Request List is Full Cannot Add this Job Probable Cause Print Queue is full or 220 jobs in Queue allow jobs to run and add job later ePicture Error Cannot read picture or picture too large Probable Cause The specified picture file cannot be found or the size of the picture is too large eQueue Error Error loading job in queue Probable Cause A JOB file cannot be found while restoring the Print Queue Advanced Printing 261 Printed Documentation Multi Port Serial Printing When configuri
215. d by command files and the ActiveX interface Printer Description The Printer Description parameter is optional You may enter a description that further identifies the printer for the user The location of the printer Shipping and Receiving and size type of media loaded 4 inch X 6 inch paper media are examples of what can be stored here Printer Manufacturer Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided Printer Model Select the model of printer to be used Type of Port Select the type of port the device is attached to The options are Serial Parallel USB Network Windows or IP Some of these options may or may not be available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected Port 177 Printed Documentation Select the port to which the printer is attached Baud Rate Indicate the baud rate used Baud rates may vary on different printers Concurrent Access Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture computers If serial port interrupts are not known do not select concurrent access This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing Use Hardware Handshake Select Yes to use a hardware handshake Select No to use an XON XOFF handshake Direct Print Select direct print to send data directly to the port For a shared or network printer be sure
216. d can be supported by both laser and imaging based scanning equipment By using a linear component as a finder pattern for the 2D composite component scanning performance can be enhanced An EAN UCC Composite symbol consists of a linear component encoding the item s primary identification associated with an adjacent 2D Composite Component encoding supplementary data such as a batch number or expiration date The Composite symbol always includes a linear component so that the primary identification is readable by all scanning technologies and so that 2D imagers can use the linear component as a finder pattern for the adjacent 2D Composite Component The Composite symbol always includes a multi row 2D Composite Component for compatibility with linear and area CCD scanners and with linear and rastering laser scanners GS1 DataBar Formally known as RSS Reduced Space Symbology GS1 DataBar GS1 DataBar Truncated GS1 DataBar Stacked GS1 DataBar Limited GS1 DataBar Expanded GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked 0 GS1 DataBar Description Formally known as RSS 14 There are 17 characters in a GS7 DataBar that make up the linear barcode but only 13 are entered data There is a mandatory Application Identifier of 01 that is not part of the entered data The first character after the Application Identifier is the linkage flag The linkage flag determines whether there is a Composite 2D barcode associated with the linear barcode The link
217. d hold the mouse button or press ENTER when done You can now use the mouse button to move to the opposite corner of the area for the line or you can use the arrow keys A solid rectangle will display the area as you use the arrow keys to expand or contract the area When you have expanded the rectangle to the proper size release the mouse button or press ENTER The completed line will be added to the format and shown on the format display For printers that support shaded lines you will be presented with the Create Line Field Specification screen Each of the specification screen items are described below Field Name A name to associate with the field Can be up to 32 characters long The name is necessary if you will be recording the value of this field in a format tracking report copying data from this field into another field using this field s data in a Linked Field or filling this field using the Command File facility Comment Enter a comment for this field Horizontal Position 119 Printed Documentation Enter the horizontal position of the field Vertical Position Enter the vertical position of the field Enable Printing Select Yes to print the field on the format Select No to display the field on the format but do not print the field Select Conditional to specify a print criterion for the field Orientation Angle Enter the Angle in degrees and tenths of degrees Line Thickness If you would like to adjust t
218. d submit print job immediately when variable data is entered or changed Save Data Select Yes to have the last previously entered variable data for when printed fields to be remembered for the next printing session Duplicate Serial Number Select Yes to allow multiple labels to be printed with the same serial number Select No to prevent printing duplicate serial numbers Printed Documentation Index Case Sensitive Database Searches Select Yes to make internal database index searches case sensitive the same lower and upper case character are not equal Select No to make index searches case insensitive the same lower and upper case characters are considered equal All or Marked Records Sets the default database selection in the print request screen when printing a group of records Select All Records to print all the records in the database Select Marked Records to print a series of previously chosen records ISO Week of the Year Select Yes to calculate the week of the year according to the ISO 8601 standard Show Field List Select Yes to always show a list of available field names on the screen during label design User Sign on Required Select Yes to require user identification and password to be entered when the program is started Auto size input field Selecting this option will automatically resize input boxes as text is entered This applies to When Printed fields at print time Computer type Choose IBM for
219. database dBASE Ill II or IV compatible or an ASCII database using the ASCII database attributes EPS An Encapsulated Postscript graphic file FMT File extension used to for label formats IXL Contains a list of index files matched to a database File LOG A User log file MDB A database file created with the Microsoft Jet Database engine NDX 7 possible per database name file could be created after database is established PCC A picture graphic file PCX A picture graphic file 391 Printed Documentation RPT A report file added during format printing dBASE III compatible SER A serial file The file is rewritten at the time of format printing with the next logical value when used with increment or decrement It prevents duplicate or missing serial numbers TIFF A picture graphic file WMF A Windows MetaFile graphic Files included in the Software AXEVENT LOG A File created by the Software to help troubleshoot Active X problems AXPRINT DLL The Software s Active X server AXPRINT TLB The Software s Active X Type Library BCGCB61 DLL Toolbar Control for DATABASEVIEW DATABASEVIEW EXE The Software s Database Editor DATAMTRX DLL A library that contains routines used to print a Datamatrix bar code EASY EXE The main Program File EASYUNINST DLL Used when the Software is uninstalled to un register the Active X ELABELINFO OCX The ELABELINFO Active X object
220. database is not password protected you can skip to the next step If the database is password protected in section number 2 there is a place to enter a user id and password fill in this section if your database has multiple users and passwords Appendices 4 5 Click the test connection button You should be presented with a message box stating that the test connection has succeeded If the connection failed you will need to double check the values you entered If you need help with establishing a connection you can click on the Help button in the Data Link Properties dialog box This will display additional information from Microsoft on using the dialog box and defining connection information for each OLE DB provider Click OK to return to the Software and enter the rest of the prompts for the field Sample Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers connection 1 2 On the provider tab select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers as your provider and then click the Next button You are then presented with the connection tab You can select a Use Data Source name and then select the ODBC data source name DSN you want to access from the list You can add more sources through the ODBC Data Source Administrator Refresh the list by clicking Refresh Choose enter or browse to the name of the database you want to connect to b Use Connection String this option allows you to type or build an ODBC connection str
221. decremented field only the trailing ten numeric characters will be changed Creating a Serial File To add a new serial file click on the New icon from the tool bar or choose File New Serial File from the menu bar When the dialog box appears click on Save as Type choose Serial Files ser and enter a filename click OK You will be presented with the Create Serial Number File Screen From here you need to specify the serial number Enter the starting value of the serial number The value can be from 1 to 20 characters in length Recent Serial Files Choose File Recent Serial Files from the menu bar to display a list of recently created edited Serial Files which can then be opened Viewing Changing a Serial File To view or change an existing serial file click the Open icon or select File Open from the menu bar then select Serial File ser from the list of file types Finally select the existing ser file and click Open Erasing a Serial File 309 Printed Documentation You will be prompted to confirm that you want to erase the serial file Click OK to erase the file or Cancel to not erase it 310 Reports Creating a Report The values for a text or barcode field can be recorded to a Format Tracking Report by choosing the Report Data function from the field parameters dialog box The data in this field will be stored each time the format is printed thereby creating a report rpt file If no fields are
222. dge is installed select the option corresponding to the memory module that is inserted into the top cartridge slot A memory module is required in the Prodigy and Prodigy Plus printers to store picture information and TrueType fonts If the memory module is not present the printer will still work but any graphic that is downloaded will not be printed Cutter Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability While designing the format if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you may choose Do not cut Cut after each Format e Cut after each Batch e Cut after each Job Darkness Adjustment Enter a number from 3 to 3 to adjust the base level of print darkness Negative numbers make the print lighter Offset Adjustment Enter a number from 99 to 999 to adjust the form edge offset This allows you to compensate for slight mechanical differences between printers This may also be accomplished with settings on the printer s front panel Initial Label Feed Allow blank label feed before printing first job or suppress label feed Allowing an initial label feed will align the print head to the leading edge of die cut label stock BACK to TOP 196 Printing Fargo Cables Western Telematic Switchbox 41 Dip Switches Western Telematic Western Telematic Western Telematic Switchbox 41a Dip Switchbox 81c Dip Switchbox 161a Dip Switches Switches Switches Western Telematic Ovatio
223. direct print is not selected This option appears for those printers that can be configured for parallel printing This option only appears when using Windows 95 98 or ME Device Attached Enter the type of device that is attached to the port The choices are Printer Western Telematic 4 way Switch 8 way Switch or 16 way Switch Printer Address When configuring a printer that is attached to a Western Telematic Switch Box enter the number on the switch box that the printer is connected to Printer Memory Select the corresponding memory option if a memory card or cartridge has been installed in the printer Cutter Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability While designing the format if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you may choose 178 Printing e Donotcut e Cut after each Format e Cut after each Batch e Cut after each Job Set Printer Clock Select Yes to set the printer clock to match the computer clock Select No to NOT set the printer clock to match the computer clock Darkness Adjustment Enter a number from 3 to 3 to adjust the base level of print darkness Negative numbers make the print lighter Offset Adjustment Enter a number from 99 to 999 to adjust the form edge offset This allows you to compensate for slight mechanical differences between printers This may also be accomplished with settings on the printer s front panel Initial Label
224. displayed by double clicking the field name Zoom Zoom Out Select the magnifying glass icon from the tool bar The pointer will change to a magnifying glass and will Zoom Out by clicking the Right mouse button To exit zoom mode click the pointer icon in the toolbar The Zoom Out function can also be selected by choosing View Zoom Out from the menu bar The zoom function will allow you to magnify or minimize a section of the format or on smaller labels the entire format Zoom Level You can choose a specific desired Zoom Level to maximize or minimize a section or entire format Choosing a lower percentage causes the format to Zoom Out or minimize Choosing a higher percentage causes the format to Zoom In or maximize The Zoom Level can be changed by selecting View Zoom Level from the menu bar right mouse clicking anywhere on the format background and selecting the desired zoom level from the menu or selecting the desired Zoom Level from the Zoom Level text box on the tool bar The zoom level will also be saved within the format Zoom In Select the magnifying glass icon from the tool bar The pointer will change to a magnifying glass and will Zoom In by clicking the Left mouse button To exit zoom mode click the pointer icon in the toolbar The Zoom In function can also be selected by choosing View Zoom In from the menu bar The zoom function will allow you to magnify or minimize a section of the format or on smaller
225. e Ready Busy Sato 8400 printer family It is recommended that the Receive Buffer Size on the front panel of the printer be set to 1 ltem Buffer When the printer is set to 1 ltem Buffer the printer will process one print job at a time and will remain busy until completion of that job The above configuration sets the printer for 19200 baud Turn Dip Switch 3 3 Pitch Sensor ON if you are using continuous media On the Sato 8480s turn Dip Switch 3 5 Print Start Signal ON if you are not using an applicator Refer to the SATO CL608 or the SATO 8480s printer manual for more information on Dip Switch settings Setup for Sato CL612 Serial RS 232 Communication settings are e Baud 9600 bps 229 Printed Documentation Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Handshake Ready Busy The above configuration sets the printer for 9600 baud 8 data bits no parity and 1 stop bit Turn Dip Switch 3 3 Pitch Sensor on if you are using continuous media Refer to the SATO CL612 printer manual for more information on Dip Switch settings Setup for Sato CL408 and CL412 The above configuration sets the printer for 9600 baud 8 data bits no parity and 1 stop bit Turn Dip Switch 3 3 Pitch Sensor on if you are using continuous media Refer to the SATO CL408 or the SATO CL412 printer manual for more information on Dip Switch settings Parallel Printing For Parallel printing there are no special configuration settings needed The
226. e BLANK Include Fields Indicate which fields are to be included in the report by choosing from the list shown Fields are printed in the sequence that they were chosen BACK to TOP Compressing the Database 285 Printed Documentation The Compress function will rewrite the database taking out all records marked for deletion Also any index files associated with this database will be completely rewritten to reflect the changes Sorting the Database You will be presented with the following items Sort Key An index expression to be used as the sort key This can be a field name or an expression involving several fields Available field names will be displayed in the Dialog Box If an index file has been created for the database the index value expression will be displayed as well Sort Sequence Indicate which order the database is to be sorted The sort order can be Ascending or Descending order Writing Database Records to a Text File This option converts all records in the current database to standard text records The resulting file can then be used as input to another program edited sent across communication lines etc When selected you will be prompted to enter the name of the file to be written Choose the path and filename The resulting file will contain one fixed length line for each database record Each line will be terminated by a carriage return line feed sequence Within the record each field
227. e label stock returns back to printing position after a presented label is removed Select the desired Backfeed Speed from the list Depending on the specific printer in use values may range from 2 50mm per second up to 7 9 200mm per second If DEFAULT is selected the command is not sent Select DEFAULT if the printer s firmware does not support it Selecting Backfeed Speed on a printer that does not support it may cause a protocol error Memory Card Download Use this feature if the label format will be downloaded to a memory card using an Apollo printer It will suppress features that are not available on the memory card Label Offset The starting print position of the label Negative numbers move the start position down the label and positive numbers move the start position up the label Bar Space Adjustment Adjusts the bars and spaces in a bar code Used for Windows printer drivers only Under most printing conditions if you are using a laser printer an ink jet or a dot matrix printer a Bar Space Adjustment selection of 2 0 prints the bar codes within specification If ink or toner spreading causes bars to print too wide INCREASE this number until you have achieved an acceptable bar code If you are using a Thermal Thermal Transfer bar code label printer a Bar Space Adjustment selection of 1 0 should be used Resolution Specifies the dots per inch dpi that will be used Some printers allow for example 300 600 or 1200 dpi
228. e print request screen and the queue s printer list It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX interface Printer Description The Printer Description parameter is optional You may enter a description that further identifies the printer for the user The location of the printer Shipping and Receiving and size type of media loaded 4 inch X 6 inch paper media are examples of what can be stored here Printer Manufacturer Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided Printer Model Select the printer model to be used Type of Port Select the type of port the device is attached to The options are Serial Parallel USB Network Windows or IP Some of these options may or may not be available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected Port Select the port to which the printer is attached Concurrent Address Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture computers If serial port interrupts are not known do not select concurrent access This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing Baud Rate Indicate the baud rate used Baud rates may vary on different printers Cutter 235 Printed Documentation Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability While designing the format if a cutter is indicated as being inst
229. e symbol would be 3 inches by 53 inches A 15 digit printed circuit board serial number Code 49 symbol would be only 1 inches by 3 inches Specifications Character Set All 128 ASCII characters 3 function characters 3 shift characters Symbol Length 70 modules excluding Quiet Zone Symbol Height 359 Printed Documentation 2 to 8 rows Maximum Message Length 49 alphanumeric characters or 81 digits Check Characters 1 per row plus 4 or 6 per symbol Net Data Density Maximum of 93 3 alphanumeric characters per inch or 154 3 numeric digits per inch when printed using a 7 5 mil X dimension Other Features Concatenation ability Rows may be scanned in any order DataMatrix History and Overview The public domain code DataMatrix was developed by International Data Matrix now CiMatrix DataMatrix is a variable size 2D matrix symbology containing dark and light square data modules It has a finder pattern of two solid lines and two alternating dark and light lines on the perimeter of the symbol for symbol identification orientation and cell location DataMatrix is designed with a fixed level of error correction capability lt supports industry standard escape sequences to define international code pages and special encodation schemes DataMatrix is used for small item marking applications using a wide variety of printing and marking technologies The symbol can contain from 1 to 2000 characters of information It is also s
230. e used regardless if the printer has an internal clock or not If the printer has a clock and supports date offsets then the commands are sent to use the printer clock If date offsets are not supported by the printer or the printer does not have a clock then the field will be sent as fixed data Year Offset Enter the offset for the year If this is set to something other than 0 that value is added to the current year To print the current year leave this value set to 0 Month Offset Enter the offset for the month If this is set to something other than 0 that value is added to the current month To print the current month leave this value set to 0 Day Offset Enter the offset for the day If this is set to something other than 0 that value is added to the current day To print the current day leave this value set to 0 Time The current system time is used to fill the field The time field will be filled in when formats are selected for printing Time Format These options appear if a Time Stamp is selected Enter a custom format string using any of the following characters to represent the time HH is to designate the hours MM is to designate the minutes SS is to designate the seconds AA is to designate AM or PM To suppress a leading zero for the Hour enter one H 152 Insert Time Offset The following three time offsets can be used regardless if the printer has an internal clock or not If the printer h
231. eave this entry BLANK to use the default screen and field width representation or enter a string of characters which more closely represents typical printed data to help with label design BACK to TOP Box Field Adding a Box Field Horizontal Adding a Box Field Name Comment Position di hag Horizontal Vertical Position Enable Printing Field Width Thickness ve rtical Shape Fill Pattern Number of Sides Thickness Gray Level Polygons Outlined Field Height Adding a Box The following message will appear 112 Insert Press and hold the mouse button or press ENTER when done You should now move the pointer to the proper position on the format You may actually move to either the upper left corner or any of the other 3 corners of the area to be occupied by the box When the pointer is properly positioned press ENTER You may now move to the opposite corner of the area for the box A rectangle will display the area as you use the mouse button or the arrow keys to expand or contract the area When you have expanded the rectangle to the proper size release the mouse button or press ENTER Now you will be prompted to expand the box s borders to the proper thickness The following message will appear ADJUST SIDES TO PROPER THICKNESS Drag with the mouse and release button when done or use the arrow keys and press ENTER when done The left arrow will decrease vertical sides and the up arrow key will decrease
232. ecial effect style For example to highlight a word to be underlined you can use the exclamation point as the toggle character After the toggle character is defined the exclamation point character can be placed before and after the word or phrase that you want underlined The special effect toggle character can also be embedded in an external file or a database memo field For When Printed paragraph fields the toggle character can be used when entering data on the prompt line Center Justify This option will cause the character string to be centered within the defined print area That is if the contents of the field contain less characters than the maximum the characters will be moved so they are centered in the field s area Other options available are Right Justify Left Justify and Full Justify Full Justify will adjust the spacing between words so that text aligns with both the left and right margins Options may vary based on the printer used Increment Decrement Field The following options are available e Increment e Decrement e Constant Increment Decrement Sequence 61 Printed Documentation The custom incrementation option allows you to define a specific sequence of characters to increment or decrement Valid characters are the digits 0 9 and the letters A Z See Examples Type of Increment The type of incrementation to be done on the field Either Numeric Alphabetic Alphanumeric Hexadecimal
233. ecord is kept of what fonts have been sent to the printer If for any reason the printer is turned off during the course of a day s work you should exit the program and then restart the program by double clicking on the icon Compatible Printer We have found many compatible laser printers to be less than 100 compatible with the LaserJet Series II It is recommended that you use an HP printer or that you test the printer thoroughly before you make a purchase LaserJet Plus emulation is not enough It must be LaserJet Series Il compatible or higher Printable Area There is a dead space of unprintable area of approximately 1 4 around the perimeter of the page The margin command starts from this point and not the upper left corner of the paper Printable Characters Overall character height including lower case descenders must be taken into account when deciding what can print on a page Therefore the maximum character height that could print on an 11 form with a print area height of 10 59 is 7 99 Paper Size 202 Printing Paper width can be defined to be as large as 19 68 A legal size paper tray is needed to print 8 x 14 formats The printer must also be set to Paper Legal Bar Width Multipliers This function allows you to establish the density of your bar code Everything revolves around the dot size that the laser printer can print The printable dot size is 3 3 Mils Field Direction If you are printin
234. ect YES to use anonymous FTP login Select NO to use a user name and password for the FTP login FTP User Name After selecting NO for Anonymous FTP enter the user name to be used for FTP printing Your network administrator should be able to provide this information FTP Password After selecting NO for Anonymous FTP and entering the FTP User Name enter the password for the user selected for FTP printing Your network administrator should be able to provide this information FTP LPR Queue Name Enter the printer s queue name for FTP LPR printing Your network administrator should be able to provide this information Time Out Enter the number of seconds to wait while attempting to connect to the printer before reporting a connection error 263 Printed Documentation Printing Print Batch of Formats Printing a Batch of Formats Printing a Batch Duplex Print Alternate Printer Number of r Starting Record Ending Record Hold Job Description o y Printing a Batch You will be prompted to enter the name of the format to be printed You may type the name of your format in at this time An alphabetized directory will be displayed across the screen of the label formats in the default directory If there are more formats than can be shown you may use the PgDn key to move to the next screen Click on a file name with the left mouse button to select a format to print If you wish to print out an entire database
235. ect All Records 15 Select ANSI 17 Index Select Bidirectional 221 Select Bi directional 225 Select Concurrent Access 208 216 Select Conditional 4s 128 Select Cutter Installed 161 168 177 182 187 194 204 208 210 221 234 241 250 Select Database System 330 Select Demo 15 Select Direct Print 204 216 Select Disable Reprint 171 Select Full 15 Select Marked Records 15 Select Memory Card Download 171 Select No NONE 264 Thermal Transfer 28 Select No 15 17 19 28 31 33 39 48 99 109 126 128 148 264 284 311 Select OEM 17 Select Print ID Label 250 Select Printer 284 Select RS 485 168 Select S 200 Select Source Data 330 Select Source 330 Select Standard Code Sizes 168 Select Table Name 330 Selectable Error Correction 353 355 367 369 451 Printed Documentation Selected Fields 311 Selected Fields list 311 Selecting Multiple Fields so Selection List as 107 124 128 146 Sell 385 Sell By calculate 385 Sell By 153 385 Sell By Date 385 Sending 260 Sequence as 128 355 369 Ser 82 85 309 391 Ser file 309 Serial 161 168 177 182 187 194 204 210 215 216 221 234 241 250 Serial File Creating 309 Erasing 309 path name 109 151 Viewing Changing 309 Serial File 95 109 151 275 309 Serial File Functions 309 Serial File Name 109 151 Serial Number 347 Serial Port 215 260 Serial RS 232 Communication 225 Serial Shipping Container Code 347 Serialized 39 99
236. ed Printer Model Select the printer model to be used Type of Port Select the type of port the device is attached to The options are Serial Parallel USB Network Windows or IP Some of these options may or may not be available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected Port 208 Printing Enter the port to which the printer is attached Concurrent Access Select Concurrent Access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture computers If serial port interrupts are not known deselect Concurrent Access This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing Handshake Select Yes to use a hardware handshake Select No to use an XON XOFF handshake Baud Rate Indicate the baud rate used Baud rates may vary on different printers Direct Print Select Direct Print to send data directly to the port For a shared or network printer be sure direct print is not selected This option appears for those printers that can be configured for parallel printing This option only appears when using Windows 95 98 or ME Cutter Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability While designing the format if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you may choose e Donotcut e Cut after each Format e Cut after each Batch e Cut after each Job Calendar Option
237. ed information In this case the database will be searched for the desired record All fields that use this information will be filled with the proper data When the format has been completed the format should be saved The Save function stores the format When invoked the software also has the ability to store a record of each set of formats printed along with the date and time it was printed and any data on the format This data is stored in a report RPT file BACK to TOP Moving on the Format To move the pointer you can click on the field holding down the left mouse button and drag the field to the desired position or you can use the arrow keys or the HOME and END keys Each arrow key moves the pointer in the direction indicated by the arrow printed on the key Each keystroke represents a movement of 01 inches or 1mm To make larger movements hold the SHIFT key down while using the arrow keys This will cause each keystroke to move the pointer 10 inches or 1 0mm The coordinates of the pointer are shown on the lower right side of the format display screen The horizontal or X coordinate shows the distance from the left edge of the format print area The vertical or Y coordinate shows the distance from the top edge of the format print area Maximum Fields on a Format The maximum number of fields per format is usually more than 100 or the number of characters allowed in your printer s buffer whichever comes first This numbe
238. ed number of formats When Command File Monitoring is enabled the software will watch for a change in a specified Command File every quarter second A Command File will start up the program either as a minimized icon or as fully maximized If you would like the software to start as a minimized icon you will need to configure the program properties to Run Minimized To configure the program this way follow these steps Highlight the program icon and right click on it Choose Properties from the menu Click on the Shortcut tab Click on the drop down menu next to Run Choose Run Minimized and click OK If the software starts minimized you can view the Print Queue by clicking on the minimized icon Then choose the F2 key from your keyboard If the software starts maximized you can work within the program however Command File monitoring mode is halted until the software is minimized The monitor mode is also disabled if you minimize the software while working on a format or working in a database When in monitoring mode the caption on the Windows Task Bar shows the mode it is in For example if in Command File Monitoring mode the caption will be Command Monitoring If minimized while editing a format the caption will be Edit Format formatname Drag and Drop The drag and drop feature supported by Windows is also supported for running Command Files You can process a command file by dragging the Command File icon to the Software s ic
239. eld 4s 128 Reverse Field Adjustments 128 Reverse Image 31 Ribbon Out 241 Ribbon Saver 28 Right clicking 97 Left 218 Right 10 97 218 Right Align 158 Right arrow Show 281 Right Justify 4s 128 Right Mouse Button 10 RJS 31 218 391 RJS Cables 218 RJS Notes 218 RJS QualaBar 440 218 RJS Qualibar 440 216 RJS Setup 216 RJS ThermaBar 260 218 RocketPorts 262 ROM 221 Rotatable 218 Rotating Label 83 Rotating 83 Rounded Rectangle 69 112 Row Size 39 99 Rows 358 366 Rpl file 31 RPS bar az 128 RPS Bar Code Specifications 4s 128 RPS Interpretation 4s 128 Rpt 36 82 85 86 311 391 RS 171 181 186 193 199 206 210 215 RS 485 168 Index RS 232 RS 485 168 RS 232 3 168 225 RS 232 Communications 181 186 193 199 206 218 RS 232 Communications Dip Switches 218 RS 232 Serial Communications 171 RS 485 RS 232 168 RS 485 168 171 RS 485 Serial Communications 171 RSS 372 RSS Expanded 362 372 RSS Expanded Stacked 372 RSS Limited 372 RSS 14 372 RSS 14 Stacked 372 RSS 14 symbology 372 RTS CTS 171 181 186 193 199 218 RTS CTS Standard 210 Run Software 14 Windows Terminal Server 14 Run 9 12 14 320 Run Minimized 320 RUNNING MULTIPLE VERSIONS OF LABELCOM 394 S S Instructs 320 S Model 221 449 Printed Documentation S Model Printer 221 Sample Message 394 SAP 3 31 Sato 231 391 Sato 8400 225 Sato 8400 6 225 S
240. eld Name 330 Enter Search Fields 330 Entering All 264 Angle 67 118 Change Format 388 Conditional 264 Format Name 27 Height 73 76 116 121 HORIZONTAL OFFSET 157 271 273 284 311 Horizontal Position 73 121 Horizontal Thickness 69 112 ID 320 IP Address 263 Marked 264 New Format Name 27 path name 17 pressing 15 Print Queue 173 Range 264 Raw Data Port Number 263 Report 284 311 Specification Data 78 Valid Field Length 381 425 Printed Documentation Vertical Position 73 121 Vertical Thickness 69 112 Width 73 76 116 121 Entering 15 17 67 69 73 76 78 112 116 118 121 157 173 263 264 271 273 284 311 320 381 388 Enterprise Resource Planning 3 EPS 3 73 121 391 EQUAL TO 264 Erase Mark 281 Erase 10 38 81 281 309 Erase ALL Records 287 Erase All Records icon 287 Erase All Tracking Data 311 315 Erase Field 82 90 94 279 Erase Field icon 279 Erase Format Tracking Data 311 314 Erase Index File 281 Erase Index File icon 281 Eraserecords dbase 320 Erasing ALL 287 ALL Tracking Data 315 Database 275 Database Field 279 Field 82 90 Format 38 Format Tracking Data 314 426 Index File 281 Serial File 309 Erasing 38 82 90 275 279 281 287 309 314 315 Erasing Records From Database 275 Erasing Records From 275 ERP 3 Error 260 261 381 Error Correction 369 Error Correction Characters 3
241. eld on the format will come from a database file You will be asked to specify the database file name and the name of the field containing the data or information to be used A maximum of three different databases may be accessed in one format For each database accessed the name of the search field and an operator prompt will be required You will only be required to supply a search field name and an operator prompt once for each new database used Before printing the format the operator will be prompted for the value of the search field to be found The software will search the database until a matching record is found The matching record will then be used to supply data to all fields which specify the same database For a paragraph field a database MEMO field can be used on the label by supplying the name of the MEMO field at the Data Field Name prompt When the format is printed the operator will be prompted for the value of the search field to be found The software will search the database until a matching record is found The matching record will be used to supply data to all fields that specify the same database There is a method by which you can print out all of the records within a given database Refer to the ALL Function and Tutorial in Appendix C for further information Database Connection Search Fields Search Field Operator Prompt Data Field Name Name Line Trim Trailing Maximum Field Typical Field Design Test
242. ens ane 79 Table Of Contents Choosing a Group of Fieldsin Ani aa aaa a aa ava a a it 81 Selecting a Field ON the Format Display A it 81 Choose Aliada ii 81 Moving a Field pirne saipa e A A Ad a 82 Erasing Ella ici A A A A Ad te 82 Changing an EXIStINg Era A E tE 82 Viewing Ghanging a Field x cia A A La E 83 Rotating a Leticia A A A A td 83 Resizing Fields titi A A A A alata ab deca 83 PM A ad 84 CUA A AS A A a A IIS a 84 E A O 84 Pai A A A A EON EEN 84 A OA 84 ONO 84 OPINO ui iii 84 Opening ARO la dsc ada 85 Recent Bateh FormatS aio 85 Recent Edited From aio i o 85 Recent Database Files i CAA Ea ENNE AE A seas Aar AAE EEA EAA EAEE EAE AAt 85 Recent Reports rnana a aAa etd e a a A EEE ERA SE EErEE anaes Ae Ear CAE AS 86 Recent Serial Fl sonia 86 SAVING ON 86 Saving a Formatsion eaa see Ea eens ashen eee entered age a EAA ara r E a acer Ate 86 NON 87 O AAN 89 A NOOO 89 CUA A A eee eit eve A ees 89 Table Of Contents COPY Aki Weeden leat hava eet A A a ae a ia dae Aa a in A ee aan 89 Paste a ened an deel 89 Ghoosing a Group Of Fieldsi sssi r Ona ey a el ee ae a ee a 89 CHOOSEAIL FICIAS a A daa 89 Erasing a ll iii A A A O A IO AN 90 MOVIDO a Elli oae E A A a as 90 Viewing Ghangingia Field iii A A eae A at Lane lathe 90 Vi A eee na dale O alld nena le ea a ea aad dare oa oa ela van tarda 93 Print QUEUGC a a 93 Log Read A NN NANA 93 Position A A a a Aa i 94 Map tO Gi A A a LA ate erie 94 DISPlay Oido T ta 94
243. ensity self checking continuous numeric symbology It gets the name Interleaved because two numeric digits are interleaved together with the bars representing one digit and the spaces representing a second digit It is one of the most popular symbologies used by the shipping and warehouse industries for identification The binary level barcode is suitable for printing on rough surfaced materials such as corrugated boxes or cardboard The Distribution Symbology Study Group has recommended 2 of 5 as the standard for numeric labeling of corrugated shipping containers It has been adopted by the Uniform Product Code Council as the standard symbology for outer shipping containers in the grocery industry It is also used in the medical and automotive fields Every Interleaved 2 of 5 character actually encodes two digits one in the bars and one in the spaces There are five bars two of which are wide and three of which are narrow Similarly there are five spaces in each character two of which are wide and three of which are narrow Each digit has its own unique 2 out of 5 arrangement Unfortunately a partial scan has a high probability of decoding as a valid but shorter Interleaved 2 of 5 symbol This is due to the simple nature of the start and stop patterns Because of this partial scan problem Interleaved 2 of 5 is best used in a fixed length application with all reading equipment programmed to 344 Bar Code Information accept messages
244. ent and clicking either the Move Up or Move Down buttons You can remove any of the segments by highlighting it and clicking the Remove button Literal Strings Existing Fields From this list you may add the data from any of the predefined text or bar code fields on the format as a data segment for this field You can also add a literal string enclosed in double quotes For example sample string To add the string or field value to the text field click the Include button Existing Data Segments This list shows all predefined Data Segments that are currently on the format that you may use as part of the text field If there are no Data Segments listed you can create one by clicking the Add button You may edit a Data Segment already on the format by clicking the Edit button You may also delete one from the format by clicking the Delete button 66 Designing Formats BACK to TOP Adding a Line Field Adding a Line a Horizontal Enable Printing Orientation Angle Line Thickness Line Length Fill Pattern Gray Level Adding a Line Field The line s width can be as large as the format width The line s height can be as large as the format height You can now use the mouse button to move the pointer to the proper position on the format or you can use the arrow keys Since a line is treated as though it is a rectangle you may actually move to either the upper left corner or any of the other three corners of
245. entifier where id is the user ID as defined in the Add Change or Delete Users screen This switch must be used with the P switch parameter P pass Allows you to specify a user password where pass is the user PASSWORD as defined in the Add Change or Delete Users screen for the User ID specified in the U switch parameter This switch must be used with the U switch parameter For example if User Signon is required and you want to run the software using the Command File c wineasy store cmd type the following from the C prompt win c wineasy easy store U John P printing Where John is the User ID and printing is John s password If starting the software from the command line you will need to enter the following win c wineasy easy commandfile U id P E can be used to delete a command file that is specified on the command line As an example the command line easy label cmd e would delete the file label cmd after it has been processed The E switch can be used in addition to the W or M switches to delete the monitored command file Command files that are processed by drag and drop onto the EASYLABEL window are NEVER deleted regardless of the E switch 329 Printed Documentation Command File Monitoring Mode The software can be placed in a command file monitoring mode The purpose of the command file mode will be to watch the hard disk for changes in a Command File and automatically print the specifi
246. erStatus 318 Dd mm yy 151 Decimal Places 34 153 275 394 403 Decodable 333 362 Decrementing 39 99 109 151 264 267 309 320 Default 173 394 Default Command 17 Default Icm 394 Define Name Path 157 271 273 New Database 275 Printer Configuration 247 Windows Printer 247 Define 157 247 271 273 275 Define Search Path 17 Defined Printers 259 Delete button 257 Delete File 173 Delete File button 173 Delete icon Select 84 422 Delete icon 82 84 90 Deleting ONLY 381 Printer 257 User 23 User icon 23 Deleting 23 84 257 381 Deleting Users 269 320 Demand Mode 28 Demo 14 381 Denso Japan 367 Denso 367 Descenders 4s 128 201 232 248 Descending 286 Description 27 260 Deselect want 267 Deselect 81 200 208 250 267 311 Deselect Bidirectional 221 Deselect Concurrent Access 208 216 Deselect Print ID Label 250 Deselect S Model 221 Deselect Standard Code Sizes 168 Design Test Value 4s 128 Destination 157 271 273 Details 173 Details button 173 Device Attached 221 241 Diagonal 67 69 76 112 116 118 Dialog Box 23 279 281 286 314 315 DigiBoards 262 Digit Day Month as 128 Year 4s 128 Digit Day 4s 128 Digit Extension 171 181 186 193 199 206 215 231 236 246 Digit Week Number s 128 Digit Year 4s 128 Dimension 335 336 338 339 344 Dip Switches 179 184 190 197 213 225 244 253 Direct Print 168 177 182 187 194 200 204 210 216 221 239
247. ers following will print If the data is Printed Documentation The characters following will print Non Numeric Data If there are any non numeric characters in the data the non numeric characters will automatically be ignored For example if the data is 01234B6 typing ZZZZZZ9 will suppress any leading zeroes however since there are non numeric characters the actual data that will print will be 12346 Text Color Choose a color for the text field For TrueType fonts you may click the Custom button to create a custom color for the text field Printer internal fonts will only allow a choice of 16 colors This option will only appear for the TEC 416 printer or color Windows printers Positions Per Line This function allows you to define the number of characters each line will have maximum of 300 character positions Interline Spacing This function allows you to define the distance between each line in inches and hundredths of inches Enter 0 for default spacing Reverse Field Adjustment This option is used to set the size of the reverse area surrounding the field Enter a value in hundredths of an inch to define the size of the reverse box that surrounds the text Letter Orientation 140 Insert Choose the orientation of the characters in relation to the direction of the text All letters in the field can be printed in a Normal or a Stacked orientation The Stacked orientation only appears if the cho
248. ers to work through the tutorial supplied with the software EasyTutor is available in English and German it can be downloaded to the PC by e Inserting the CD into your CD ROM drive Follow the on screen installation instructions e If Autorun is not enabled choose Start Run e Type d setup where d is your CD ROM drive click OK e Follow the on screen installation instructions In order to run EasyTutor the cd must be installed in your CD ROM drive Passwords Each User Identifier can be up to 16 characters long and passwords can be as many as 16 characters long To enter the software the correct User ID and Password must be entered If the correct password is not entered within several attempts the software will be terminated and you will be taken back to Windows For security purposes when entering a password a will be displayed for each character in the password Individual users have the ability to change their own passwords however only the program manager may view or change all user passwords Passwords can be assigned to each user who will be permitted access to the software Each user can also be granted permission to use any or all subfunctions Users and passwords are assigned by selecting Settings Users from the menu bar or by selecting the User icon on the Function Toolbar See Users for more information Printed Documentation Hot Keys Several keys have special meanings in the software A short descr
249. es and hundredths of inches Enter 0 for default spacing Reverse Field Adjustment This option is used to set the size of the reverse area surrounding the field Enter a value in hundredths of an inch to define the size of the reverse box that surrounds the text Letter Orientation Choose the orientation of the characters in relation to the direction of the text All letters in the field can be printed in a Normal or a Stacked orientation The Stacked orientation only appears if the chosen typeface is a TrueType font Character Spacing Enter the vertical distance between characters from the baseline of the first character to the baseline of the next character in inches Enter 0 for default spacing Character Formatting If you want to specially format parts of the text field select one or more alternate styles Enter blank for no special formatting of characters 60 Designing Formats The purpose of Character Formatting is to apply special effects to text within a paragraph Special effects include bold ta ic underline P P and subscript YOU have the ability to select a single special effect or multiple effects up to 4 For each special effect selected you are given an additional screen item prompt Special Effect Character Enter a toggle character for the special effect The toggle character will become a non printing character which can be used to bracket words or phrases that you want to appear in the sp
250. es and character positions This is the header record There may be up to 32 fields 80 characters per field There must be a blank line between the header record and first data record The first 6 characters are a field called Code This is the field that the format called STORE uses as a search field FMTCOUNT is a reserved word and allows you to control the number of labels printed for each record That is why you wound up with 60 labels even though there were only 30 records in the database This option would be used when multiple locations are used to shelve an item BARSUPP is another reserved word This will allow you to suppress the printing of all bar codes on a particular label This would be used to prevent attempted reordering of a discontinued item or attempted ordering of a vendor replenished item When using BARSUPP the absence of a character means print the code The presence of any character means suppress the code The last field called Junk is there strictly to work around a problem with many text editors that won t allow a line to end with a space and instead insert the carriage return line feed after the last printable character This field would not have been needed if we had Code as our last field since Code always has 6 printable characters The last bit of exploration that we will do is of a Command File To state it simply a Command File will allow you to do almost anything with an external file that you could do from
251. es are 0 None 1 XON XOFF 2 DTR 3 RTS For information on configuring your input device please refer to the User s Manual for your input device 396 Appendices Format Name Enter the name of the format to be printed Duplex Print Enter Y to duplicate the print job on a second printer or N to print on a single printer Printer Number Select the number of the printer to use Choose the Default printer to print the selected format on the printer it was designed for Select another printer from the list if you wish to print the selected format to a different printer Sample Message Please use the input device to send a sample message to the port now or if this is not possible enter a typical input message using the keyboard use hexadecimal representations for control characters For example the characters 1x0D should be entered to represent a carriage return If the Sample Message contains control characters such as carriage returns and line feeds those control characters are expected to be in each input message If the message ends in control characters then it can be variable in length Extract Data Insert one or more pairs of square brackets around the data to be extracted for printing Example if the Sample Message is ABC 1234567 The Extracted data could be ABC 1234567 If you have more than one field that needs to be filled in with data you can simply perform two inputs for the Sample Message and for the Extr
252. ete Refresh Record Add a Column to Table e Delete a Column from Table Edit Tool Bar The Edit Tool Bar provides the following functions e Select a Table Design View Form View Datasheet View Font Font Size Bold Italics Underline Navigate Tool Bar See Navigating a Database Table Back to Top Window The software gives you the ability to view multiple tables from different databases at the same time If you have multiple tables open within the software you are able to view those tables in different ways By selecting Window from the menu bar you will be presented with the following options Tile Displays all of the open tables in separate window panes Cascade Displays all of the open tables overlapping one another with only the title bars visible 306 Databaseview New Window Displays a duplicate window of the active table This is useful when you are editing to very large tables 307 Serial Files Serial File Functions The Serial File is used to supply data to a format field This feature is generally used in conjunction with the increment or decrement function After printing a set of formats using incremented or decremented fields the serial file is updated to contain the next logical value in the sequence This will prevent recurring or missing serial numbers A serial number can also be embedded in a database record A serial file may contain up to 20 characters As with an incremented or
253. etwork Windows from the Type of Port drop down box 4 Inthe Path text box enter the path to the shared printer or you can browse your network by selecting the Browse button 5 Click OK to finish BACK to TOP 262 Printing IP Printing From the Printer Configuration screen choose IP from the Type of Port drop down menu Enter the IP Address of the printer or print server in the IP Address Printer Name text box For example 192 168 1 2 IP Communications Select RAW to use RAW IP communication FTP to use FTP communication or LPR to use LPR IP communication The FTP or LPR printer protocols should be used if the selected server device does not support RAW mode very well or if the device only supports LPR or FTP printing When using LPR or FTP consult with your network administrator to determine the Queue Name and the FTP User Name Password that should be used Port Number When RAW is selected enter the Raw Data Port Number of the printer You may select from the list of the most common port numbers however you may enter one that is not in the list You should obtain this number from the documentation for the printer or print server that is being used You may also click on the Scan button to scan the IP address given for available ports You will then be notified that some Antivirus Software or Firewalls may regard this scanning for available ports as virus activity click OK to begin the scan Anonymous FTP Sel
254. f a day s work you should exit the program and then restart it Compatible Printers Many compatible laser printers were found to be less than 100 compatible with the LaserJet Series II It is recommended that you use an HP printer or that you test the printer thoroughly before you make a purchase LaserJet Plus emulation is not enough It must be LaserJet Series ll compatible or higher Printable Characters Overall character height including lower case descenders must be taken into account when deciding what can print on a page Therefore the maximum character height that could print on an 11 form with a print area height of 10 59 is 7 99 Any field that would be off the format due to the lower case characters is automatically moved up even if lower case is not used Paper Size Paper width can be defined to be as large as 19 68 A legal size paper tray is needed to print 8 Y x 14 formats The printer must also be set to Paper Legal Please refer to your HP LaserJet Printer Manual for more information on how to set this option Bar Width Multipliers This function allows you to establish the density of your bar code Everything revolves around the dot size that the laser printer can print The printable dot size is 3 3 Mils 249 Printed Documentation Example UPC printed in 100 magnification has a 13 Mil narrow bar To achieve this you would use a multiplier of 4 which would give you approximately 102 magnification
255. f the symbol is destroyed MaxiCode can be read by CCD camera or scanners 364 Bar Code Information Approximately 100 ASCII characters can be held in the 1 inch square symbol The symbol can still be read even when up to 25 percent of the symbol has been destroyed and can be read by CCD camera or scanner Specifications Character Set All 256 ASCII Characters Symbol Size 1 11 inch x 1 054 inch nominal including Quiet Zone Nominal Element Size 0 035 inch x 0 041 inch hexagon Maximum Data Capacity 93 characters Check Characters Two selectable levels of Reed Solomon error correction Data Sequence Printer specific See printer notes for more details Other Features Omni directionallly scannable and Concatenation capability Micro PDF417 MicroPDF417 is derived from PDF417 The code has a limited set of symbol sizes and a fixed level of error correction for each symbol size Module dimensions are user specified so that the symbol may be printed with a variety of printers The symbology allows up to 150 bytes 250 alphanumeric characters or 366 numeric digits to be stored This is done by specifying one of three compaction modes data text or numeric Text Compaction mode permits all printable ASCII characters to be encoded values 32 to 126 inclusive as well as 365 Printed Documentation selected control characters Byte Compaction mode permits all 256 possible 8 bit byte values to be encoded This includes all AS
256. field unchanged Background Color Select the background color for the text field This option will only appear for the TEC 416 printer or color Windows printers Data Checking Please indicate whether data type validation should be performed on operator input Choices are No Validation Numeric Alphabetic Alphanumeric Date M D Y Upper Case Characters Upper Case Alphabetic Upper Case Alphanumeric Fixed List of Values Selection List Enter a list of values which the operator can choose from The values that you type in will appear as choices on the Print screen Each value must be separated by a space Short phrases must be enclosed in double quotes To advance to a new line press CTRL ENTER For example choices are RED GREEN BLUE To display this selection list click on the down arrow next to the field input box on the data input screen within the Print screen Maximum Field Length Enter the maximum number of characters in the field Design Test Value 143 Printed Documentation This option allows users to specify either a narrower character width or the default character width of a text field by typing in a string of characters that more precisely represents the actual printed data For this option press TAB to leave this entry BLANK or type in a string of characters which represents a narrower character width for the field Leaving this entry blank designates that you want to use the default screen and field
257. field as it appears Maximum Field Length Enter the maximum number of characters to extract from a database field A value of 0 indicates that all characters should be used Typical Field Length Enter the typical field length of a database field This will allow fields to be displayed during label creation using this length Note that if more characters exist than that specified for the typical length all characters up to the maximum amount specified will be used A value of 0 indicates that there is no typical field length Prompt Number If the field s Source of Data is When Printed or Database the software provides the user with control over the order of data input prompts by allowing the user to specify edit the order in which prompts will appear on the screen This feature will allow flexibility in designing user input screens Design Test Value Leave this entry BLANK to use the default screen and field width representation or enter a string of characters which more closely represents typical printed data to help with label design BACK to TOP Text Field Adding a Text or Paragraph Field Adding a Text or i iS ls cal Height Typeface Width Magnification i Field 128 Insert Field Direction Source of Data Special Formatting Report Data iia bt mii Add on Characters Enable Printing Font Style u Reverse Text Color Position Per Line Interline Spacing Field Adjustment Special Letter Orientation C
258. fine the Name Path of the file to be created when Printer Data File or Text File is selected under Destination Font Setup Select No to use the default printer font Select Yes for the option to use a different font for this report Printer Setup Select No to use the current default printer options Select Yes to bring up the Windows Print Setup box This allows the user to select and configure which printer to send the format definition to Top Margin Enter the distance from the top of the paper to the beginning print position in inches or millimeters Left Margin Enter the HORIZONTAL OFFSET of the print image area from the left edge of the paper in inches or millimeters BACK to TOP Report Printing Print Reports 272 Printing When you define a format you can record the value of the bar code or text fields in a data file The report function allows you to output the accumulated data to your ink jet laser or dot matrix printer or to a file For more information on printing the Tracking Report see Printing the Format Tracking Report Print Format Definition Print Format Destination Output to File Font Setup Definitions Top Margin Left Margin Print Format Definitions Open the format that you want to print definitions for and choose Tools Print Format Definition from the menu bar Next you are presented with the printing options for printing format definitions Each of the Format Definition Print option item
259. format Complete all other information within the parameter screen and click OK Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more fields that use the external database as their Source of Data Scanning Bar Codes The screen will show the following lines Set up scanner and begin scanning Data read will appear below When finished click Quit or hit the ESC key 331 Bar Code Information Linear Linear Bar Code Maybe the oldest of the Automatic Identification and Data Capture AIDC technologies barcode can be looked upon as the best known and probably most successful to date of the technologies We are all familiar with the basic barcode on our box of cereal or the jar of honey that we buy in the supermarket This barcode is called UPC EAN and is but one variation of over 250 barcodes that have been designed over time Barcodes like this are referred to as linear barcodes as that are made up off a collection of bars and spaces side by side Fortunately many of these barcodes have never gained broad acceptance and we usually only consider 10 12 linear barcodes The most common examples in use today are UPC EAN Code 128 Code 39 Code 93 and Interleaved 2 of 5 Typical data content capacity varies from 8 to 30 characters with some barcodes restricted to numerals only and others using full alphanumeric information Linear barcodes are used in many applications where the use of a simple numeric or alphanumeric code can provide the key to a d
260. ftware you will need to install a special software enabling device called a Software Key A Software Key is supplied when you purchase the software To install the Software Key do the following 1 Remove any cable from a parallel printer port of your choice on the back of your PC If you have a USB Software Key you can skip this step 2 Plug the Software Key into the parallel printer port and secure with the attached screws Or if you have a USB Software Key do NOT plug in the key until you are prompted to do so by the installation software 3 If a printer is to be attached to the port plug the printer cable into the open end of the Software Key and secure with the attached screws 4 The Software Key Drivers are automatically and transparently installed during the normal software installation If you receive an error message stating that there was a problem installing the Software Key Drivers you must manually install them from the WIBU folder on the CD Multi User Key Installation For information regarding the installation and troubleshooting of the Multi User version and the Multi User Key please refer to the QuickStart Guide and Network Administrator s document on the software s CD Printed Documentation Running the Software To start double click on the program icon In order to have full print functions you must have the software protection key connected to the parallel port Without it you may be able to p
261. function This will align the Horizontal Center Lines of the selected objects Align Right To Right Align multiple fields on a format select the relevant fields and chose the Align Right function Space Horizontally To precisely space multiple fields horizontally on a format choose the relevant fields and select the Space Horizontally function Align Up Select align up to position fields to be parallel with the lowest field on the format Center Vertically 158 Tools Used to precisely align the Vertical Center Line of two or more fields on a format Choose the relevant fields and select the Center Vertically function This will align the Vertical Center Lines of the selected objects Align Down Select align down to position fields to be parallel with the lowest field on the format Space Vertically To precisely space multiple fields vertically on a format choose the relevant fields and select the Space Vertically function 159 Printing Printers Avery Dennison Avery Dennison Setup Printer Printer Use Hardware Concurrent Set Printer Kooos Cutter Calendar Option Darkness Printer Name The Printer Name parameter is optional You may specify a name to uniquely identify this printer This name will show up in the print request screen and the queue s printer list It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX interface Printer Description The Printer Description parameter is optional
262. g to an HP LaserJet Series II bar codes can be designed and printed in orientations 1 and 4 however bar codes in orientation 4 can not print the human readable interpretation Printing a Set of Formats You can use the software in a demand mode when you only need one replacement label at a time On the Print Request Screen you can specify the starting print position in which to begin printing formats on your sheet of labels This will allow you to remove labels one at a time from the sheet and re feed the sheet many times Print Queue If there is a database error when using ALL the associated report will have a zero in the number of labels printed TrueType Fonts TrueType fonts on the HP printers are supported on the Text Field definition screen BACK to TOP Intermec 203 Printed Documentation Intermec Setup Printer Name lied Pumar Printer Model pea Manufacturer Concurrent Initial Label Feed Printer Name The Printer Name parameter is optional You may specify a name to uniquely identify this printer This name will show up in the print request screen and the queue s printer list It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX interface Printer Description The Printer Description parameter is optional You may enter a description that further identifies the printer for the user The location of the printer Shipping and Receiving and size type of media loaded 4 inch X 6 inch paper media
263. h EAN 8 Human Readable EAN 13 all thirteen digits required EAN 8 eight digits required the Flag Character Numbering System Character and the Check Digit are implied Check Digit Required Modulus 10 calculation Encoded Information Flag Character Country Code Two to three digits Manufacturer Identification Number Four to five digits Product Identification Number Five digits Check Digit One digit Allowable Sizes Sizes for the EAN 13 are determined by a magnification factor which is based on the X dimension size These magnifications range from 80 to 200 of the normal size 1 46 inches in width 1 020 inches in height X dimension 13 mils FIM 343 Printed Documentation History and Overview FIM or Facing Identification Mark is a 9 position bar no bar pattern The FIM patterns are used by business mailers on preprinted mailing pieces for compatibility with various United States Postal Service automatic sorting systems There are four FIM patterns A B C D that can be printed FIM A is used on Courtesy Reply Mail with preprinted Postnet symbology in the address FIM B is used on Business Reply Penalty and Franked mail with no preprinted Postnet symbology FIM C is used on Business Reply Penalty and Franked mail with preprinted Postnet symbology FIM D is used for OCR readable mail with no Postnet symbology Interleaved 2 of 5 History and Overview Interleaved 2 of 5 is a high d
264. h to view and click OK BACK to TOP Create a New Table 296 Databaseview TableName Name Type Insert To Table To create a new table for an existing Database click the Create a New Table icon which is located on the Standard toolbar or select File New Table from the menu bar You will then be presented with the Create a New Table dialog box From here you need to define the structure of the database table The following options will allow you to define new fields for the Table Table Name Enter a name that will uniquely identify the contents of the table The following selections are available in the Column Definition portion of the Create a New Table dialog box In this section you will be prompted to define the structure of your database Name The name of the field may be up to 10 characters long The name must begin with a letter but may also contain numbers and the underscore character Embedded blanks are not permitted Type Valid field types are as follows e Binary Fixed length binary data with a maximum length of 8 000 bytes e Bit Integer data with either a 1 or 0 value e Byte A unit of storage capable of holding a single character e Char Fixed length non Unicode character data with length of n bytes n must be a value from 1 through 8 000 e Counter e Currency Monetary data values from 2 63 922 337 203 685 477 5808 through 297 Printed Documentation 298 2 63 1 922 3
265. haracter Spacing Character Formatting Effect Character i Increment Decrement Data Change Amount Background Color Update Database Design Test Value Script Maximum Field Length Field Fill ForceFit Font Point Size Increment Decrement Increment Decrement Maximum Minimum Adding a Text or Paragraph Field Horizontal Position Enter the horizontal position of the field Vertical Position Enter the vertical position of the field Field Name A name to associate with the field Can be up to 32 characters long The name is necessary if you will be recording the value of this field in a format tracking report copying data from this field into another field using this field s data in a Linked Field or filling this field using the Command File facility Comment Enter a comment for the field 129 Printed Documentation Typeface You will be presented with an on screen list of available character sets from which to choose the base character for your text field A thumbnail preview will be given for all TrueType fonts on the Text field parameters screen while editing this prompt If the source of data is fixed the data will be shown on the parameters screen in the True Type font selected For when printed fields the data will be shown in the True Type font selected at print time when it is entered Width Magnification This function is used to specify the width of the characters Height Magnification Thi
266. he Open icon or select File Open from the menu bar and then browse to the desired User Log file You can also choose from a list of recently viewed User Logs from the File menu Once opened you will be able to see a list of all of the events with the time date and user or manager involved Clicking on any of these events will display the details of the event below the list Printing a User Log To print click the currently opened User Log click the Print Icon or select File Print from the menu bar You may print the User Log to your ink jet laser or dot matrix printer Select File Print Preview from the menu bar for a preview of the User Log By Selecting File Print Setup from the menu bar you will be able to set up the printer you wish the User Log to Print to About Click the About Icon or select Help About Log Reader from the menu bar to find the version of Log Reader BACK to TOP Printed Documentation Position Grid Position Grid allows you to set the grid cell size for the exact placement of fields on a format Snap to Grid Choosing snap to grid will snap the selected field to an anchor point on the label format Using snap to grid allows fields to be placed and aligned more precisely on the label Display Grid must be activated prior to using Snap to Grid Display Grid Choosing display grid will populate the format with a series of evenly spaced points that make the precise placement of objects much ea
267. he Checksum 350 Bar Code Information The checksum is a Modulo 10 calculation 1 Add the values of the digits in positions 1 3 5 7 9 and 11 2 Multiply this result by 3 3 Add the values of the digits in positions 2 4 6 8 and 10 4 Sum the results of steps 2 and 3 5 The check digit is the smallest number which when added to the result in step 4 produces a multiple of 10 Checksum Example Example Assume the barcode data is 08137919805 1 0 1 7 1 8 5 22 2 22x3 66 3 8 3 9 9 0 29 4 66 29 95 5 95 X 100 next highest number of 10 therefore X 5 checksum UPC EO History and Overview UPC E is a variation of the UPC A symbol that is used for the number system 0 It has six explicitly encoded data digits and an implicitly encoded seventh digit check character It is suited for identifying products in small packages In addition to the requirement that the first digit of the barcode number system must be zero there are four rules that determine what UPC codes can be printed using the compressed UPC E format If the last 3 digits of the manufacturer s number are 000 100 or 200 the valid product code numbers are 00000 00999 1 000 numbers 351 Printed Documentation If the last 3 digits of the manufacturer s number are 300 400 500 600 700 800 or 900 the valid product code numbers are 00000 00099 100 numbers If the last 2 digits in the manufacturer s number are 10 20
268. he command file would be outputfile control txt eraserecords dbase The eraserecords dbase clause is of the form eraserecords dbase databasefile The purpose of the eraserecords dbase clause is to erase all records in a specific database file from within a command file The eraserecords dbase clause must end with a semicolon For example to erase all records from a part number database the eraserecords dbase clause in the command file would be eraserecords dbase parts dbf append dbase The append dbase clause is of the form append dbase databasefile inputfile txtfilename The purpose of the append dbase clause is to append a text file to an existing internal database file from within a command file The append dbase clause must end with a semicolon For example to append a part number text file that was downloaded from a host computer the append dbase clause would be append dbase parts dbf inputfile parts txt sort dbase The sort dbase clause is of the form sort dbase databasefile orderby fieldname 325 Printed Documentation The purpose of the sort dbase clause is to sort all records in a specific database file using a specified sorting order The sort dbase clause must end with a semicolon For example to sort a part number database by part number the sort dbase clause would be sort dbase parts dbf orderby partno cancel job and cancel useprinter The cancel clause has two forms
269. he menu bar Selecting a Field on the Format Display Several commands operate on a particular field Some of these commands are Move View Change Erase and Copy a field To specify which field the software prompts you to select the field by moving the pointer on the format display until the pointer touches the field that you want When any field is touched that field will begin to blink This confirms which field the pointer is touching Therefore when you are prompted to move the pointer to a field for any function move the pointer until the field you want is blinking Click the right mouse button or press ENTER You may also hold the left mouse button down while dragging a lasso around the desired fields to highlight them To quickly select all fields on the format choose Edit Choose All Fields from the menu bar You can individually select and deselect fields by holding the CTRL key on your keyboard and clicking the left mouse button Choose All Fields 81 Printed Documentation To select all fields on a format select Edit Choose All Fields from the menu or right mouse click anywhere on the format background and select Choose All Fields Moving a Field To move a field to a new location on the format left click once to highlight it then select the move field icon from the toolbar The selected field will now be outlined in a grey box You can now drag the field to its desired position using the mouse You may also u
270. he paragraph at the time of printing With the exception of TAB key usage the paragraph will be printed exactly as typed To force a new line break press CTRL ENTER simultaneously otherwise the text will automatically be arranged into lines when printed word wrap The following prompts will apply ads ial Prompt Repeats Prompt Number Data Checking ength Operator Prompt Line Define the prompt you wish to appear at the time of printing The prompt will be displayed above the data entry area for the field Prompt Repeats Select to enable the printer to prompt for this field on every label This only applies when downloading to a memory card in the printer and when the printer prompts for the label quantity Prompt Number The order in which you wish the prompt to appear on the operator input screen This option will appear if there is more than 1 prompted field defined for the format 107 Printed Documentation Data Checking An indication of the type of validation to be done on operator entry for a When Printed field The types of Data Checking include eNo Validation eNumeric eAlphabetic eAlphanumeric eUpper Case Characters eUpper Case Alphabetic eUpper Case Alphanumeric eFixed List of Values Maximum Field Length If you define the field as When Printed you must supply the maximum length of the field in character positions Allow Blanks An indication of the allowable INCOMPLETE operator input for a W
271. he printed image stops at a distance of 4 inches from the beginning of the label you must select five image bands to prevent re imaging Trailing Edge Violations Trailing Edge violations more easily occur on small under 1 tall labels because of the limited space on the label These violations result in print wandering up or down the label The print will often move farther and farther down the label until it actually crosses the inter label gap This is followed by a blank label or two and then the process is repeated The absolute minimum margin is 1 8 0 125 207 Printed Documentation inches To avoid causing a Trailing Edge violation do not exceed the absolute minimum margin BACK to TOP Novexx Novexx Setup Printer Printer Concurrent Calendar Option Set Printer Darkness Printer Name The Printer Name parameter is optional You may specify a name to uniquely identify this printer This name will show up in the print request screen and the queue s printer list It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX interface Printer Description The Printer Description parameter is optional You may enter a description that further identifies the printer for the user The location of the printer Shipping and Receiving and size type of media loaded 4 inch X 6 inch paper media are examples of what can be stored here Printer Manufacturer Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provid
272. he printer has a cutter installed When selecting to cut after each format an additional screen item Cut Offset allows you to specify where the label should be cut Maxicode When using Maxicode with Apollo printers that support it data must be entered in the following format CCOCSSSHZZZZZXXXXHdata Where CCC Country Code SSS Service Code ZZZZZXXXX Zip Code 4 Digit Extension optional Must be enclosed in signs data Alphanumeric Data maximum length 84 characters 172 Printing Example 123999 442120798 This is an example Memory Card Downloads Select Memory Card Download to mark this format to be intended for download to the memory card Note that some software features will not be accessible during label creation due to printer and memory card limitations Cut Offset Enter the distance from the point at which the label stops printing and the point at which the label is to be cut in hundredths of inches This value should be approximately 60 To make TWO cuts per label enter two offsets separated by a comma For example to cut a reflective marking out of a label the first offset should be approximately 60 and the second offset should the amount of space between the end of the first label and the start of the second label Using an Optional Keyboard An optional keyboard can be attached to the printer using a special keyboard adaptor This allows faster input for variable data ent
273. he software allows you to embed the function characters as follows amp FN1 Function 1 amp FN2 Function 2 amp FN3 Function 3 amp FN4 Function 4 UPS GroundTrac When creating a UPS GroundTrac symbology you can choose to print the bar code with or without the Human Readable interpretation If selected the interpretation will automatically be formatted to the correct specification based on the printer chosen When printing to the Apollo the human readable interpretation will need to be created as a special formatted text field to comply with the UPS Bar Code Specifications For additional information please refer to UPS Bar Code specifications Check Digit Select an optional check digit for the chosen symbology This option appears for certain symbologies only Height Multiplier Calculates the height of the symbology Available for certain symbologies only Row Size 101 Printed Documentation Enter the number of data code words in each row Each code word represents about 2 characters Error Security Level Enter a number for the level of security desired Zero 0 provide error detection only Higher numbers increase the symbol size and error correction capability Truncate Symbol Select Yes to omit the right hand row indicators and stop pattern Select No to print the full symbol Interpretation The interpretation refers to the human readable characters printed either below a horizontal bar code or to the s
274. he thickness of a line after you have already placed the line on the format this parameter permits you to enter a value for the line thickness Line Length Enter the length of the line in inches or millimeters Shape You will be presented with an on screen list of available shapes from which to choose The available choices for line fields are Solid Rectangle Solid Rounded Rectangle Arrow Double Arrow Triangle Fill Pattern You will be presented with an on screen list of available fill patterns from which to choose The available choices are e Solid e Down Diagonal e Up Diagonal 120 Insert Grid Diamond Horizontal lines Vertical Lines Dots Windows Wallpaper The choices vary based on the printerchosen Gray Level You will be presented with an on screen list of available gray level shading This option appears when a Solid fill pattern is chosen Once you have finished entering the specification data for the field the field can be placed on the format BACK to Top Picture Field Adding a Picture Field Adding a Picture Horizontal a rol Name Field Width Field Height Source of Data Field Direction Field Contrast a Aspect atio Field Color Enable Printing Adding a Picture Field Pictures can be created using Microsoft Paintorush Adobe Photoshop Jasc Paint Shop Pro and many other graphics applications Files with the EPS extension can only be included on formats de
275. hen Printed field The choices are as follows eFully or Partially Blank ePartially Blank eFully Blank eNo Blanks Allowed Selection List Enter a list of values which the operator can choose from The values that you type in will appear as choices on the Print screen Each value must be separated by a space Short phrases must be enclosed in double quotes To advance to a new line press CTRL ENTER For example choices are RED GREEN BLUE To display this selection list click on the down arrow next to the field input box on the data input screen within the Print screen BACK to TOP Copied Name of Copy Field If the field is defined as Copied you must select the name of the copy field which will supply the data for this field To copy a bar code check digit choose the bar 108 Insert code field name with the symbol before it Available field names are listed in the dialog box TRUECOUNT TRUECOUNT allows you to print the number of batches printed of a label on that label To use TRUECOUNT create a Linked or Copied field and select TRUECOUNT The value of TRUECOUNT is taken from the number of batches entered by the user on the print request screen Serialized The data is read from a Serial File If the data is changed by incrementing or decrementing the field then the next available serial number will be rewritten to the Serial File Serial File Name The path name of the Serial File that contains the
276. hen using Maxicode with Sato printers that support it data must be entered in the following format CCCSSSHZZZZZXXXXiHdata Where CCC Country Code 231 Printed Documentation SSS Service Code ZZZZZXXXX Zip Code 4 Digit Extension optional Must be enclosed in signs data Alphanumeric Data maximum length 84 characters Example 123999 442120798 This is an example BACK to TOP Synergystex Synergystex Setup Printer Model Port Type Upper Case Bar Code Verification Downloaded Fonts International Printable Characters Vertical Separation Bar Width Multipliers Printer Name The Printer Name parameter is optional You may specify a name to uniquely identify this printer This name will show up in the print request screen and the queue s printer list It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX interface Printer Description The Printer Description parameter is optional You may enter a description that further identifies the printer for the user The location of the printer Shipping and Receiving and size type of media loaded 4 inch X 6 inch paper media are examples of what can be stored here Printer Manufacturer Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided Printer Model Select the printer model to be used 232 Printing Type of Port Select the type of port the device is attached to The options are Serial Parallel USB Network Windows or IP
277. herent The packet structure of SuperCode ensures that each symbol character encoding a data or error correction codeword is adjacent to a symbol character encoding the packet address Thus the sequence of codewords is known no matter how spatially arranged are the packets Not only does this allow for non rectangular symbol shapes but the packets do not have to abut one another physically b Error Correction Inherent SuperCode symbols have error correction codewords based on Reed Solomon error correction algorithms which can be used not only to detect errors but to correct erroneously decoded or missing codewords see A user may select one of 32 error correction levels c Extended Channel Interpretations ECI Optional This mechanism enables characters from other character sets eg Arabic Cyrillic Greek Hebrew and other data interpretations or industry specific requirements to be represented see d Logical Layer Designator LLD Inherent This mechanism allows various structures of the symbol Five Logical Layer Designators are specified see One LLD is allocated to the ECI scheme common to a number of symbologies Composite 371 Printed Documentation Composite Bar Code The Composite Symbology incorporates a linear component with a two dimensional composite component this helps address supply chain applications not being met currently It will allow for the co existence of symbologies already being used an
278. ht or Left arrow keys move the highlighted bar to the next or previous file name TAB TAB SHIFT TAB CTRL When entering data on specification input screens the TAB key moves the highlighted bar to the next item the SHIFT TAB key combination moves the highlighted bar to the previous item However the arrow keys allow you to make a selection among the given option When selecting a file name the Up or Down Right or Left arrow keys move the highlighted bar to the next or previous file name Using the CTRL TAB key combination moves through the TABS on the field parameter dialog box ENTER Means that the information currently being entered is complete PgUp PgDn When asked to enter a file name the software presents an alphabetized directory across the screen of the available files If there are more file names than can be viewed at once PgDn moves to the next screen and PgUp will move back to the previous screen HOME END When moving on the format display HOME will move the format pointer to the upper left corner of the format END will move the format pointer to the lower right corner of the format H V Allows you to center a field horizontally vertically or both While a field is highlighted to be moved pressing the H key will place it horizontally the V key will place it vertically and pressing the H key followed by the V key will center the field on the format ALT number Some font options have International Ch
279. ial in Appendix C for further information Database Connection System Database File String Table Name Search Field Operator Prompt l Search Fields ai Line Data Field Name Trim Trailing Maximum Field Typical Field Design Test Variable Table Database System Enter the name of the Database System to use for accessing a database file 126 Insert You can choose the software s non SQL database to connect to an internal dBase database or choose Other Database System to retrieve data from other types of database files Database File If the field is defined as being from the software s non SQL database then the name of that database must be entered A list of the currently available databases will be displayed in the dialog box If you have previously entered a database name you can use the same name by pressing TAB Connection String To connect to other types of database files enter the appropriate connection string to the data source here or you can click the Prompt button to be prompted to create the connection string This string is created by first choosing a Database provider and then creating or choosing a connection to the database How this is done will depend on your Database Provider Variable Table With this option enable you will be able to choose which language table will provide the data to populate the field Table Name Enter the name of the TABLE containing the data to be printed
280. ide of a vertical bar code One of several Human Readable Interpretations is available to you depending on your choice of symbology and field direction Typically human readable interpretation is not available for 2D codes Bar Code Height The height of the bars that make up the bar code This can have a value from 1 inches to 3 9 inches or 1mm to 100mm Added Characters Following is a list of the additional options available when choosing Code 128 B or Code 128 C No Additional Characters Function 1 Mod 43 Check Digit Function 1 Mod 10 Check Digit Function 1 Only Mod 43 Only Mod 10 Only Bar Code Ratio This is the ratio of the wide to narrow elements of a bar code 102 Insert Bar Width Multiplier The number of dots used to define the narrow element of a bar code This allows you to establish the density of your bar code Field Direction The bar code can be printed in one of 4 directions Left to right across the format From bottom to top of format Right to left upside down across the format From top to bottom of format Source of Data The data for the field can be one of the following FIXED WHEN PRINTED COPIED SERIALIZED LINK DATABASE Center Data This option will cause the bar code to be centered within the defined print area That is if the contents of the field contain fewer characters than the maximum the bar code will be moved so it is centered within the field s area Report Data
281. inches Horizontal Thickness Enter the Horizontal Thickness of the box in inches and hundredths of inches Vertical Thickness Enter the Vertical Thickness of the box in inches and hundredths of inches Outlined Select Yes to outline the shape with a solid line Field Height Enter the Height of the field in inches and hundredths of inches BACK to TOP Adding a Picture Field Adding a Picture Horizontal Field Width Field Height Field Direction Field Contrast igen aaa Enable Printing Field Color PP Adding a Picture Field Pictures can be created using Microsoft Paintbrush Adobe Photoshop Jasc Paint Shop Pro and many other graphics applications Files with the EPS extension can only be included on formats designed for a Postscript printer Color pictures can be printed in color to a color printer from within the software under the following criteria If your image has no color information accompanying it then the software can not use the image In this case the image will not print properly If your image has color information accompanying it then the software 73 Printed Documentation does not have a problem printing the image For example if your image was saved as a 16 7 million color image the image has no color information accompanying it If the image was saved as a 256 color image the image will have color information accompanying it You are now presented with the picture specification
282. ined in American National Standards Institute ANSI standard MG10 8M 1983 and is also known as 3 of 9 It is discrete self checking variable length symbology that can be readily printed by a variety of technologies Every Code 39 character has five bars and four spaces making a total of 9 elements Of these nine elements three are wide and six are narrow making Code 39 a two width code Whether numeric or alphanumeric data is encoded Code 39 requires the same amount of space substantially longer than ITF or alphanumeric Code 128 The length of a Code 39 symbol limits its use on corrugated board because the shipping container is often not large enough for the amount of space required for a readable code or the symbol is too large for scanning equipment to read Code 39 has historically been found on paper labels or on documents such as factory work orders where smaller X dimensions are possible The Code 39 character set includes the digits 0 9 the letters A Z upper case only and the following symbols space minus plus period dollar sign slash and percent A Code 39 symbol begins and ends with an asterisk which is this symbology s start stop code It does not require a checksum although a modulo 43 check digit may be appended for increased data integrity Each character is separated from its neighbor by a loosely toleranced intercharacter gap that contains no information Because of the mirror i
283. ing 313 Change Parameters 313 Change Records 281 Change Report Parameters 311 Change Setup 394 Change User Definition icon 23 416 Character Leading 39 99 Trailing 39 99 Character 39 99 275 360 Character Field Types ONLY 173 Character Formatting 4s 128 Character Height Specifying 4s 128 type 4s 128 Character Heights 128 Character Self checking 333 362 369 372 Character Set 171 333 335 336 338 339 341 342 344 351 353 355 358 360 362 364 366 367 369 372 Character Spacing 4s 128 Character Structure 362 369 Character Width 4s 128 Character by character 339 Check Characters 336 338 339 358 364 Check Digit Calculating 403 Check Digit 39 99 341 342 344 351 403 Checking Download Fonts 193 Checking 193 381 CHECKSUM Calculating 350 CHECKSUM as 128 350 394 403 Checksum Example 350 Chinese 31 Choose All Fields 81 89 CiMatrix 360 Circle Adding 76 116 Circle 38 76 116 Circle Ellipse 76 116 Circles and or Ellipses 76 116 Circular Arc 4s 128 Citizen 186 Citizen Cables 184 Citizen Notes 186 Citizen Setup 182 CL408 configuring 221 CL408 221 225 CL412 221 225 CL608 221 CL612 221 Clipboard 84 89 Close LABELCOM 394 Close 394 CMD 320 391 Codabar Index part 335 Codabar 335 CODABLOCK 357 CODABLOCK 256 357 CODABLOCK F 357 Code 128 barcode 339 Code 128 symbology 39 99 Code 128 Version 39 99 Code 16K 353
284. ing instead of using an existing DSN Clicking the Build button opens the Select Data Source dialog box Once you select a data source the connection string in that data source will appear in the Connection tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box If the database is not password protected you can skip to the next step Otherwise enter the password here In the Enter the initial catalog to use prompt type in the name of the catalog or database or select from the drop down list Click the test connection button You should be presented with a message box stating that the test connection has succeeded If the connection failed you will need to double check the values you entered If you need help with establishing a connection you can click on the Help button in the Data Link Properties dialog box This will display additional information from Microsoft on using the dialog box and defining connection information for each OLE DB provider Click OK to return to the Software and enter the rest of the prompts for the field BACK to TOP 407 Printed Documentation 408 Index 1 0a 179 184 190 197 213 225 244 253 1 0mm 37 69 79 112 1 10th 33 1 11th 339 105s 250 10 character 358 10 digit Code 128 supplementing 355 10 digit Code 128 355 10 digit NDC 358 11 digit Delivery Point Code 347 123456789SSSCCCdata 236 12 digit 350 13th 341 342 14 digit 347 372 14 digit EAN UCC item 372 14 i
285. ining a New Access Database Adding Changing or Erasing Records From a Database Browsing or Searching the Database Printing and Changing a Database Structure Data Sources Establishing an OLE DB connection will enable you to view and edit almost any database structure To establish an OLE DB connection click the Data Source icon on the Standard toolbar or select File Connect from the menu bar You will then be presented with the Data Link Properties dialog box Each tab is described below Provider Use the Provider tab to select the appropriate OLE DB provider for the type of data you want to access Not all applications allow you to specify a provider or modify the current selection this tab is displayed only if your application allows the OLE DB provider selection to be edited Connection Use the Connection tab to specify how to connect to your data using an OLE DB provider The Connection tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box is provider specific and displays only the connection properties required by the selected OLE DB provider Connection properties allow you to specify where your data is located and how to connect to the data 289 Printed Documentation Advanced Use the Advanced tab to view and set other initialization properties for your data The Advanced tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box is provider specific and displays only the initialization properties required by the selected OLE DB provider
286. int UPC and EAN symbologies using the European standard code sizes You are also given the option of choosing from a list of available sizes on the bar code specification screen Download Graphics Format Use IMG for traditional imaging PCX for higher quality imaging IMG processing is faster whereas PCX processing produces a higher quality image This option only applies when Enhanced Image Processing is selected in the Program Options Print Mode The Print Mode option appears on the Format Specification screen and allows the user to select the desired mode of printing Batch Peel Off or Tear Off Size of Gap Entering the size of the gap between the labels allows for more accurate forms control BACK to TOP A Series M Series and Mach Cables 165 Printed Documentation 9 Pin Cable Configuration A Series M Series and Mach Notes RS 232 A Flash Memory Using an Cut Offset Optional Disable Reprint Keyboard RS 232 Communications For RS 232 Serial Communications Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Handshake RTS CTS on Printer Character Set Windows 1252 on Printer Using the Cutter On the format specification screen you have the ability to cut after each format cut after each batch or cut after each job if the printer has a cutter installed When selecting to cut after each format an additional screen item Cut Offset allows you to specify where the label should be cut Maxicode
287. ion Assignments 9 Pin Cable Configuration 25 Pin Cable Configuration 253 Printed Documentation Western Telematic Switch Boxes You have the ability to increase the number of printers you can drive with your PC by using a Western Telematic CAS 41 4 way switch box a Western Telematic CAS 81 8 way switch box or a Western Telematic CAS 161A 16 way switch box These switching devices may be obtained from WESTERN TELEMATIC INC 5 Sterling Irvine CA 92718 USA 714 586 9950 800 854 7226 Fax 714 583 9514 www wti com Western Telematic Switchbox 41 Dip Switches Western Telematic Switchbox 41a Dip Switches Western Telematic Switchbox 41a Changing Monitor Pins The four internal jumpers located on the CAS 41A circuit board are used to switch the CAS 41A to monitor pin 4 Request to Send instead of pin 20 factory setting To switch monitor pins proceed as follows CAUTION Make certain to power off the CAS 41A and disconnect the power cable before attempting to remove the instrument cover J1 Port 1 1 Remove the four screws that secure the CAS 41A s plastic cover to the chassis Remove J2 Port 2 the cover from the chassis J3 Port 3 254 J4 Port 4 Printing 2 Locate the jumpers on the CAS 41A circuit board As you face the instrument back panel the jumpers are located in the lower left hand corner of the circuit board Move the jumpers as shown to monitor pin4 3 Replace the plastic cover o
288. ious fields in order to locate a specific record The software allows for multiple search keys You may enter data into a single field or several fields in order to reduce the number of records that satisfy the search criteria Once you have entered the search data for any field s press ENTER All records matching the search criteria will be presented When the records are displayed you may use the up left arrow keys or the option Search Back to view previous records if any To view next records if any you may use the down right arrow or the option Search Next Click Quit Search or press ESC to leave the search subfunction The search function will recognize the wildcard characters and if this box is enabled If you desire to view all records for example in a customer database in which last names begin with Mc you can use the wildcard The character substitutes for any and all characters For the above search type Mc in the LASTNAME field entry prompt If you desire to view all records in which the last name is only 6 positions in length and the name begins with Mc you can use the wildcard The character substitutes for a single character For the above search type Mc in the LASTNAME field entry prompt BACK to TOP Design View Design View is used to make modifications to a table s structure To open a table in Design View select View Design View from the menu bar or click the Design View icon on the Edit Toolbar
289. iption of their functions follows Left Mouse Button Allows you to choose menu options icons etc by pointing and clicking once on the selected item A fields parameter can be displayed by double clicking on the field once that field has been selected Right Mouse Button Displays a short cut menu which allows you to Cut Copy Past Erase or view the Field Specifications of the selected field CTRL Left Mouse Button Allow you to select multiple fields to view and edit similar field parameter settings F2 Displays the Print Queue screen F3 Displays the WIBU KEY Control Panel CTRL Z Undo Function will undo the most recent editing or formatting action and return to its previous setting CTRL ENTER Tells the software to start a new line This key combination can be used when entering paragraph information ESC Generally means to terminate the current function When a menu is displayed the ESC key has the same function as Alt Q for quit ARROW Keys ARROW Keys SHIFT Getting Started When moving on the format display the four arrow keys move the format pointer the box representing a field or the corner of a box being expanded The field or cursor will move 01 inches or 1mm If the arrow keys are used while the SHIFT key is depressed the movement will be in 1 inch or 1 0 mm increments The arrow keys also allow you to make a selection among a given option When selecting a file name the Up or Down Rig
290. ir use can be found here FMTCOUNT allows you to control the number of labels printed for each individual record when using the all function When FMTCOUNT is used as a field name the record is printed as many times as the number stored in this field FMTCOUNT is useful when different records in the database 277 Printed Documentation 278 require a different number of labels For example when multiple locations are used to shelve an item BARSUPPF allows you to suppress the printing of all bar codes on a particular label when using the all function This would be used to prevent attempted reordering of a discontinued item or attempted ordering of a vendor replenished item When BARSUPP is used as a field name the absence of a character means print the code The presence of any character means suppress the code LBLCOUNT allows you to change the default batch size for individual database records When LBLCOUNT is used as a field name the value stored in this field becomes the default batch size when printing single database records LBLCOUNT will not work with the all function use FMTCOUNT if you are using all FMTNAME is the fourth reserved word FMTNAME prevents you from printing an incorrect format with a database record Formats used with FMTNAME should have the same field names on each of the formats and contain only ONE database connection Connecting to more that one database when using FMTNAME will cause unexpected result
291. ive you can choose to send the format to the PCMCIA drive by simply designating the drive letter of the PCMCIA card This allows formats to be sent to PC cards without having a printer directly attached to your PC However for formats that use TrueType fonts graphics database files or any external file you must have a printer attached directly to your PC and download the format to the memory card in the printer Format Card The format card option allows you to format a memory card Any formats that are already stored on the card will be erased When formatting a card the name Apollo is automatically assigned to the card You may specify a different name for the card by typing a new name in Name dialog box Delete File The delete file option allows you to delete a file such as a graphic a database or a format from the card Choose a format name from the available list of stored formats then click on the Delete File button A dialog box appears asking you to confirm the file for deletion Choose OK to delete the file from the memory card or choose Cancel if you do not want to delete the file Details 175 Printed Documentation You can locate the Details button by entering the Print Queue highlighting an Apollo printer from the list clicking Memory Card and then Details You will receive the message Accessing Memory Card Please wait The software will read the contents of the card and present the user with details on
292. ize stock that this format should be printed on Select Yes to print the field on the format Select No to display the field on the format but do not print the field Select Conditional to specify a print criterion for the field Font Style You will be presented with an on screen list of available font styles for the chosen typeface Font Size You will be presented with an on screen list of available font sizes for the chosen typeface Date Format A special string of characters that will represent how the date should be formatted The valid characters for the string appear in the Directions Box Format String A character string in which 9 s represent how the data should be formatted Other valid characters for the string include parenthesis periods commas hyphens and the space character If you had previously selected Custom Numeric Amount for your Special Formatting option you can type in a sequence of 9 s X s or Z s to represent positions or place holders to be filled by data 137 Printed Documentation The 9 place holder should be used to always print a digit For example if the data is 000123456 and you want to print all digits enter the following for the Format String screen item The data that will print will be The Z place holder should be used if you want to suppress a variable number of leading zeroes In other words if the digit is a leading zero the zero will not print If the digit is not
293. l Codes BACK to TOP Appendix G Labelcom Utility 394 Appendices The LABELCOM program allows data to be read from a serial input device such as a bar code scanner or scale The data that is received can then be used to fill in variable data on a label created in the software 1 INSTALLATION This program labelcom exe should be stored run in the same directory as the label software It uses the labelc dll english Ing and label cfg files To install the program double click on the LABELCOM file name It is best to create an icon for LABELCOM To do this simply right click on the icon and choose Create Shortcut 2 SETUP The LABELCOM Parameter settings are stored in a file with the suffix Icm These parameter files are readable only by the labelcom exe program When the program is executed for the first time with no existing parameter file an explanatory message appears The function of this program is to print labels using COM input PRESS ALT C FOR INITIAL SETUP A default parameter file called Default Icm is created When LABELCOM is running and waiting for a message to be received the following items appear Monitoring Port Designates the name of the Com port that LABELCOM is configured for This is the port data will be read from Bytes Received Designates the number of bytes contained in the message Messages Received Shows the number of messages received Current Message Shows the current da
294. labels per batch use 10 2 BACK to TOP Appendix C ALL Function and Tutorial Accessing Internal or External Databases Formats may be printed accessing data from either its internal database or an external ASCII database An example file is included with the software store dbf An external ASCII database may not be viewed or modified from within this software package ALL Tutorial Printing shelf labels typically means printing out an entire data file This can be accomplished through the ALL command ALL is a wild card command that informs the software that you want to print all the records or a specific range of 388 Appendices records in a database This database may be either an internally created database or an external database The sample files included with the software illustrate the use of the ALL command e Click the Printer icon or choose File Print Batch of Formats from the menu bar e Browse to the directory where the example formats are saved on your PC and select the STORE format e The prompt that appears on your screen is ENTER THE BAR CODE NUMBER FOR THE RECORD OR ALL FOR ENTIRE DATABASE Type ALL e The format will appear on your screen filled in with the first record from an ASCII database named STORE DBF e Select option Print a Batch of Formats to print the records and the Print Request Screen will be displayed e BATCH SIZE NUMBER OF IDENTICAL COPIES OF EACH FORMAT ENTER 1 e ST
295. ld Field Properties Button Clicking the Field Properties button will allow you to modify the properties of the final bar code excluding source of data Please see Adding a Bar Code Field for details OK Button Clicking the OK Button will create the Multi Source Bar Code Field Cancel Button Clicking the Cancel button will cancel the creation of the Multi Source Bar Code Field 47 Printed Documentation Field Data Segments This list shows all of the data segments that will be part of the completed Bar Code Field The data segments will be listed in the order that they will appear in the bar code You can change this order by selecting a segment and clicking either the Move Up or Move Down buttons You can remove any of the segments by highlighting it and clicking the Remove button Literal Strings Existing Fields From this list you may add the data from any of the predefined text or bar code fields on the format as a data segment for this field You can also add a literal string enclosed in double quotes For example sample string To add the string or field value to the bar code click the Include button Existing Data Segments This list shows all predefined Data Segments that are currently on the format that you may use as part of the bar code If there are no Data Segments listed you can create one by clicking the Add button You may edit a Data Segment already on the format by clicking the Edit
296. ld of barcode is the two dimensional versions Several variations of 2D are available and as these do not all comprise bars and spaces the more accurate name of 2D symbologies is used 2D symbologies provide a means of storing large amounts of data in a very small space Whether you consider stacked symbologies matrix symbologies or packet symbologies Examples of the three types include PDF417 Code 49 and Code 16K stacked Code One Maxicode DataMatrix Aztec Code and QR Code matrix and Super Code packet 2D symbologies have a major advantage over linear barcode They can store vast amounts of data Individual symbols can store as much as 7000 numeric only or 4200 alphanumeric characters Many of the symbologies also have the ability to use a device called structured append that allows messages to be split over multiple symbols providing almost infinite storage space The disadvantage of the 2D symbologies is that a special scanner is required Matrix symbologies need a vision based scanner to read the data though some of the stacked symbologies can be read with a rastering laser scanner Except to see many new scanners with variations in technology in the next year or so Aztec Code 353 Printed Documentation History and Overview Aztec Code was invented by Andy Longacre of Welch Allyn Inc in 1995 and is in the public domain Aztec Code was designed for ease of printing and ease of decoding The symbols are square overall on
297. le Deletions This option will keep track of file deletions The delete log will record the user date time and pathname of any files that were deleted by using the File Erase selection from the menu bar This makes tracing unauthorized deletions as easy as looking at the log file Delete Log Pathname Enter or browse to the path where you would like the delete logs stored This path should also include the name of the log file Prompt for Change Reason Select Yes to require users to enter text describing the reason for changing a label format This text is displayed when opening the format along with a thumbnail preview of the format at the bottom of the Open box 22 Program Options Create Print Images Selecting Yes will create an image file of each print job for any format that has Save Print Image option enabled Print Image Path Enter the path of the directory where the format print image files are to be stored Database Change Log Select Yes to create a log of changes made to MDB databases This log is only updated when using the supplied database editor A different editor Microsoft Access for example will not log the changes Database Log Path Enter the path where the database change logs should be written BACK to TOP Users User Sign On Password Adding a User User Identifier Password Protection pm Controlled User can change User Name User Description pects Ara Password Password Never
298. lect a color from the available choices in the directions When the picture field is printed the picture will be printed in the selected color This item will only appear if the selected picture was not originally saved as a color graphic BACK to TOP Source of Data Fixed Fixed Data Edt Control Characters Fixed Data Enter the exact data that you wish to be printed in the field Edit Click Edit to display a text editor Control Characters Choose from a list of predefined characters to be included in the data of defined fields When Printed What is a When Printed field The field data is variable When you print the format you will be prompted to fill in the value of the field It can be changed for each set of formats that are printed For a text field your input may come from the keyboard a serial port a Command File or a wedge type bar code scanner For a paragraph field you will type in the paragraph at the time of printing With the exception of TAB key usage the paragraph will be printed exactly as typed To force a new line break press CTRL ENTER simultaneously otherwise the text will automatically be arranged into lines when printed word wrap The following prompts will apply oe Prompt Repeats PromptNumber Data Checking Maximum Field Allow Blanks Selection List Length 124 Insert Operator Prompt Line Define the prompt you wish to appear at the time of printing The prompt will be displaye
299. llion records per file The data from these databases can be included in formats designed with the software A format field can be specified so that it contains the value from a particular database field in a specified database For each database that will be used in this way a particular field must be specified as the search field When the field s data is to be retrieved the database is searched to find a record that matches the desired value entered by the operator A database record can also be designed to contain a serial number value The purpose of this for example is to allow part number specific serial numbers rather than format specific serial numbers To declare a field to be a serial number you can design the structure to have a numeric field with the desired length For retrieving a record in the quickest possible time an internal database should be used This is an internally indexed file that allows for rapid search Also included under the database functions are the functions associated with Serial Files These files hold the data for a given format field that require unique values for each format printed You will be asked to enter a new database name An alphabetical listing of current database files will also be displayed Afterwards you will be presented with the Database Structure Creation screen From here you need to define the structure of the database The following options will allow you to define new fields for
300. lso again under Special Formatting for printing choose 1 Short Date or 3 Julian Date To have a date printed in any other format such as European format select option 4 Custom Date You will then need to enter the character string for the format you wish 2 The second method requires only one field The field must have a Source of Data as Arithmetic For the screen item Calculation enter an arithmetic expression using the keyword DATE The keyword DATE represents the system date and can be used to calculate a Sell By date For more information see Arithmetic Source of Data 3 The third method also requires only one field Create a field with a Source of Data as Print Date Then enter a non zero number into the Year Offset Month Offset or Day Offset fields to add Years Months or Days to the current date Formats Printed Report Many manufacturers of food or pharmaceuticals are mandated by the Federal Government to account for their printed labels The format printed reports will give you an on going log that will allow you to meet these requirements It can also be used to control your label inventory for reordering purposes Be aware that since the report is written when the formats first start to print the report will be in error if the print run is stopped before all formats have had a chance to print The Save As Function There are many ways to input your variable data into the software You ma
301. ludes at least two error correction codewords An option permits up to 510 additional error correction codewords to be added to the symbol There are three different data compaction modes that define the mapping between codeword values and decoded data PDF417 supports industry standard escape sequences to define international code pages and special encodation schemes The capacity of PDF417 can be helpful in applications where the data must travel with the label item where a host database is not always available for quick look up PDF417 is being used for hazardous materials labeling storing technical specifications and calibration data on electronic instruments encoding fingerprints and photographs on the back of drivers licenses 366 Bar Code Information PDF417 symbols require a 2D scanner they cannot be read using an ordinary linear barcode scanner A number of scanners are on the market using both laser and CCD camera technologies PDF417 symbologies can be printed using most laser printers or label printers on the market Specifications Character Set All 128 ASCII Characters All 128 Extended ASCII Characters 8 bit Binary Data Up to 811 800 Different Interpretations Symbol Height 3 to 90 Rows Maximum Row Height is 3X Symbol Width 90X to 583X Error Correction Characters 2 to 512 Maximum Data Capacity 1850 Text Characters at error corrections level 0 2710 digits 1108 bytes Other Features Designed so that cro
302. lygons Outlined Field Height Adding a Box 69 Printed Documentation The following message will appear Press and hold the mouse button or press ENTER when done You should now move the pointer to the proper position on the format You may actually move to either the upper left corner or any of the other 3 corners of the area to be occupied by the box When the pointer is properly positioned press ENTER You may now move to the opposite corner of the area for the box A rectangle will display the area as you use the mouse button or the arrow keys to expand or contract the area When you have expanded the rectangle to the proper size release the mouse button or press ENTER Now you will be prompted to expand the box s borders to the proper thickness The following message will appear ADJUST SIDES TO PROPER THICKNESS Drag with the mouse and release button when done or use the arrow keys and press ENTER when done The left arrow will decrease vertical sides and the up arrow key will decrease horizontal sides Pressing the arrow keys while holding down the shift key will result in movements of 10 inches or 1 0mm When the box s borders are the proper thickness press ENTER The box will be added to the format and displayed For printers that support shaded boxes or polygons you will be presented with the Create Box Field Specification screen Each of the specification screen items are described below Field Name A
303. m If you press TAB the value will stay the same WHEN DATA ITEMS ARE COMPLETED You have completed entering data when you finish the last item At this point the highlighted bar disappears All the data items are checked If any error is found you will see a specific error message displayed just below the Directions Box for the item in error The Directions Box itself will display a message asking you to re enter the item To correct the error enter a correct value for the item In some cases the highlight bar will go to the item which is most likely the cause of the error For other errors there will be several ways to correct it When you have made the necessary changes click OK or press ENTER to signal that you have completed correcting the data If you choose not to correct the error press ESC The field will not be added to the format or when entering format size data the new format will not be added If you are satisfied that the values entered are what you want click OK or press ENTER to continue the placement of the bar code or text fields on the format display If you want to make additional changes to any data item press any key besides the ENTER key The highlighted bar will reappear at the first item You can now move the bar to the proper item and change it Click OK or press ENTER to accept the changes Choose Cancel to abandon changes If you decide that you do not want to add the new field or the new format press
304. mage 336 Bar Code Information relationship between start stop character and the letter P an upper limit is specified for the intercharacter gap width in order to prevent short reads especially in the case of partial scans Although there are only 43 data characters in Code 39 s character set it is possible to encode all 128 ASCII characters using Code 39 s Full ASCII feature If a reader is in its Full ASCII mode the symbol and are used as precedence codes with the 26 letters Specifications Character Set 0 9 A Z space and Encodation Five bars and four spaces are required to encode a character Three of the nine bars and spaces are wide while the other six are narrow Start Stop Pattern Always the asterisk or star character Code Type Binary varying length Human Readable Optional although it is typically used Check Character Optional modulus 43 calculation Encoded Information Contingent upon data requirements Allowable Size Minimum X Dimension 0075 inches 337 Printed Documentation Wide to Narrow Ratio 2 1 to 3 1 with X Dimension gt 020 inches 2 2 1 to 3 1 with X Dimension lt 020 inches Allowable Symbol Height The greater of 25 inch or 15 of the symbol length Code 93 History and Overview Code 93 was introduced in 1982 It was specifically designed to provide a more compact version of Code 39 due to its high density complement Code 9
305. ment to a file instead of routing it directly to a printer The document is saved with the printer formatting such as font selection and color specifications in a PRN file Number of Copies Specify the number of copies you want to print Collate If you have selected more than one copy specifies whether you want the copies to be collated Collated copies are in numerical order Properties Click to set up options for the printer The options available depend on the printer s features BACK to TOP Sorting the Table You have the ability to sort records in ascending or descending order when your table is displayed in Datasheet view To sort records in Datasheet view click the field you want to act as your sort key and click either the Sort Ascending icon or the Sort Descending icon on the Standard toolbar The entire table will then be sorted based on your selection You may also select Edit Sort Sort Ascending or Edit Sort Sort Descending from the menu bar to sort the table Printed Documentation Writing Database Records to a Text File This option converts all records in the current database to standard text records The resulting file can then be used as input to another program edited sent across communication lines etc When selected you will be prompted to enter the name of the file to be written Choose the path and filename The resulting file will contain one fixed length line for each database record
306. mn heading for a field may be changed by entering a different name This item appears for each field that is included in the report Field Width If you wish to truncate a field enter the maximum column width for the field Enter ZERO to use the default width of the field Include Fields Indicate which fields are to be included in the report by choosing from the list shown Fields are printed in the sequence that they were chosen BACK to TOP Test Printing the Format Tracking Report This function causes the printer to print the report header and then skip to the next new page This allows you to properly position the paper with respect to the top of form when using a dot matrix printer Changing the Report Parameters This function allows you to preview the items included in the report prior to printing After choosing the Change Parameters option you are presented with the tracking report specification dialog box From here you can change any of the report parameters 313 Printed Documentation Writing the Report to a Text File This option converts all records in the current format tracking file to standard text records The resulting file can then be used as input to another program edited sent across communication lines etc You will be presented with the report file extract specification screen Once you have entered all items correctly a Dialog Box appears stating the number of records written to the file The resul
307. mpt If you desire to view all records in which the last name is only 6 positions in length and the name begins with Mc you can use the 282 Internal dBase Database wildcard The character substitutes for a single character For the above search type Mc in the LASTNAME field entry prompt Search records can also be modified Click Change Record to modify the currently displayed record Press ENTER or click OK when changes are completed Click Quit or press ESC to leave the currently displayed record unchanged Click Add Records to add more records to the database New records are added to the end of the database Unmark All This function unmarks all records that are marked for printing The records will not be unmarked automatically after the database is printed Therefore you must choose to unmark the records after printing This function applies to the ALL records that are marked for printing Mark for Erase This function marks the viewed record for erase When the Compress function is chosen all marked records are erased permanently Until then any record can be unmarked When any record is marked the phrase MARKED FOR ERASE will be displayed next to the record This function applies to the currently displayed record Click once on the check box to place an X in the box When the box is marked with an X the Compress function can be chosen to erase all marked records Mark for Print This function marks the viewed record for p
308. mpts Printer prompts for quantity to be printed e Fixed Printer prints a previously specified quantity Batch Size Enter the number of identical copies of each format you want printed When this format is stored on the memory card then selected for printing the same number of identical labels will print each time This screen item will only appear if there is an incrementing field on the label Number of Formats Enter the number of formats you want printed When this format is stored on the memory card then selected for printing the same number of labels will print each time This screen item will only appear if a Fixed quantity was chosen 174 Printing Printer Number Select the number of the printer to use in order to print the format You can also choose to print your format to a file Output File Enter the name of the name of an output file for the format Entering the name of an existing file will append new information to previous information Entering a new filename will create a new file Downloading to a PCMCIA Drive This option is found at the print screen under the Tools menu This allows you to send a format to a memory card in a PCMCIA drive instead of an Apollo printer Formats can also be written directly to a PCMCIA drive attached to your computer The PCMCIA card with the stored formats can then be used in the Apollo printer for future off line printing If you have a PCMCIA slot that acts like a dr
309. n and Ovation 2 Ovation and Ovation 2 Switch Box Printer 9 Pin Cable 25 Pin Cable Assignments Configuration Configuration Western Telematic Switchbox 41 41a 161a Cable Configuration 9 Pin Cable 25 Pin Cable Configuration Configuration Western Telematic Switchbox 81c Cable Configuration 9 Pin Cable Configuration 25 Pin Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switch Boxes You have the ability to increase the number of printers you can drive with your PC by using a Western Telematic CAS 41 4 way switch box a Western Telematic CAS 81 8 way switch box or a Western Telematic CAS 161A 16 way switch box These switching devices may be obtained from WESTERN TELEMATIC INC 5 Sterling Irvine CA 92718 USA 714 586 9950 800 854 7226 Fax 714 583 9514 www wti com If you are using a Western Telematic Switch formats that contain TrueType font text fields cannot be downloaded as a font to the printer through the Western Telematic Switch Box The Western Telematic does not allow TrueType fonts to be downloaded When using TrueType font text fields on a format and a Western Telematic Switch you must download the font as a graphic 197 Printed Documentation Western Telematic Switchbox 41 Dip Switches Western Telematic Switchbox 41a Dip Switches Western Telematic Switchbox 81c Dip Switches The CAS 81C 8 way Switch Box is equipped with a set of 8 position or 10 position Dip Switches as follows
310. n list click on the down arrow next to the field input box on the data input screen within the Print screen BACK to TOP Database The information or data that will be used to fill this field on the format will come from a database file You will be asked to specify the database file name and the name of the field containing the data or information to be used A maximum of three different databases may be accessed in one format For each database accessed the name of the search field and an operator prompt will be required You will only be required to supply a search field name and an operator prompt once for each new database used Before printing the format the operator will be prompted for the value of the search field to be found The software will search the database until a matching record is found The matching record will then be used to supply data to all fields which specify the same database For a paragraph field a database MEMO field can be used on the label by supplying the name of the MEMO field at the Data Field Name prompt When the format is printed the operator will be prompted for the value of the search field to be found The software will search the database until a matching record is found The matching record will be used to supply data to all fields that specify the same database There is a method by which you can print out all of the records within a given database Refer to the ALL Function and Tutor
311. n the CAS 41A chassis Reinstall the four screws that secure the cover to the chassis Reconnect the power cable and switch the power on Western Telematic Switchbox 81c Dip Switches The CAS 81C 8 way Switch Box is equipped with a set of 8 position or 10 position Dip Switches as follows Western Telematic Switchbox 161a Dip Switches Western Telematic Switchbox 41 41a 161a Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switchbox 81c Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switch Box Printer Assignments BACK to TOP Zebra Notes Printed Documentation Optional Fonts_ Backfeed Speed Optional Fonts The Smooth Scalable Font on Zebra printers is supported on the Text Field definition screen When using the Smooth Font there is an additional option available under the Center Justify item prompt This option will appear when the Source of Data is When Printed or Database Text can be left or right justified centered or field optimized If you choose the option Field Optimized the defined area will be filled with wider characters than you originally defined Backfeed Speed The Backfeed Speed screen item appears on the Format Specification screen and allows a backfeed speed to be set when printing to any Xi Series or PAX Printer Print Mode Tear Off Peel Off Rewind Applicator Cutter Communications Communication settings for Zebra printers are as follows Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Handshake XON XO
312. n to the previous screen by selecting File then Exit While typing the data for your paragraph you can select the edit box by pressing ALT E or by clicking on the Edit button Change Record This function allows you to update a value in a field This function applies to the currently displayed record Once the current record has been modified you may select Add to add additional records Please refer to Add Records Search This function allows you to enter specific values into various fields in order to locate a specific record The software allows for multiple search keys You may enter data into a single field or several fields in order to reduce the number of records that satisfy the search criteria Once you have entered the search data for any field s press ENTER All records matching the search criteria will be presented When the records are displayed you may use the up left arrow keys or the option Search Back to view previous records if any To view next records if any you may use the down right arrow or the option Search Next Click Quit Search or press ESC to leave the search subfunction The search function will recognize the wildcard characters and if this box is enabled If you desire to view all records for example in a customer database in which last names begin with Mc you can use the wildcard The character substitutes for any and all characters For the above search type Mc in the LASTNAME field entry pro
313. nail preview will be given for all TrueType fonts on the Text field parameters screen while editing this prompt If the source of data is fixed the data will be shown on the parameters screen in the True Type font selected For when printed fields the data will be shown in the True Type font selected at print time when it is entered 49 Printed Documentation Width Magnification This function is used to specify the width of the characters Height Magnification This function is used to specify the height of the characters Script Select the Script Character Set to be used with the chosen font Font Point Size When using True Type fonts you may click the Change Font Point Size Button and select a point size for the text field The Character Height is adjusted automatically and the Character Width is set to 0 to make it proportional to the height Conversely if the value for Character Height is changed then the value for Font Point Size will be automatically adjusted Character Height Indicate the character height in inches and hundredths of inches if measurements are in English Indicate the character height in millimeters and tenths of millimeters if measurements are in Metric Character Width Indicate the character width in inches and hundredths of inches if measurements are in English Indicate the character width in millimeters and tenths of millimeters if measurements are in Metric Maximum Lines This function all
314. name to associate with the field Can be up to 32 characters long The name is necessary if you will be recording the value of this field in a format tracking report copying data from this field into another field using this field s data in a Linked Field or filling this field using the Command File facility Horizontal Position Enter the horizontal position of the field Vertical Position 70 Designing Formats Enter the vertical position of the field Comment Enter a comment for this field Shape You will be presented with an on screen list of available shapes from which to choose The available choices for box fields are Rectangle Solid Rectangle Rounded Rectangle Solid Rounded Rectangle Regular Polygon Solid Polygon Number of Sides You will be presented with an on screen list of available choices from which to define the number of sides the polygon should have A polygon can be designed to have any number of sides from 3 to 12 Fill Pattern You will be presented with an on screen list of available fill patterns from which to choose The available choices are Solid Down Diagonal Up Diagonal Grid Diamond Horizontal lines Vertical Lines Dots Windows Wallpaper The choices vary based on the printer and shape chosen Gray Level Printed Documentation You will be presented with an on screen list of available gray level shading options Once you have finished entering the specification data f
315. nces between printers This may also be accomplished with settings on the printer s front panel Initial Label Feed Allow blank label feed before printing first job or suppress label feed Allowing an initial label feed will align the print head to the leading edge of die cut label stock Optimize DataMatrix Select Yes to optimize the DataMatrix 2D symbology If the printer supports this symbology internally has correct firmware version it will print much quicker Select No to produce DataMatrix as a graphic This is supported for all printers but prints slower Optimize QR Code Select Yes to optimize the QR Code 2D symbology If the printer supports this symbology internally has correct firmware version it will print much quicker Select No to produce QR Code as a graphic This is supported for all printers but prints slower RFID Enabled Select Yes if the printer has RFID capability BACK to TOP Datamax Cables Ovation and Ovation 2 9 Pin Cable Configuration Ovation and Ovation 2 Western Telematic Western Telematic 25 Pin Cable Switchbox 41 Dip Switchbox 41a Dip Configuration Switches Switches Western Telematic Western Telematic Western Telematic 9 Pin Cable 25 Pin Cable Configuration Configuration 190 Printing Switchbox 41a Switchbox 81c Dip Switchbox 161a Dip Changing Monitor Pins Switches Switches Western Telematic Switchbox 41 41a 161a Cable Configuration
316. nch 360 15 digit 358 160s 250 161a 179 184 190 197 213 225 244 253 161a Cable Configuration 179 184 190 197 213 225 244 253 16 bit ODBC Administrator 330 16 way Switch 221 17 module 366 18 digit 347 1D Bar Code 333 1E1010 221 20 characters 347 232 Communications 171 181 186 193 199 206 210 215 24 pin 360 25 Pin Cable Configuration 218 225 25 pin 225 2D require 366 2D 39 99 353 355 360 362 364 366 2 D 360 367 2D Bar Code 353 2D Barcodes 236 2D Composite Component accompanying 372 2D Composite Component 362 372 2D symbologies name 353 2D symbologies 353 2E1010 221 3 dat 320 32 bit Cyclic Redundancy Check 360 32 bit ODBC Administrator 330 32 bit Windows application 3 409 Printed Documentation 32 layer Aztec Mesa 355 41a 179 184 190 197 213 225 244 253 41a Cable Configuration 225 485 Cable Configuration 171 485 Communications 171 512K 200 5 digit ZIP 347 6 digit 347 350 8 8140HEX 9FFCHEX 367 81c 179 184 190 197 213 225 244 253 81C 8 way Switch Box 179 184 190 197 213 225 244 253 81c Cable Configuration 179 184 190 197 213 244 253 8400RV 225 8480s 225 8 bit 318 365 367 369 8 bit Binary Data 366 8 way Switch 221 93i 333 355 93i symbology 333 9 digit ZIP 4 347 9 s sequence 4s 128 410 string 4s 128 9 S 48 128 A A B C 335 A fmt 394 AA 152 Abbreviated Name
317. nd may include a second checksum Typically found on Shelf Pricing Labels in a Retail Store Different check digit configurations are available depending on the application It is numeric only and variable length 1 check character PLANET Code History and Overview 346 Bar Code Information Like POSTNET Codes PLANET Codes have 12 digits and consist of tall and short bars PLANET symbology is the inverse of POSTNET because each POSTNET digit has two tall and three short bars and each PLANET digit has three tall and two short bars All PLANET barcodes include a five bar checksum digit or correction character This digit is always the number which when added to the sum of the other digits in the barcode results in a total that is a multiple of 10 Plessy History and Overview The Plessey Company in England originally developed Plessey Code with specifications first dated in 1971 Several variations were created including the MSI Anker and Telxon codes Of these the MSI Plessey is still in use in the United States It is used in libraries and often for retail grocery shelf marking POSTNET History and Overview POSTNET is widely used by the U S Postal Service to automatically sort mail It is a clocked technology in which a scan through the bottom of the bars provides a timing track POSTNET is a numeric symbology that uses five bars and four spaces for each encoded digit A constant width and spacing of the bars is used th
318. ng This item allows you to write a custom program sequence Programs can use the following three types of statements a variable expression This can be FORMATNAME to specify a new format VARIABLENAME to specify a field value FORMATCOUNT to specify the number of labels to print b if condition 398 Appendices statements else statements c while condition statements String constants must be enclosed in quotes For Example SERIALNUM ABC The data can also be enclosed using single quotes If you are using the double pS to designate the inch mark you must use single quotes around the SIZE 1 1 2 If you are using single quotes to designate the foot mark you must use double quotes around the data size 1 1 2 For example if you want to print a specific quantity of labels for each message received you can specify the quantity as follows formatcount 3 For each scan there will be 3 labels printed If you want to print a different format based on the value received you can specify a simple condition using the value received if PARTNO lt 1000 formatname a fmt else formatname b fmt For each input the variable field partno will be compared to the value 1000 If the value for partno is less than or equal to 1000 then the format called a fmt will print If the value for partno is greater than 1000 then the format called b fmt will print
319. ng a printer simply indicate which COM port is to be used for Port Network Printing UNC Universal Naming Convention Setting Up a Printer To print to a thermal thermal transfer printer that is not using a Windows driver you should follow these steps on the computer where the printer is actually attached 1 From Windows 95 98 NT 2000 XP click Start Settings Printers 2 Double click on the Add Printer icon 3 The Add Printer Wizard will be displayed click Next to start the Wizard 4 Choose Local Printer click Next 5 Choose the port that the printer is connected to click Next 6 From the Manufacturers list on the left side choose Generic 7 From the Printers list on the right side choose Generic Text Only 8 Click Next 9 Type the printer name for example MyApolloPrinter 10 Choose whether or not you would like this printer to be your default Windows printer click Next 11 Select the Share Name option and enter the share name for the printer This will be the name that will be used to identify the printer on the network 12 Follow the rest of the Add Printer Wizard instructions Installing the Printer To install the printer in the software 1 Choose Settings Printer Configuration from the main menu bar Then click the Add a New Printer icon or select Edit Add from the menu bar 2 Select the Printer Manufacturer and Printer Model you wish to install 3 On the General tab choose N
320. ng the Move option or by clicking on and dragging the field Grid Extended Cross Hairs BACK to TOP Copying a Field To add a copied field select the field to be copied then click the copy icon on the main toolbar Next click the paste icon on the main tool bar The copied field will appear on the format You may also select the field to be copied choose Edit Copy from the menu bar then choose Edit Paste from the menu bar The copied field will appear on the format Designing Formats This selection allows you to make a duplicate of an existing field or fields and place the field or fields anywhere on the format To select more than one field see Selecting Multiple Fields Choosing a Group of Fields To select more than one field on the format Click the left mouse button and drag the mouse around the fields that you wish to choose You may also choose multiple fields one at a time by holding down the CTRL key and clicking on the fields that you wish to select Or selecting the Choose group of fields icon and dragging over all of the fields that you wish to select In order to better identify the selected fields the selected fields will change color to blue by default This option allows you to choose more than one field so that you may move a group of fields erase a group of fields or copy a group of fields You may also Align a Group of fields by choosing the group and then selecting Tools Align from t
321. ns Character Set All ASCII Characters All ISO Characters All EBCDIC Characters Code Type Two Dimensional Matrix Symbol Size Data dependent 361 Printed Documentation Data Capacity 1 to 2000 Characters Symbol Error Detection 16 bit or 32 bit Cyclic Redundancy Check Symbol Error Correction Convolutional Code Algorithms EAN UCC Composite History and Overview An EAN UCC Composite symbol consists of a linear component encoding the item s primary identification associated with an adjacent 2D Composite Component encoding supplementary data such as a batch number or expiration date The Composite symbol always includes a linear component so that the primary identification is readable by all scanning technologies and so that 2D imagers can use the linear component as a finder pattern for the adjacent 2D Composite Component The Composite symbol always includes a multi row 2D Composite Component for compatibility with linear and area CCD scanners and with linear and rastering laser scanners An EAN UCC Composite symbol consists of a linear component associated with an adjacent 2D Composite Component Specifications Character Set Both linear and 2D Composite Components encode a subset of ISO 646 consisting of the upper and lowercase letters digits and 21 selected punctuation characters The EAN UCC function character FNC1 and a Symbol Separator character Character Structure different edge to similar edge de
322. nt Request Screen will appear with the following items Printer Number Select the number of the printer to use in order to print the format Duplex Print Select to simultaneously print the same job on two printers or leave blank to print the job on a single printer This screen item appears when you have two of the same model printer defined Alternate Printer Select to simultaneously print the same job on two printers or leave blank to print the job on a single printer The printer should be properly cabled to the computer turned on and in the ON LINE READY mode The paper or label stock should also be properly positioned If an error occurs see Appendix A Error Status Messages BACK to TOP Print Format Definition Print Format Definition Print Format Output to File Font Setup Printed Documentation Definitions Top Margin LeftMargin Print Format Definitions Open the format that you want to print definitions for and choose Tools Print Format Definition from the menu bar Next you are presented with the printing options for printing format definitions Each of the Format Definition Print option items are described in the following section Destination Please select the destination for the report The selections are ePrinter to send report to the printer ePrinter Data File create a file which includes printer control characters eText File to create a fixed space ASCII text file Output to File De
323. nter the thickness of the field in inches and hundredths of inches Shape Please select one of the following variations Available choices are e Circle Outlined Circle e Disc Solid Circle e Ellipse Outlined Ellipse e Solid Ellipse Fill Pattern You will be presented with an on screen list of available fill patterns from which to choose The available choices are Solid Down Diagonal Up Diagonal Grid Diamond Horizontal lines Vertical Lines Dots Windows Wallpaper The choices vary based on the printerchosen Gray Level You will be presented with an on screen list of available gray level shading options This option appears when a Solid fill pattern is chosen BACK to TOP Line Field Adding a Line Field Adding a Line i Horizontal Enable Printing Orientation Angle Line Thickness 118 Insert Line Length Shape Fill Pattern Gray Level Adding a Line Field The line s width can be as large as the format width The line s height can be as large as the format height You can now use the mouse button to move the pointer to the proper position on the format or you can use the arrow keys Since a line is treated as though it is a rectangle you may actually move to either the upper left corner or any of the other three corners of the area to be occupied by the line When the pointer is properly positioned the following message will now appear Move to LOWER RIGHT CORNER of the line Press an
324. nter towards the bottom of the screen will make the bottom of the letter curve more When you have successfully placed and sized the area for the circular arc field release the mouse button or press ENTER Source of Data The data for the field can be one of the following Arithmetic When Printed External File Name When Printed Database Indirect Special Formatting This function allows for specialized formatting of data Following are the available options e No special formatting e Short Date Short Date Example 10 JAN 99 e Long Date 132 Insert Long Date Example January 10 1999 Julian Date Julian Date Example 99010 Custom Date Custom Date Allows you to create your own custom format for the date MM Numeric Month mm Numeric Month with suppressed zero MMM Abbreviated Name of Month MMMMMMMMM Month Name DD 2 Digit Day of Month DDD 3 Digit Day of Year YY 2 Digit Year Y 1 Digit Year WW 2 Digit Week Number within Year WWW 3 Letter Day of Week WWWWWWWWW Day of Week Name Example MM DD YY 133 Printed Documentation 134 Custom Spacing Custom Spacing This option allows for compliance with various industry standard formats for bar code human readable interpretations You may use a character string of 9 s to represent positions to be filled by data The allowable separators are any special characters you desire for your format including spaces This meets
325. nters that can be configured for parallel printing This option only appears when using Windows 95 98 or ME Printer Memory If a memory cartridge is installed select the option corresponding to the memory module that is inserted into the top cartridge slot Cutter Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability While designing the format if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you may choose e Donotcut e Cut after each Format e Cut after each Batch e Cut after each Job Set Printer Clock Select Yes to set the printer clock to match the computer clock Select No to NOT set the printer clock to match the computer clock Darkness Adjustment Enter a number from 4 through 4 to adjust the base level of print darkness Negative numbers make the print lighter Offset Adjustment Adjust the form edge offset Offset adjustment is the number from 99 to 999 needed to change the formats starting print position Negative numbers will move the starting position down from the top of the format Positive numbers will move the starting position up towards the top of the format Initial Label Feed 212 Printing Allow blank label feed before printing first job or suppress label feed Allowing an initial label feed will align the print head to the leading edge of die cut label stock RFID Enabled Select Yes if the printer has RFID capability BACK to TOP Printronix Cable
326. numeric digits into each character providing excellent density Each character consists of 3 bars and 3 spaces each of which may be 1 2 3 or 4 elements wide 1 element 1 11th of the character width The bars always use an even number of elements and the spaces use an odd number of elements This provides the basis for a character by character consistency check during scanning Each Code 128 barcode includes a Modulo 103 checksum Specifications Character Set The full ASCII set 128 characters One of the advantages of this symbology is the ability to encode all 128 characters of the standard ASCII code chart Encodation Three bars and three spaces are required to encode a character Start Stop Pattern One of three start characters A B or C shall be used at the beginning of the symbol to define initial code set The stop pattern is seven elements comprised of four bars and three spaces The Start Stop pattern shall not be used within the symbol nor shown in human readable interpretation Code Type Modular varying length UCC EAN 128 has several formats defined Human Readable Optional although it is typically used Check Character Required Modulus 103 calculation Encoded Information Contingent upon data requirements 340 Bar Code Information Allowable Sizes Minimum X Dimension 0075 inches Allowable Symbol Height The greater of 25 inch or 15 of the symbol length EAN UCC 8 History and O
327. o organize all customer records by their last names the index value would be the field LASTNAME If you have several customers with identical last names you may want to organize the records by last names as well as first names The index value will be the expression LASTNAME FIRSTNAME All customers with the same last name will be grouped together Within this grouping customers are alphabetically arranged by first name The following are two requirements for an index file Index File Name A unique name for the index file The file name can be up to 255 characters as supported under Windows 95b and higher Value Indexed 280 Internal dBase Database The name of the field to be indexed For the purposes of grouping records into categories BACK to TOP Erasing an Index File Updating a Database You will be prompted to confirm that you want to Recreate the Database If you have made changes that you wish to keep click OK if not click Cancel Changing a Database Structure From this screen you will be able to add insert modify or erase fields or add or delete index files After making the desired changes choose File Recreate Database File from the Database Structure Management screen to make permanent changes to the database structure Editing a Database lf a database file is opened by multiple users simultaneously the first user to open it will have read write access All other users will have read only
328. o use the current default printer options Select Yes to change the printer options for this report Modified printer settings are specific to the currently selected report This allows user to select which printer to print the database records or reports to and allows for the printer setup to be changed if necessary Font Setup Select the Font Setup button to choose the font you wish the report to be printed in Top Margin Enter the distance from the top of the paper to the beginning print position in inches or millimeters Left Margin Enter the HORIZONTAL OFFSET of the print image area from the left edge of the paper in inches or millimeters Print All Select to print ALL reports in the directory Selecting to print ALL reports in a subdirectory will print ALL field data from each report Deselect to print the tracking report for the currently selected format Combine Reports Deselect to print a separate report based on individual formats Select to combine all tracking data from all reports into a single report Sort Key Please select one or more fields from the Available Fields list box to be used to sort the report records Report Title 312 Reports Enter the Report title that should appear on each page For the default Report title leave BLANK Daily Subtotals Select to print a daily subtotal based on the date the label was printed Deselect if daily subtotals are not needed Field Heading If desired the colu
329. of data is when printed Decimal Places The number of decimal places to be used in a page header when the source of data is arithmetic Calculation The calculation to be used for the page header when the source of data is arithmetic Database System Enter the name of the Database System to use for accessing a database file You can choose the software s non SQL database to connect to an internal dBase database or choose Other Database System to retrieve data from other types of database files Database File If the field is defined as being from the software s non SQL database then the name of that database must be entered A list of the currently available databases will be displayed in the dialog box If you have previously entered a database name you can use the same name by pressing TAB Connection String To connect to other types of database files enter the appropriate connection string to the data source here or you can click the Prompt button to be prompted to create the connection string This string is created by first choosing a Database provider and then creating or choosing a connection to the database How this is done will depend on your Database Provider Table Name 35 Printed Documentation Enter the name of the TABLE containing the data to be printed This item allows you to select the appropriate database file table Search Fields The number of fields used to search for a specific record
330. of the symbol length Code 128 History and Overview Code 128 was introduced in 1981 as a very high density alphanumeric symbology Since 1990 it s use has been increasing in a variety of applications It has the ability to adapt itself to all numeric data or to alphanumeric data This is done with start and shift codes specifying that the data following is numeric alphanumeric or special characters These compression techniques minimize space while allowing for numeric and alphanumeric data Because of the compact symbol the numeric version is used whenever possible but even alphanumeric Code 128 is more compact than Code 39 It is a variable length continuous symbology with multiple element width It is often selected over Code 39 in new applications because of its density and because it offers a much larger selection of characters The Code 128 character set includes the digits 0 9 the letters A Z upper and lower cases and all standard ASCII symbols and control codes The codes are divided into three subsets A B and C There are three separate start codes to 339 Printed Documentation indicate which subset will be used in addition each subset includes control characters to switch to another subset in the middle of a barcode Subset A includes the standard ASCII symbols digits upper case letters and control codes Subset B includes standard ASCII symbols digits upper and lower case letters Subset C compresses two
331. ol Bar Select View 95 Function Toolbar 9 95 257 G Gap 168 430 Gaps Between Labels s3 Gemini 239 Gemini Setup 239 General 15 262 General Information 1 General Protection Fault 381 Generated 38 Generic 262 Generic Text Only 262 Getstatus 320 Getstatus useprinter 320 Getstatus useprinter Status Messages 206 GPF 381 Graphic load busy 260 Graphical Configurations 355 Gray Level 67 69 76 112 116 118 Grid Snap 79 94 96 Grid 79 94 96 GROUP Align 81 89 Choosing 81 89 GROUP 39 48 81 89 99 128 H H 10 79 152 H key 10 Hardware Reset 206 Header tracking 313 Header 313 Health Industry Bar Code 357 Height Enter 73 76 116 121 Height 73 76 116 121 Height Magnification 4s 128 Height Multiplier 39 99 Help Language 17 Hexadecimal 4s 128 Hexadecimal Codes 394 HH 39 99 152 HIBC 357 Highlighted Text 19 Hold CTRL key 81 269 SHIFT key 37 79 Hold 37 79 81 269 Hold Job select 267 Hold Job 257 264 267 388 HOME 10 37 79 82 90 HOME key 37 79 HOME END 10 Home Show 281 HORIZONTAL OFFSET 157 271 273 284 311 Horizontal Position 39 48 67 69 73 76 99 112 116 118 121 128 Index Horizontal Separation ss Horizontal Thickness 69 112 Host Symbology 355 Hot Keys 10 Hour 152 HP 201 248 HP LaserJet 391 HP LaserJet Printer Manual 201 248 HP LaserJet Series II 201 248 HP Notes 201 HP Setup 200 Human Readable create 4s 128 Human Readable 39 48
332. omparison operator Whether or not the first string contains the second or OR Logical OR amp amp or AND Logical AND Logical NOT There is no distinction between numeric and string variables ALL VALUES ARE variable length STRINGS Attempting to do arithmetic on non numeric variables gives the value Comparison of two values which are valid numbers is an ordinary numeric comparison For example 2 lt 0 is TRUE If either operand is NOT numeric then a character string comparison is performed Logical true has the value 1 and Logical false has the value 0 String constants must be in quotes but numeric constants can be either quoted or not since they can t be mistaken for field names variables DATA 67 and DATA 67 are indistinguishable BACK to TOP Appendix Creation of a Connection String Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider Connection OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers Connection A Jet connection is used to connect to Microsoft Access Databases mdb The OLEDB Provider for ODBC Driver Connection can be used to connect to almost any database with an existing data source name DSN Sample Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider connection 1 On the provider tab select Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider as your provider and then click the Next button 2 You are then presented with the connection tab In section number 1 enter or browse to the name of the database you want to connect to 3 If the
333. ompted to define the structure of your database Name Printed Documentation The name of the field may be up to 10 characters long The name must begin with a letter but may also contain numbers and the underscore character Embedded blanks are not permitted Type The data type definitions below are specific to a Microsoft Access Database Different database formats will treat some data types in different ways Valid field types are as follows 294 Binary Fixed length binary data with a maximum length of 8 000 bytes Bit Integer data with either a 1 or 0 value Byte A unit of storage capable of holding a single character Char Fixed length non Unicode character data with length of n bytes n must be a value from 1 through 8 000 Storage size is n bytes Counter Currency Monetary data values from 2 63 922 337 203 685 477 5808 through 2 63 1 922 337 203 685 477 5807 with accuracy to a ten thousandth of a monetary unit Storage size is 8 bytes DateTime Date and time data from January 1 1753 through December 31 9999 with an accuracy of three hundredths of a second or 3 33 milliseconds Double Stores numbers from 1 79769313486231E308 to 4 9406564584 1247E 324 for negative values and from 1 79769313486231E308 to 4 94065645841247E 324 for positive values Databaseview Guid Globally Unique Identifier GUID A 16 byte field used in a Microsoft Access database to establish a unique identifier
334. on or a shortcut to the Software and then releasing the mouse button BACK to TOP Creating a Connection to an External Database Selecting the External Database within the software 1 Launch the label software 2 Create a new format or use an existing format 3 Add a new field or use an existing field 330 Advanced 4 Edit the field parameters as follows Enter Field Name optional Select Source of Data D for Database press the tab key Select Database System Select Other Database System Enter the Connection String or you can click the Prompt button to be prompted through the construction of the connection string The Connection string is created by first choosing a Database provider and then creating or choosing a connection to the database How this is done will depend on your Database Provider but a walk through sample can be found in Appendix Select Table Name Select the table name that you wish to use press the tab key Enter Search Fields Enter 1 3 fields to search the database on press the tab key This option will only appear for the first field that is created using the external database Enter Search Field Name Select the field name to be searched on press the tab key This option will only appear for the first field that is created using the external database Enter Data Field Name Select the field name which contains the data from the external database to be placed on the
335. on screen list of available fill patterns from which to choose The available choices are Solid Down Diagonal Up Diagonal Grid Diamond Horizontal lines Vertical Lines Dots Windows Wallpaper Gray Level Insert You will be presented with an on screen list of available gray level shading options Once you have finished entering the specification data for the field the field can be placed on the format Polygons For placing a polygon field on the format follow these steps The following message will appear Move pointer to the CENTER of the polygon Press ENTER or press and hold mouse button You may now move the pointer to increase or decrease the polygon size as well as to change the rotation of the polygon The polygon will appear on the display as you use the mouse or arrow keys to expand or contract the area The following message will appear EXPAND BOX to proper size Use arrow keys then ENTER or drag with mouse When you have expanded the polygon to the proper size release the mouse button or press ENTER If the shape chosen is Regular Polygon you will also be prompted to expand the borders of the polygon to the proper thickness The following message will appear Adjust sides to proper thickness Use arrows then Enter or drag with mouse The left arrow will decrease the thickness of the polygon and the right arrow will increase the thickness of the polygon When the polygon is at the proper thickness pre
336. only of the correct length 14 or 16 digits are generally used for the distribution industry Bearer bars are used to help prevent the partial scan from being decoded as a valid Interleaved 2 of 5 symbol They must touch the top and bottom of all of the data bars Minimum width of bearer bars should be three times of the narrow bar width A partial scan of the symbol will now penetrate one or more bearer bars and the resulting apparent arrangement of wide and narrow elements will not bear any resemblance to a start or stop character to prevent an erroneous decode An item to note with respect to Interleaved 2 of 5 is that the number of digits in the barcode must be even This is due to interleaving one odd digit for every even digit As such sometimes a zero digit must be added to the beginning of the barcode to make the total digits an even number It is recommended to use a check digit and Modulo 10 is generally used for the checksum Specifications Character Set 0 9 Encodation 2 of 5 pairs characters and encodes the first digit of the pair on five bars and the second digit of the pair on the five interleaving spaces Two of the five spaces or bars used to encode a character are always wide Start Stop Pattern Starts with four narrow elements beginning with a bar and stops with a wide bar followed by two narrow elements Code Type Binary varying length 2 of 5 requires an even number of digits to encode information Human
337. ons that will load a format into the printer s memory and temporarily replace field values with new data on a format that was previously loaded on the memory card This is Printed Documentation available only on cab A Series cab M Series cab Mach Apollo and Tharo H and V series printers Selecting Yes for this option will automatically create the ASCII Replace file for the label when it is selected for download The Replace file will be a template for use on SAP UNIX AS 400 or PC based systems The rpl file will be saved in the same directory as the label format Void and Reprint This option is relevant only for the RJS printer The RJS printer is designed to verify up to 15 bar codes as they are printed The printer will verify bar codes in orientations 1 and 3 Picket Fence only Bar codes in orientations 2 and 4 Step Ladder will not verify The Void and Reprint option will enable or disable bar code verification This option appears on the Format Specification Screen Select Yes to enable verification and No to disable it If Yes is chosen any labels with invalid bar codes will have a checkerboard pattern printed over the invalid bar code The printer will then try to reprint the label up to 3 times If more than 3 invalid labels are printed the printer will lock up and must be reset by turning the printer off and then on again or by pressing the Red Reset button located inside the printer Imaging Bands Used for Intermec
338. oolbar You can use these buttons to quickly move between records in a table The same functions can also be accessed by selecting Edit GoTo from the menu bar Editing Table Records To edit database records click the Form View icon or the Datasheet View icon on the Edit menu You can also select View Form View or View Datasheet View from the menu bar If a database file is opened by multiple users simultaneously the first user to open it will have read write access All other users will have read only access Add Records Edit Records Deleting Records Add Records To add a new record to the active table click the Add New icon from the Standard or Navigate toolbar The highlight bar will move to the blank record Field data can then be entered into each field of the record The TAB key will move among the fields If there are more fields than can be displayed at once the fields will be displayed in sets called pages Edit Records To edit a field within a record select the field by clicking on the field with the mouse or by using the arrow keys on your keyboard That field is now the active field and is available to have data added or edited Deleting Records You can delete a single record or a group of records by selecting the record or records and clicking the Delete icon which is located on the Standard toolbar Search 301 Printed Documentation This function allows you to enter specific values into var
339. option only appears for Windows printer drivers BACK to TOP Cutter Cut Options You may define where in a print cycle the cutter actuates allowing you to cut after each format each batch each job or Double cut each format Cut Offset This value should be approximately 06 To make TWO cuts per label enter two offsets separated by a comma For example to cut a reflective marking out of a label the first offset should be approximately 06 and the second offset should the amount of space between the end of the first label and the start of the second label BACK to TOP Page Header Maximum Field i Database Database File Connection Table Name System String Trim Trailing Search Fields Blanks Page Breaks ae Page Header Indicates where the page header will print The selections are None Top or Side 34 Designing Formats Source of Data Indicates the source of data for the page header Data The data to be used for the page header when the source of data is fixed Operator Prompt Line Define the prompt you wish to appear at the time of printing The prompt will be displayed above the data entry area for the field Prompt Number The numerical position that the page header will appear in relation to all other operator prompted fields Used only when the page header has a source of data of when printed Maximum Field Length The maximum number of characters allowed for the page header when the source
340. or the field the field can be placed on the format Polygons For placing a polygon field on the format follow these steps The following message will appear Move pointer to the CENTER of the polygon Press ENTER or press and hold mouse button You may now move the pointer to increase or decrease the polygon size as well as to change the rotation of the polygon The polygon will appear on the display as you use the mouse or arrow keys to expand or contract the area The following message will appear EXPAND BOX to proper size Use arrow keys then ENTER or drag with mouse When you have expanded the polygon to the proper size release the mouse button or press ENTER If the shape chosen is Regular Polygon you will also be prompted to expand the borders of the polygon to the proper thickness The following message will appear Adjust sides to proper thickness Use arrows then Enter or drag with mouse The left arrow will decrease the thickness of the polygon and the right arrow will increase the thickness of the polygon When the polygon is at the proper thickness press Enter The polygon will be added to the format and displayed on the screen Enable Printing Select Yes to print the field on the format Select No to display the field on the format but do not print the field Select Conditional to specify a print criterion for the field Field Width 72 Designing Formats Enter the width of the field in inches and hundredths of
341. ormat if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you may choose Do not cut Cut after each Format e Cut after each Batch e Cut after each Job Initial Label Feed Allow blank label feed before printing first job or suppress label feed Allowing an initial label feed will align the print head to the leading edge of die cut label stock BACK to TOP Intermec Cables 9 Pin Cable Configuration 25 Pin Cable Configuration 9 Pin Cable Configuration 205 Printed Documentation 25 Pin Cable Configuration BACK to TOP Intermec Notes RS 232 getstatus useprinter Resetting the Printer Communications Status Messages Print g Image Trailing Edge Violations RS 232 Communications Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Protocol XON XOFF NO STAT NOTE The Intermec 4100 printer uses XON XOFF for its protocol getstatus useprinter Status Messages Resetting the Printer All Intermec printers will automatically reset at print time if any of the following parameters are changed within the software 1 Media Type 2 Print Mode 3 Cutter Option Intermec 4400 If Printer Status is not available from within the print queue a Hardware Reset must be executed Select the Hardware Reset option from the Print Queue Menu Once the 4400 has been reset factory default settings will be restored If the printer was configured for any settings other than the factory defaults these settings must now
342. ormat is not located in the default directory a full path with drive designator must be included If the full path is not included in a command record formatname will default to the last name used if any If used this clause must be the first in the command record formatcount The formatcount clause is of the form formatcount lt number gt lt batchsize gt The lt batchsize gt parameter is optional There should be no spaces separating the 2 parameters from the comma If the format contains no incremented or decremented fields lt batchsize gt is ignored if included lt number gt represents the actual number of formats to be printed If the format contains incremented or decremented fields lt number gt represents the number of batches and lt batchsize gt represents the size of the batch If not included the default lt batchsize gt is 1 This clause must be included in each command record It must 321 Printed Documentation follow the formatname clause and precede the testprint clause or any fieldvalue clauses testprint The festprint option is of the form testprint on or testprint off For succeeding records the option retains the value it was last set to It is initially set to off fieldvalue The fie dvalue clauses in each command record are in the form lt fieldname gt lt value gt Each variable field or database search field must be specified using one of these clauses There should be as many clause
343. ormation Entering a new file name will create a new file Batch Size Enter the number of identical copies of each format you want printed If the format contains incremented or decremented fields you will be able to print any number of identical formats before the increment or decrement function is applied This number is the batch size You need to enter the batch size and then the number of batches to print For example if you want to print 100 sets of formats with an incremented serial number going from 001 to 100 and for each serial number you need six identical formats showing the serial number you will need to enter a batch size of 6 and the number of batches as 100 Number of Batches 268 Printing Enter the number of times to increment decrement the format fields Starting Position Indicate where to begin placing the formats on the first page Duplex Print Select Yes to simultaneously print the same job on two printers or No to print the job on a single printer This screen item appears when you have two of the same model printers defined Duplex Printer Select the secondary printer that the job is to be printed to Alternate Print Select the number of an alternate printer to use in order to print the format This item will only appear if you have configured the same printer on two different ports Alternate Printer Select the secondary printer that the job is to be printed to Cut Option Indicate one of
344. ould go to Printers 17 through 32 and if a third switch box is connected it would go to Printers 33 through 48 BACK to TOP Tharo Notes Includes 112 112 Plus Freedom Magic Orion Wizard and Hercules MaxiCode MaxiCode When using Maxicode with Tharo printers that support it data must be entered in the following format CCCSSS ZZZZZXXXX data 246 Printing Where CCC Country Code SSS Service Code ZZZZZXXXX Zip Code 4 Digit Extension optional Must be enclosed in signs data Alphanumeric Data maximum length 84 characters Example 123999 442120798 This is an example BACK to TOP Windows Windows Setup Installing a Windows Defining a Windows Installing a Windows Printer Before designing a format for a Windows printer the printer must be installed from within Windows To install a Windows printer driver follow these steps eChoose Start Settings Printers eDouble click Add Printer eFollow the instructions in the Add Printer Wizard Defining Printer Configuration Windows printer configuration settings can only be modified from within Windows To view add change or delete current printer configuration options choose Start Settings Printers and double click on the correct printer Postscript Printers 247 Printed Documentation The software supports Windows Postscript printers They must be installed in the same manner as a regular Windows Printer See a
345. ows you to specify a single line text field or a multiple line text paragraph field Enter 1 for a single line For a paragraph field enter the number of lines you want the paragraph to occupy A maximum of 99 lines can be specified for a paragraph field Field Contrast 50 Designing Formats e Normal Field will appear black on white background e Reverse Field will appear white on black background Field Direction When the Letter Orientation is Normal the field can be printed in any of the following orientations on the format Normal left to right Bottom to top Upside down right to left Top to bottom Slanted Circular Arc When the Letter Orientation is Stacked the field can be printed in any of the following stacked orientations Stacked Right Stacked Up Stacked Left Stacked Down Slanted The software shows an example of each orientation in the box of the display when this item is being entered You should now rotate the box to the appropriate angle As you move the box the degree of the slant appears in the coordinates box on the lower right side of the screen When you have successfully placed and sized the area for the circular arc field release the mouse button or press ENTER When selecting a field direction of Circular Arc the field is placed on the label then expanded in an arc Once all specification data is entered you will be returned to Edit screen You will be instructed to define the loca
346. pe of media loaded 4 inch X 6 inch paper media are examples of what can be stored here Printer Manufacturer Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided Printer Model Select the printer model to be used Type of Port Select the type of port the device is attached to The options are Serial Parallel USB Network Windows or IP Some of these options may or may not be available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected Port Select the port to which the printer is attached 163 Printed Documentation Concurrent Access Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture computers If serial port interrupts are not known do not select concurrent access This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing RS485 Select Yes if using an RS 485 protocol otherwise select No Printer Address Used when the RS485 option is set to Yes Enter the sequential number or network ID of the printer from 1 to 26 within the list of printers on this port Baud Rate Indicate the baud rate used Baud rates may vary on different printers Cutter Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability While designing the format if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you may choose e Donotcut e Cut after each Format e
347. positions or place holders to be filled by data The 9 place holder should be used to always print a digit For example if the data is 000123456 and you want to print all digits enter the following for the Format String screen item The data that will print will be The Z place holder should be used if you want to suppress a variable number of leading zeroes In other words if the digit is a leading zero the zero will not print If the digit is not a zero the digit will print Printed Documentation Fixed Data For example if the data is and you want to suppress the 3 leading zeroes enter the following for the Format String screen item The data that will print will be This example will suppress only the first three leading zeroes If there are more than three leading zeroes in the data stream only the first three leading zeroes will be suppressed Variable Data When the data is unknown such as database input or operator input and you want to suppress all leading zeroes it is best to enter the following for the Format String screen item Entering the format string this way will always suppress the leading zeroes no matter what the actual data is For example if the data is The following will print If the data is 000000123 The following will print 123 The X place holder should be used to always suppress a digit in a specific position For example if the data is gl 00 Designing Formats
348. printers The print speed and image bands determine the rate at which the printer processes the images of your labels In the printer label printing and image processing occur simultaneously For this reason it is very important that these settings be synchronized If the Image Band command is too low the imaging process is unable to keep up with the print speed In this case the printer stops printing and starts again at the lowest print speed If the Image Band command is set too high the printer spends too much time imaging which slows down label production To optimize the number of image bands for your print speed set the image bands at the lowest number and then print a label at the desired speed If the label prints the Image Band setting is correctly optimized To optimize the number of image bands for batch printing you must select enough image memory to allow the printer to retain the entire label image PLUS ONE INCH one image band is equal to 1 inch Therefore if the printed image stops at a distance of 4 inches from the beginning of the label you must select five image bands to prevent re imaging BACK to TOP 32 Designing Formats Page Layout Gaps Between Print Area Height Print Area Width Number Across Vertical Horizontal l Set Background Format Color Background Gaps Between Labels The type of label stock in the printer Select Yes if you are using media with gaps Select No if you are using continuo
349. printing the last label format that was printed BACK to TOP 167 Printed Documentation Apollo Apollo Setup Printer Printer Printer Concurrent Printer Set Printer Darkness Offset Pause Download Before erica Graphics Print Mode Size of Gap Printing Format Printer Name The Printer Name parameter is optional You may specify a name to uniquely identify this printer This name will show up in the print request screen and the queue s printer list It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX interface Printer Description The Printer Description parameter is optional You may enter a description that further identifies the printer for the user The location of the printer Shipping and Receiving and size type of media loaded 4 inch X 6 inch paper media are examples of what can be stored here Printer Manufacturer Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided Printer Model Select the printer model to be used Type of Port Select the type of port the device is attached to The options are Serial Parallel USB Network Windows or IP Some of these options may or may not be available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected Port 168 Printing Select the port to which the printer is attached Concurrent Access Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standar
350. put box When the list box is displayed the following message also appears The list box shows the database search keys matching the pattern entered with wild card characters being any string of characters and _ any single character When entering a search key you can use any of the following wild card characters to restrict the number of search keys that appear in the list box percent sign or asterisk can be used to represent any group of characters in the input data _ underscore or question mark can be used to represent a single character in the input data Fixed Fields To change the format data on fixed fields right or left click on the individual field To choose more than one fixed field hold the CTRL key and click on the fields that you wish to change BACK to TOP 270 Printing Test Print Disabling Test Print Duplex Print To test print the current format choose File Test Print from the menu bar or select the Test Print icon from the Standard Tool Bar Disabling Test Print You may disable the Test Print option at the print screen only It will still be available while editing a format This selection can be found by choosing Tools Options from the menu bar To disable Test Print see Program Options for more details If you are configured for the same printer on two different ports you can specify which printer should be used prior to Test Printing the format The Test Pri
351. r and when the printer prompts for the label quantity Prompt Number The order in which you wish the prompt to appear on the operator input screen This option will appear if there is more than 1 prompted field defined for the format Data Checking An indication of the type of validation to be done on operator entry for a When Printed field The types of Data Checking include eNo Validation eNumeric eAlphabetic eAlphanumeric eUpper Case Characters eUpper Case Alphabetic eUpper Case Alphanumeric eFixed List of Values Maximum Field Length If you define the field as When Printed you must supply the maximum length of the field in character positions Allow Blanks An indication of the allowable INCOMPLETE operator input for a When Printed field The choices are as follows eFully or Partially Blank ePartially Blank eFully Blank eNo Blanks Allowed Selection List Enter a list of values which the operator can choose from The values that you type in will appear as choices on the Print screen Each value must be separated by a space Short phrases must be enclosed in double quotes To advance to a new line press CTRL ENTER For example choices are RED GREEN BLUE 147 Printed Documentation To display this selection list click on the down arrow next to the field input box on the data input screen within the Print screen BACK to TOP Database The information or data that will be used to fill this fi
352. r arrow keys to expand or contract the area of the circle When you have expanded the circle to the proper size release the mouse button or press ENTER For printers that support outlined circles and ellipses you have the ability to adjust the thickness of the circle or ellipse border The left arrow will increase the thickness of the circle or ellipse and the right arrow will decrease the thickness of the circle or ellipse When you have successfully placed and sized the area for the circle or ellipse press ENTER The circle or ellipse will be added to the format and displayed If Circles and or Ellipses are not supported for the printer the menu option will be grayed Each of the Circle Ellipse data field items are described below Field Name A name to associate with the field Can be up to 32 characters long The name is necessary if you will be recording the value of this field in a format tracking report 76 Designing Formats copying data from this field into another field using this field s data in a Linked Field or filling this field using the Command File facility Comment Enter a comment for this field Horizontal Position Enter the horizontal position of the field Vertical Position Enter the horizontal position of the field Enable Printing Select Yes to print the field on the format Select No to display the field on the format but do not print the field Select Conditional to specify a print criterion for
353. r code Field Direction The bar code can be printed in one of 4 directions Left to right across the format From bottom to top of format Right to left upside down across the format From top to bottom of format Source of Data The data for the field can be one of the following FIXED WHEN PRINTED COPIED SERIALIZED LINK DATABASE Center Data This option will cause the bar code to be centered within the defined print area That is if the contents of the field contain fewer characters than the maximum the bar code will be moved so it is centered within the field s area 43 Printed Documentation Report Data To record the value of this field whenever the format is printed select Yes Otherwise select No Increment Decrement Field The following options are available e Increment e Decrement e Constant Type of Increment Decrement The choices for increment decrement are as follows e Numeric e Alphabetic e Alphanumeric e Hexadecimal e Octal e Custom Increment Decrement Sequence The custom incrementation option allows you to define a specific sequence of characters to increment or decrement Valid characters are the digits 0 9 and the letters A Z See Examples Designing Formats Change Amount The numerical amount by which to increment or decrement the field Update Database Select Yes to have the database updated after each job This will reflect the last value of the incremented de
354. r example would be a text field with a fixed value of Frozen You only want this field to print when another field called CONDITION is equal to True Type CONDITION True in for Print Criterion Any time the CONDITION field is equal to True the Frozen field will print If CONDITION is empty or equal to something other than True then Frozen will NOT print The LIKE comparison operator allows you to perform pattern matching You can substitute a percent or an underscore _ character for a whole word a group of characters or a single character A percent sign represents a whole word or any GROUP of characters in the data The underscore _ represents any SINGLE character in the data See Examples Bar Code Width Magnification 46 Designing Formats Allows you to enter a value in the range of 1 99 to magnify the narrow and wide bar sizes This option is only available for Datamax I Class and W Class printers Random Weight Check Digit Select Yes to enable the random weight check digit Please note that when selecting Yes your screen image will not match your printed output This option applies to UPC EAN and is available for the Apollo A Series printers only BACK to TOP Adding a Multi Source Bar Code Field Adding a Multi E Source Bar Code in OK Button Field unon Field Data Literal Cancel Button Strings Existing Segments Fields Existing Data Segments Adding a Multi Source Bar Code Fie
355. r for which you wish to freeze the jobs UnFreeze All Allows you the capability to UnFreeze all jobs associated with a designated printer Select the printer for which you wish to unfreeze the jobs Status Window Job The number of a specific job Used to define a specific job when jobs are sent to the Print Queue The print queue currently supports up to 220 jobs simultaneously 259 Printed Documentation Format The assigned Format Name for the format being printed Description A description of the job If you gave this job a descriptive name when you first placed the job in the print queue the description will be displayed Printer The printer you defined for printing this job If you defined more than 1 printer to send this format to the request will be routed to the first available printer Status The Status of the job being prepared for printing Possible conditions are 260 e Cannot change active or completed job Unable to edit or move a job that is currently printing or completed job e Cannot find job Unable to find a specified job e Comm error Error on the specified Serial Port e Database error An error reading from a database e Excess fonts Too many fonts specified e Font load Sending fonts to printer e Font load Busy Sending fonts to printer printer is busy eFrozen Job will not start printing until Unfrozen e Graphic load Sending a graphic to the printer e Graphic loa
356. r is needed use a rectangle field The edge lines on boxes overwrite any other field they come in contact with Add a rectangle and place it on the format as you would place a line Then adjust the thickness of the box edge lines so that two sides of the box come together This will create a solid line on the label Print Head Temperature The print head temperature can be automatically adjusted for each bar code in orientations 1 and 3 picket fence Enter Y to automatically adjust the print head temperature to keep this bar code within specification Enter N to disable both automatic print head temperature adjustment and verification for this bar code TrueType Fonts TrueType fonts on the RJS printers are supported on the Text Field definition screen Fields that use TrueType fonts are sent to the printer as a graphic Intercharacter Space This option allows you to specify the space between each character based on a dot size of 005 inches If more or less spacing is desired this number can be adjusted accordingly The default setting is 2 dots or 01 inches and should be appropriate for most text fields The maximum setting that can be specified is 500 dots or 2 5 inches Thermabar RS 232 Communications The following settings are needed for serial communications for RJS ThermaBar 260 and 285 printers e Data Bits 8 e Stop Bits 1 e Parity None 220 Printing e Handshake RTS CTS RS 232 Communications Dip Switches
357. r will vary depending on the printer of choice the number of printers attached and the amount of memory available in your PC 37 Printed Documentation Erasing a Format To erase a format select File Erase Locate the file that you wish to erase highlight it and click Erase A warning will be displayed asking whether or not you want to erase the file Select the appropriate choice Viewing Changing Format Size This selection allows you to review the specifications for a format The format size specification data will be available on the tab labeled Page Layout When you have made the desired changes and have chosen to make the changes effective by selecting the OK button the screen will return to the format display Adding a New field There are 9 types of fields you may choose to add Wizard EAN UCC 128 Bar Code Multi Source Bar Code Text or Paragraph Multi Source Text Line Box Circle or Ellipse or Picture Field names will automatically be generated for Text Bar Code and Picture fields For example TEXT1 BAR1 and PICT1 Field names can be customized by simply typing over the default name This feature can be disabled in the Format Specifications menu by choosing No for Auto Field Name Create a Bar Code Using the Wizard wo 00 Designing Formats EAN UCC 128 Wizard The EAN UCC 128 Wizard will prompt you for the required information and then builds the bar code automatically Creating EAN UCC 128
358. reeze all jobs except the one that is currently printing Freeze The Freeze function will cause a job that is waiting to print to be suspended It will be placed in Freeze status immediately A job in Freeze status will not print until Unfrozen This will allow you to move the job in the Queue Only non printing jobs can be suspended or frozen UnFreeze 258 Printing The Unfreeze function will allow you to change any job that is in a Frozen state into one that is waiting to print You should use this function after changing to a new label stock changing the routing of this job to a specific printer changing the quantity of formats requested or moving the job in the Queue Change all jobs associated with Printer Defined Printers Provides a list of all the currently defined printers The Manufacturer Model and defined port are listed for each printer Printer Status Click the Printer Status button to receive information back from the printer such as the model number firmware version and memory available You may also be able to reset the printer or perform a label feed These options will vary based on the printer being used Cancel All Allows you the capability to cancel all jobs associated with a designated printer Select the printer you wish to have all of its jobs cancelled and click the Cancel All button Freeze All Allows you the capability to Freeze all jobs associated with a designated printer Select the printe
359. rint one or a couple of labels at a time The word Demo may also appear on the label Running Windows Terminal Server Only the Platinum version of software will run under Windows Terminal Server The special Terminal Server Key indicated by a round T coded label applied to it is required For more information on using and printing from the software under Windows Terminal Server please refer to the Terminal Server document in the Term_svr folder on the software s CD called TerminalServer doc 14 Program Options General Tab on CR Index Case a All or Marked Sensitive scene Searches Duplicate Serial Save Data Namba ISO Week of the User Sign on Auto Size Input Computer Type Version Select Full if you have a hardware key Select Demo if you do not have a hardware key Measurement Indicate whether measurements will be based on inches I or millimeters M Tab on CR This applies when inputting data into when printed fields Select Yes to allow a carriage return or the Enter key to work like the Tab key By selecting Yes the cursor will move from one input prompt to the next when the Enter key is pressed When all input prompts are filled pressing Enter will advance to the print screen Select No to use the Tab key to move the cursor from one input prompt to the next Auto Submit Select No to display label preview after entering variable data for printing Select Yes to skip preview an
360. rinting Click once on the check box to place an X in the box This function applies to the currently displayed record To unmark an individual record that was previously marked for printing click once on the check box to remove the X from the box VIEWING THE DATA Left arrow Show previous record Right arrow Show next record PgUp Show previous page if any PgDn Show next page if any Home Show first record End Show last record 283 Printed Documentation BACK to TOP Form View A window that displays one entire record at a time To open a table in Form view go to the Database Records Management screen and select the Form view icon Datasheet View A window that displays data in a row and column format In Datasheet view you can edit fields add and delete data and search for data To open a table in Datasheet view go to the Database Records Management screen and select the Datasheet view icon Printing the Database Records Printing Records Top Margin Left Margin Report Title Include Fields Printing Records Your printer should be turned on in the ON LINE READY mode and loaded with paper The database fields will be printed within the width of the paper After selecting to print all records you will be presented with the Printing Options specification screen Once you have entered all items correctly the information will be sent to the printer or as an alternative the database records can also be printed
361. rmats that contain date time fields to be handled internally in the printer and be updated to reflect the current date time when the label is printed Select No to download the date time from the program Set Printer Clock Select Yes to set the printer clock to match the computer clock Select No to NOT set the printer clock to match the computer clock Firmware Level Select Yes if the printer is installed with ROM versions 1E1010 and 2E1010 or higher Otherwise enter N The Firmware Level screen item only appears if the printer attached is a Sato Model CL608 or Model 8480s Set Printer Darkness Select Yes to allow software to set printer darkness This will override any darkness setting defined in the printer Select No to use printers darkness setting Set Printer Speed Select Yes to allow software to set printer speed This will override any print speed defined in the printer Select No to use printer s speed setting RFID Enabled Select Yes if the printer has RFID capability BACK to TOP 224 Printing Sato Cables 9 Pin Cable 25 Pin Cable Bidirectional 9 Pin Configuration Configuration Cable Configuration er Western Telematic Western Telematic Bidirectional 25 Pin i i Cable Configuration Switchbox 41 Dip Switchbox 41a Dip Switches Switches Western Telematic Western Telematic Western Telematic Switchbox 81c Dip Switchbox 161a Dip Switch Box Printer Switches Switches As
362. rompt for each data item needed to define the field A highlighted bar appears on each item in turn When the highlighted bar is moved to a particular item the value for that item should be entered The highlighted bar starts at the topmost item on the screen After you have typed the value for an item and then pressed TAB the highlighted bar moves to the next item You may also click with the left mouse button on any item if you need to change the value entered or use the SHIFT TAB keys to move to any previous item For each item directions for entering the item appear in a text box at the bottom of the dialog box Some items require a number with or without a fractional part Some require one letter or number to indicate your choice from a set of options Others require a group of letters or numbers Designing Formats If the value you entered is incorrect or if you have not entered information for a mandatory field you will hear a beep and see an error message displayed just below the Directions Box The message should help you in correcting the error The highlighted bar will remain on the incorrect field You may correct the value entered and then proceed or you may use the TAB key to proceed without correcting the item You will see that some items have predefined or default values already displayed These are values from a previously defined field If you want that value you do not have to retype it Simply move on to the next ite
363. roughout the symbol In a given character two of the bars are tall and the remaining three are short The tall bars are about 1 10 of an inch high and the short bars are about half that height at 1 20 of an inch The code begins and ends with a tall bar frame bar and may contain a 5 digit ZIP code a 9 digit ZIP 4 code or an 11 digit Delivery Point Code POSTNET code has a trailing checksum that is Modulo 10 of the sum of the digits which is inserted after the ZIP code and before the ending frame bar UCC 128 EAN 128 SSCC 18 SCC 14 History and Overview The symbology specified for the representation of Application Identifier data is UCC EAN 128 a variant of Code 128 exclusively reserved to EAN International 347 Printed Documentation and the Uniform Code Council UCC It is not intended to be used for data to be scanned at the point of sales in retail outlets UCC EAN 128 offers several advantages It is one of the most complete alphanumeric one dimensional symbologies available today The use of three different character sets A B and C facilitates the encoding of the full 128 ASCII character set Code 128 is one of the most compact linear bar code symbologies Character set C enables numeric data to be represented in a double density mode In this mode two digits are represented by only one symbol character saving valuable space The code is concatenatable That means that multiple Als and their fields may be combined into
364. rrent access This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing Use Hardware Handshake Select Yes to use a hardware handshake Select No to use an XON XOFF handshake Baud Rate Indicate the baud rate used Baud rates may vary on different printers Device Attached Enter the type of device that is attached to the port The choices are Printer Western Telematic 4 way Switch 8 way Switch or 16 way Switch Printer Address When configuring a printer that is attached to a Western Telematic Switch Box enter the number on the switch box that the printer is connected to Direct Print Select direct print to send data directly to the port For a shared or network printer be sure direct print is not selected This option appears for those printers that can be configured for parallel printing This option only appears when using Windows 95 98 or ME Printer Memory 183 Printed Documentation If a memory cartridge is installed select the option corresponding to the memory module that is inserted into the top cartridge slot A memory module is required in the Prodigy and Prodigy Plus printers to store picture information and TrueType fonts If the memory module is not present the printer will still work but any graphic that is downloaded will not be printed Cutter Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability While designing the format if a cutter is indicated
365. ry for formats stored on the memory card that require operator input Please see the printer Operators Manual for additional information Disable Reprint Select Disable Reprint to prevent the printer from reprinting the last label format that was printed BACK to TOP Memory Card Functions Sambar of Downloading toa Format 173 Printed Documentation Using a Memory Card When a memory card is inserted in the printer it is automatically detected by the printer Refer to your printer manual for information on properly installing a memory card From the Print screen you can choose to have formats sent directly to the printer or downloaded to the memory card for later use A format can also be printed to a file for programming purposes Within the Print Queue formats can be erased from the printer s memory card a directory of formats on the card can be viewed or the memory card can be formatted To download to the memory card select Tools Download Format to Memory Card from the Print screen Store As Enter the name under which the format will be stored on the memory card To have this format selected automatically whenever the printer is powered on use the name Default If the format is called Default then this label will be printed automatically each time the printer is turned on Quantity Specify how the number of labels to be printed is set e Indefinite Printer prints indefinitely e Printer Pro
366. s Western Telematic 9 Pin Cable 25 Pin Cable Switchbox 41 Dip Switches Western Telematic Western Telematic Western Telematic Switchbox 41a Dip Switchbox 81c Dip Switchbox 161a Dip Configuration Configuration Switches Switches Switches Western Telematic Switchbox 41 41a Western Telematic Western Telematic 161a Cable Switchbox 81c Cable Switch Box Printer Configuration Assignments Configuration 9 Pin Cable Configuration 25 Pin Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switch Boxes You have the ability to increase the number of printers you can drive with your PC by using a Western Telematic CAS 41 4 way switch box a Western Telematic CAS 81 8 way switch box or a Western Telematic CAS 161A 16 way switch box These switching devices may be obtained from WESTERN TELEMATIC INC 5 Sterling Irvine CA 92718 USA 714 586 9950 800 854 7226 Fax 714 583 9514 www wti com 213 Printed Documentation If you are using a Western Telematic Switch formats that contain TrueType font text fields cannot be downloaded as a font to the printer through the Western Telematic Switch Box The Western Telematic does not allow TrueType fonts to be downloaded When using TrueType font text fields on a format and a Western Telematic Switch you must download the font as a graphic Western Telematic Switchbox 41 Dip Switches Western Telematic Switchbox 41a Dip Switches Western Telematic Switchbo
367. s To make use of FMTNAME follow these steps 1 Follow the instructions above to add a database and to add new fields 2 Make the FMTNAME field as a new field The Field Name is FMTNAME The Data Type is Character Enter the field length Once all new fields are added click on Create the New Database 3 Follow the instructions in Editing a Database to add records to a database The fields in the database record MUST be populated Enter the data for each field in the database The data for the FMTNAME field is the name of the format in which this database record will be used For example if the database contains information about parts and the format name is PARTLBL then the data for the FMTNAME field should be PARTLBL Internal dBase Database BACK to TOP Modifying a Database Field The data type field length or number of decimal places is modifiable The name of the field cannot be modified If you need to modify the name of the field you must first erase the field then add or insert a new field Erasing a Database Field To erase a database field highlight the field to be erased then click on the Erase Field icon or choose Edit Erase Field from the Database Structure Management screen Indexing a Database Index File Name Enter a name for the index file Value Indexed Enter the name of the field to be indexed or several names joined by the symbol Indexes can be created for the purposes of using the da
368. s Job 381 Cannot Edit 261 Cannot Freeze 261 Cannot Move 261 Cannot UNDO 381 CAS 179 184 190 197 213 225 244 253 Index CAS 161A 179 184 190 197 213 225 244 253 CAS 41 213 244 253 CAS 41 Code Activated Switch 179 184 190 197 213 225 244 253 CAS 81c 8 way switchbox 179 184 190 197 213 225 244 253 CC A 362 CC B 362 CCC 171 181 186 193 199 206 215 231 236 246 CC C 362 CCCSSS ZZZZZXXXX data 171 181 186 193 199 206 215 231 246 CCD 358 360 364 366 367 CD 9 12 14 239 CD ROM 9 12 CD ROM Drive 12 Cent Substitute 17 CENTER 69 112 Center Data 39 99 Center Horizontally use 158 Center Horizontally 96 158 Center Vertically use 158 Center Vertically 158 Center Justify 4s 128 Center Justify item 255 Center to center 364 CF1000 391 Change 415 Printed Documentation Database Structure 281 Existing Format 82 Existing User 23 Format Data 269 International Settings 385 LABELCOM 394 Print Queue 93 257 Report Parameters 313 Users 23 Windows 151 Change 23 82 93 151 257 269 275 281 313 320 385 394 Change Amount 39 48 99 128 Change Common Properties on Multiple Fields 83 90 Change Field Specification 94 Change Format 388 Change Format Data 269 Change Format Specification 38 94 Change Format Variable Data icon 269 Change Mouse Pointer Magnifying 95 Change Mouse Pointer 95 Change Parameters choos
369. s a simple 4 step process 1 Begin by clicking the Add button to add an Application Identifier Al 2 Select the Application Identifier from the list provided Click Next If the Application Identifier requires a check digit you will be asked if the check digit should be computed or if it is part of the data Click Next 3 Provide a source of data for that Al Click Next 4 If your application only requires one Application Identifier click Finish You can review the other field specification or click OK and you are done If you require multiple Application Identifiers simply click Next to work through the steps 1 3 again until you have added all of the required Application Identifiers Adding a Bar Code Field Adding a Bar Code i at Vertical Control and Function ae Height UPS GroundTrac Check Digit Multiplier Row Size Error Security Level Truncate Symbol Bar Code Height Added Characters Bar Code Ratio Bar Width Field Direction Multiplier Increment Decrement Field Type of Increment Decrement Change Update Database Increment Decrement Sequence Amount Trailing A Add On Characters Leading Characters Enable Printing Random Print Criterion pae kien Weight g Check Digit 39 Source of Data Center Data Report Data Printed Documentation Increment Decrement Increment Decrement Maximum Minimum Adding a Bar Code Field You will now be presented with the Create Bar Code screen Click on entering
370. s are described in the following section Destination Please select the destination for the report The selections are ePrinter to send report to the printer ePrinter Data File create a file which includes printer control characters eText File to create a fixed space ASCII text file Output to File Define the Name Path of the file to be created when Printer Data File or Text File is selected under Destination Font Setup Select No to use the default printer font Select Yes for the option to use a different font for this report Printer Setup Select No to use the current default printer options Select Yes to bring up the Windows Print Setup box This allows the user to select and configure which printer to send the format definition to Top Margin 273 Printed Documentation Enter the distance from the top of the paper to the beginning print position in inches or millimeters Left Margin Enter the HORIZONTAL OFFSET of the print image area from the left edge of the paper in inches or millimeters BACK to TOP 274 Internal dBase Database Database Functions The Database Functions include Creating and Defining a New Database Adding Changing or Erasing Records From a Database Erasing a Database Field Browsing or Searching the Database Printing Erasing the Database Modifying a Database Structure Adding a Database Add a New Field Adding a Database Sequentially Insert a New Field Field Name Data Type
371. s as there are variable fields or database search fields on your label lt fieldname gt is the name of the field on the format and the same as defined on the Text Bar Code Field Specification Screen lt value gt is the actual data to be placed in the field If the data value contains spaces the value should be placed within quotes either single quotes or double quotes If the data is too long to fit in the field the data will be truncated to fit If the data is less than the maximum length the field will be padded with blanks If no clause exists for a given variable field on the format the field will be filled with blanks All 4e dva ue clauses must follow both the formatname and formatcount clauses Also each command record should contain all ffe dva ue clauses necessary to produce the desired format useprinter The useprinter clause is of the form useprinter 1 or useprinter 12 322 Advanced or useprinter 23 The purpose of useprinter is to select the correct printer for this format if you have more than one printer connected to the system The index numbers used in the useprinter clause are not constant and may change as printers are added or printer properties are changed It is better practice to identify a printer using the printername clause printername The printername clause is of the form printername Production or printername my_Printer The purpose of printername is to select the correc
372. s easy selection of the correct code To insert control codes click on the Control Characters button and select the desired code from the pop up list Control codes are displayed in the user interface as the control code name surrounded by angle brackets lt gt For example inserting a carriage return in a field is displayed as lt CR gt You may also use the following character sequences to specify control codes xHH Where x specifies the beginning of a hexadecimal string HH represents a 2 digit hexadecimal value For those users that require embedded function characters the software allows you to embed the function characters as follows amp FN1 Function 1 amp FN2 Function 2 amp FN3 Function 3 amp FN4 Function 4 UPS GroundTrac When creating a UPS GroundTrac symbology you can choose to print the bar code with or without the Human Readable interpretation If selected the 41 Printed Documentation interpretation will automatically be formatted to the correct specification based on the printer chosen When printing to the Apollo the human readable interpretation will need to be created as a special formatted text field to comply with the UPS Bar Code Specifications For additional information please refer to UPS Bar Code specifications Check Digit Select an optional check digit for the chosen symbology This option appears for certain symbologies only Height Multiplier Calculates the height of
373. s for warehouse space management systems and transportation services An example is net weight in kilograms The Al is 3100 to 3109 with the last digit indicating the placement of the decimal point in the data following The data that follows is a 6 digit number Transaction References and Location Numbers These Als allow data to be encoded that provide transaction references and location numbers facilitating the delivery order and invoice reconciliation process They can also identify shipping origin and help to sort shipments These Als include Customer s Purchase Order Number Bill to invoice to Location Number and Ship to deliver to postal code The Ship To Al for example is 420 followed by up to 20 alphanumeric characters of data The following is a partial list of other Als The Content column is a description of the data to be encoded The Al column is the Application Identifier number The Data Structure column is the structure of the data that follows the Al number Please note that some Als are two digits long while others are three or four digits long UCC Application Identifier Al Chart 349 Printed Documentation NOTE For date fields that only need to indicate a year and a month the day field is set to 00 Plus one digit for length indication Plus one digit for decimal point indication UCC 12 UPC A History and Overview The Universal Product Code UPC has been successfully employed in the
374. s function is used to specify the height of the characters Script Select the Script Character Set to be used with the chosen font Font Point Size When using True Type fonts you may click the Change Font Point Size Button and select a point size for the text field The Character Height is adjusted automatically and the Character Width is set to 0 to make it proportional to the height Conversely if the value for Character Height is changed then the value for Font Point Size will be automatically adjusted Character Height Indicate the character height in inches and hundredths of inches if measurements are in English Indicate the character height in millimeters and tenths of millimeters if measurements are in Metric Character Width 130 Insert Indicate the character width in inches and hundredths of inches if measurements are in English Indicate the character width in millimeters and tenths of millimeters if measurements are in Metric Maximum Lines This function allows you to specify a single line text field or a multiple line text paragraph field Enter 1 for a single line For a paragraph field enter the number of lines you want the paragraph to occupy A maximum of 99 lines can be specified for a paragraph field Field Contrast e Normal Field will appear black on white background e Reverse Field will appear white on black background Field Direction When the Letter Orientation is Normal the field can be
375. s less data than required for the database record then the record beyond will be padded with blanks to fill the remainder of the database record Sample text file to be appended to a database John 1234 Main Street Chicago Illinois Smith Bill Jones 810 West Blvd Detroit Michigan Bob 1112 Euclid Avenue Cleveland Ohio Cooper Michael Goldsmith123 North LorainAve GrandHavenNew Y ork Erase ALL Records 287 Printed Documentation You will be prompted to confirm this action To proceed with erasing ALL records in the database click OK or click Cancel 288 Databaseview Databaseview Functions Databaseview is a database editor that uses Microsoft OLE DB This new editor natively supports the Microsoft Access structure allowing you to edit and create Access databases from within the Databaseview software In addition with the appropriate drivers you can view and edit almost any database structure including dBase Paradox and Microsoft FoxPro Excel and XML tables can be viewed from within the software however they can not be edited It is strongly recommended that you lock the software out of any database that you do not want to be modified by using a password or by making it read only This will prevent unauthorized editing by users To start Databaseview click on the Start the Databaseview icon on the Function Toolbar or select File Databaseview from the menu bar The Databaseview functions include Creating and Def
376. s the printer for the user The location of the printer Shipping and Receiving and size type of media loaded 4 inch X 6 inch paper media are examples of what can be stored here Printer Manufacturer Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided Printer Model 237 Printed Documentation Select the printer model to be used Type of Port Select the type of port the device is attached to The options are Serial Parallel USB Network Windows or IP Some of these options may or may not be available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected Port Select the port to which the printer is attached Concurrent Access Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture computers If serial port interrupts are not known do not select concurrent access This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing Use Hardware Handshake Select Yes to use a hardware handshake Select No to use an XON XOFF handshake Baud Rate Indicate the baud rate used Baud rates may vary on different printers Cutter Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability While designing the format if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you may choose e Do not cut e Cut after each Format e Cut after each Batch e Cut after each Job Set
377. s you are using For Example under Windows 98 Dr Watson is located in the Windows subdirectory but Dr Watson is located in the Windows System32 subdirectory when using Windows XP To have Dr Watson running each time Windows is started Copy Dr Watson into the Windows Start Menu Programs Start Up folder Incorrect User ID The USER ID was entered incorrectly Check the proper user identification spelling and re enter Incorrect Password The PASSWORD was entered incorrectly Check the proper password spelling and re enter 382 Appendices Ineligible Field Name Used Attempt to use a field name not listed Initialization error Insufficient memory Invalid Character in Field Name An invalid character was entered in a field name Invalid Command Line Option Check that the Command Line was typed correctly then try again Invalid Operand In Clause An invalid operand was specified in a clause in the command file Invalid Field Length Contains decimal point Me Matching database record cannot be found Missing entry Missing or Invalid Configuration File Probable Cause LABEL CFG is not in the same directory as EASY EXE or file is bad copy file to proper directory or copy file from backup disk Cannot proceed with execution of the software Ne Name already exists please choose another name No existing files No Fields Specified No fields specified for an index value No printer modules found No
378. screen Once all specification data is entered you will be returned to the Edit screen You will be instructed to define the size of the picture You can use the mouse or the arrow keys Placing the picture field on the format display is similar to the process of placing a box field on the format Use the arrow keys or drag with mouse When you have successfully placed and sized the area for the picture the software will read in the picture and add it to the format It will be displayed in the proper size Each of the picture data items are described below Horizontal Position Enter the Horizontal Position of the field Vertical Position Enter the Vertical Position of the field Field Name A name to associate with the field Can be up to 32 characters long The name is necessary if you will be recording the value of this field in a format tracking report copying data from this field into another field using this field s data in a Linked Field or filling this field using the Command File facility Comment Enter an optional comment for the field Used in reports Field Width Enter the Width of the field in inches and hundredths of inches Field Height 74 Designing Formats Enter the Height of the field in inches and hundredths of inches Source of Data The data for this field can be one of the following Fixed e When Printed e Database Field Direction The field can be printed in any of the 4 following orienta
379. se the arrow keys or use the HOME and END keys to reposition the field When the box is in the desired location release the mouse button or press ENTER The field will be displayed in the new location You can also select Edit Move Field from the menu bar to move a field or group of fields Erasing a Field To erase a field Select the field you wish to erase and click the Erase Field icon from the main toolbar or choose Edit Erase Field from the menu You will be prompted with a message asking you to confirm that you wish to erase the field Changing an Existing Format You are prompted for the name of an existing format The last format used is the default name displayed At the same time an alphabetized listing of the present format files in your directory will be displayed across the screen in the Open Dialog box To display information regarding a file highlight the filename and a description along with a thumbnail preview of the format will be shown at the bottom of the Open box Designing Formats Viewing Changing a Field This selection allows you to review the properties for a field You may then make changes or simply view the properties without making changes For box and line fields this will be equivalent to the Move Field option For pictures the field may be resized as well as repositioned The screen will now change to show the selected field s Property dialog box They will be displayed in the same format as
380. sen typeface is a TrueType font Character Spacing Enter the vertical distance between characters from the baseline of the first character to the baseline of the next character in inches Enter 0 for default spacing Character Formatting If you want to specially format parts of the text field select one or more alternate styles Enter blank for no special formatting of characters The purpose of Character Formatting is to apply special effects to text within a paragraph Special effects include bold ta ic underline PP and subscript YOU have the ability to select a single special effect or multiple effects up to 4 For each special effect selected you are given an additional screen item prompt Special Effect Character Enter a toggle character for the special effect The toggle character will become a non printing character which can be used to bracket words or phrases that you want to appear in the special effect style For example to highlight a word to be underlined you can use the exclamation point as the toggle character After the toggle character is defined the exclamation point character can be placed before and after the word or phrase that you want underlined The special effect toggle character can also be embedded in an external file or a database memo field For When Printed paragraph fields the toggle character can be used when entering data on the prompt line Center Justify This option
381. serial number Link What is a Linked Field Link data from 2 12 fields This function will allow you to tie together data from different fields on a format to be printed together in one large field Number of Link Fields The number of fields that will be combined to form this field You can choose a number between 2 and 12 Link Field n The source of the data for each linked field you have defined Choices of existing fields or special identifiers appear in the dialog box You may also enter a value enclosed in double quotes To link a bar code Function 1 Function 2 Function 3 or Function 4 character select the appropriate function character from the list BACK to TOP Database Printed Documentation The information or data that will be used to fill this field on the format will come from a database file You will be asked to specify the database file name and the name of the field containing the data or information to be used A maximum of three different databases may be accessed in one format For each database accessed the name of the search field and an operator prompt will be required You will only be required to supply a search field name and an operator prompt once for each new database used Before printing the format the operator will be prompted for the value of the search field to be found The software will search the database until a matching record is found The matching record will then be used to supply d
382. set Latin and Kana in accordance with JIS X 0201 4 Kanji characters Shift JIS value 8140HEX 9FFCHEX and E040HEX EAA4HEX These are values shifted from those of JIS X 0208 Refer to JIS X 0208 Annex 1 Shifted Coded Representation for detail Representation of Data A dark module is a binary one and a light module is a binary zero Symbol Size not including quiet zone Model 1 21 x 21 modules to 73 x 73 modules Versions 1 to 14 increasing in steps of 4 modules per side Model 2 21 x 21 modules to 177 x 177 modules Versions 1 to 40 increasing in steps of 4 modules per side 368 Bar Code Information Data Characters per Symbol for maximum symbol size Model 1 Version 14 L Model 2 Version 40 L 1 numeric data 1 167 characters 7 089 characters 2 alphanumeric data 707 characters 4 296 characters 3 8 bit byte data 486 characters 2 953 characters 4 Kanji data 299 characters 1 817 characters Selectable Error Correction Four levels of Reed Solomon error correction allowing recovery of L 7 M 15 Q 25 H 30 Of the symbol codewords Code Type Matrix Orientation Independence Yes SuperCode History and Overview 369 Printed Documentation SuperCode is a packet bar code symbology a variant of a multi row symbology There are precise rules for the horizontal placement of symbol characters in a packet but greater freedom in placing packets vertically and horizontally than offered
383. should be enclosed in single quotes The LIKE comparison operator can be used to perform pattern matching A percent sign represents ANY STRING of characters and an _ underscore represents ANY SINGLE CHARACTER The database will be searched for all records which match the given criterion and only those records will be printed Starting Record The number of the record in which to START printing from Type in ALL to print all records in the database Ending Record The number of the record in which to STOP printing Hold Job Select No to let the job begin printing as soon as possible or Select Yes to hold the job initially The hold job prompt will allow you to begin printing the job as soon as possible or to hold the job initially The default for this prompt is No which will typically be the case You might be using two different types of stock to print your formats on and want to answer No for all jobs that will use the stock you have loaded in the printer and Yes for jobs that will require a stock change Also you may answer Yes if you wish to stack multiple jobs for printing later Description Enter a job description if desired This will allow you to type in a short memory aid such as a part number customer name or format type so if you need to modify this job once it is in the print queue you will be able to distinguish it from other jobs The following message will now be displayed Format Being Added to Format Req
384. sier To ensure better precision when placing fields on the label use the Snap to Grid feature To enable the Display Grid option select View Display Grid from the menu bar or click the Display Grid icon Tool Bars Standard Tool Bar The Standard Tool Bar provides the following functions e Create a New label format database or serial File e Open an existing label format database serial file or report e Save opened file e Print a batch of formats e View or change Print Queue e Test Print the opened format or tracking report e Cut e Copy e Paste 94 View e Choose group of fields e Erase Field e Lock Field e Move Field e View and Change Field Specification e Undo e Change Format Specification e Close option and Cancel Current Function To display the Standard Tool Bar Select View Toolbars from the menu bar Ifa check mark appears next to its name it is already displayed Drawing The drawing toolbar provides the following functions e Create Barcode using Wizard e Add Barcode Field e Add Multi Source Barcode Field e Add Text Field e Add Multi Source Text Field e Add Line Field e Add Box Field e Add Picture Field e Add Circle or Ellipse Field e Change Mouse Pointer to Magnifying lens e Restore Mouse Pointer e Zoom Level To display the Drawing Tool Bar Select View Toolbars from the menu bar Ifa check mark appears next to its name it is already displayed Function The Function Toolb
385. signed for a Postscript printer 121 Printed Documentation Color pictures can be printed in color to a color printer from within the software under the following criteria If your image has no color information accompanying it then the software can not use the image In this case the image will not print properly If your image has color information accompanying it then the software does not have a problem printing the image For example if your image was saved as a 16 7 million color image the image has no color information accompanying it If the image was saved as a 256 color image the image will have color information accompanying it You are now presented with the picture specification screen Once all specification data is entered you will be returned to the Edit screen You will be instructed to define the size of the picture You can use the mouse or the arrow keys Placing the picture field on the format display is similar to the process of placing a box field on the format Use the arrow keys or drag with mouse When you have successfully placed and sized the area for the picture the software will read in the picture and add it to the format It will be displayed in the proper size Each of the picture data items are described below Horizontal Position Enter the Horizontal Position of the field Vertical Position Enter the Vertical Position of the field Field Name A name to associate with the field Can be up to
386. signments Western Telematic Western Telematic Western Telematic Switchbox 41 41a Switchbox 161a Cable Switchbox 81c 9 Pin Cable Configuration Configuration Cable Configuration Western Telematic d Setup for Sato 8400 6 Setup for Sato 8400 Switchbox 81c 25 Pin and 8400 8 8400RV and 8450 Cable Configuration Setup for Sato CL608 Setup for Sato CL408 and 8480s Sup a E and CL412 Parallel Printing Internal Time Stamp Multi Buffer 9 Pin Cable Configuration 25 Pin Cable Configuration Bidirectional 9 Pin Cable Configuration In order to support the Cancel command from the Sato printer the software must be configured for Bidirectional printing Configuration for bidirectional printing is done as follows e Select Bidirectional in the printer setup e You must have a Bidirectional cable attached e The printer protocol must be set for Status 2 or 4 225 Printed Documentation In order for the Cancel command to properly function the following should be noted e Jobs in the Print Queue which have a graphic must be in a Frozen Status Then subsequent jobs will need to be Unfrozen as needed e Jobs in the print queue which do not have a graphic can be in a Frozen or Unfrozen state Bidirectional 25 Pin Cable Configuration In order to support the Cancel command from the Sato printer the software must be configured for Bidirectional printing Configuration for bidirectional printing is done as follows
387. specifies which existing data source stores the information about how to connect to the desired database Either a file DSN or system DSN can be used TABLE short code T The TABLE clause is of the form TABLE tablename or T tablename Where tablename specifies the name of the table to retrieve data from If you wish to use the Variable Table option enter for the table name KEYFIELD short code k The KEYFIELD clause is of the form KEYFIELD fieldname or K fieldname Where fieldname specifies the name of the field to be used as a search key DATAFIELD short code D The DATAFIELD clause is of the form DATAFIELD fieldname or D fieldname Where fieldname specifies the name of the field to be used as printed data RECORD short code R The RECORD clause is of the form RECORD string1 string2 string or R string1 string2 string RECORD specifies the record s searched for within the key field DIVIDE short code V The DIVIDE clause is of the form DIVIDE string or V string Or DIVIDE 2 or V 2 Where string is a text character string that will separate each record If DIVIDE is set equal to a number the software will insert that many blank lines after each record If no value for DIVIDE is specified a carriage return will be added to start the next record on a new line The entire string must be enclosed in braces and clauses must be separated by semi colons Example gt N RISKSAFETY T GERMA
388. ss Enter The polygon will be added to the format and displayed on the screen Enable Printing Select Yes to print the field on the format Select No to display the field on the format but do not print the field Select Conditional to specify a print criterion for the field Field Width 115 Printed Documentation Enter the width of the field in inches and hundredths of inches Horizontal Thickness Enter the Horizontal Thickness of the box in inches and hundredths of inches Vertical Thickness Enter the Vertical Thickness of the box in inches and hundredths of inches Outlined Select Yes to outline the shape with a solid line Field Height Enter the Height of the field in inches and hundredths of inches BACK to TOP Circle or Ellipse Field Adding a Circle or Ellipse Field Adding gt Circle Field Name Comment Horizontal or Ellipse Position Enable Printing Field Width Field Height Line Thickness Fill Pattern Gray Level Adding a Circle or Ellipse You will be instructed to define the location and size of the circle or ellipse then place it on the format You will need to move the pointer to increase or decrease the size of the circle or ellipse The circle will appear on the display as you use the mouse or arrow keys to expand or contract the area of the circle When you have expanded the circle to the proper size release the mouse button or press ENTER 116 Insert For printers that support outlined circles
389. ss row scans can be successfully used Selectable levels of error correction Options Concatenation Global Label Identifiers Truncated PDF417 QR Code History and Overview Denso of Japan developed QR Code Quick Response Code as a 2 D matrix symbology having position detection patterns on its three corners QR Code features mass data capacity high data density and error correction ability ultra high speed omni directional reading and Japanese Kana Kanji representation 367 Printed Documentation QR Code is in the public domain and it is read by using CCD array cameras and image processing technology because of the layout of the finder pattern QR Code symbols are square in shape and can easily be identified by their finder pattern of nested alternating dark and light squares at three corners of the symbol Maximum symbol size is 177 modules square capable of encoding 7366 numeric characters or 4464 alpha numeric characters One important feature of the symbology is its ability to encode directly Japanese Kanji and Kana characters QR Code is designed for rapid reading using CCD array cameras and image processing technology because of the layout of the finder pattern Specifications Models Mode 1 original version Mode 2 enhanced version Character Set 1 numeric data digits O 9 2 alphanumeric data digits O 9 upper case letters A Z nine other characters space 3 8 bit data JIS 8 bit character
390. stroy any copies in printed or machine readable form in whole or in part not transferred At the time you transfer possession your license is automatically terminated On any copy you must retain and reproduce any copyright notices contained in the software You may not use copy or transfer the software or any copies in printed or machine readable form in whole or in part except as expressly provided in this agreement 3 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES Printed Documentation The author has taken due care in preparing this software The author makes no warranties either expressed or implied in regard to this software The author does not warrant that the software will meet your specific requirements or that the software will be error free In no event shall the author be liable to you for any damages incidental or consequential arising out of the use or performance of this software Getting and Using Help Online Help Visit Our Website Visit us at www tharo com for Products Technical Support Downloadable Software and Drivers News and much more Problem Cause Solution If you need additional help visit the Technical support page of our website at http www tharo com support_easylabel php Search our extensive Problem Cause Solution database post a message to our Message Board or download documentation on a variety of solutions Getting Started How to get started Before You Begin It would also be beneficial for all us
391. t It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX interface Printer Description The Printer Description parameter is optional You may enter a description that further identifies the printer for the user The location of the printer Shipping and Receiving and size type of media loaded 4 inch X 6 inch paper media are examples of what can be stored here Printer Manufacturer Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided Printer Model Select the printer model to be used Type of Port Select the type of port the device is attached to The options are Serial Parallel USB Network Windows or IP Some of these options may or may not be available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected Port Select the port to which the printer is attached Concurrent Access Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture computers If serial port interrupts are not known do not select concurrent access This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing 211 Printed Documentation Use Hardware Handshake Select Yes to use a hardware handshake Select No to use an XON XOFF handshake Direct Print Select direct print to send data directly to the port For a shared or network printer be sure direct print is not selected This option appears for those pri
392. t lines and boxes to any number of supported bar code thermal thermal transfer printers as well as dot matrix laser ink jet printers and any Windows Printer Driver including color printers With its WYSIWYG What You See Is What You Get interface designing labels is extremely fast and accurate saving you time and money in label production Once the label is designed you have the flexibility to print thousands of the same label You can also print individual unique labels by reading information from a database an external text file serial file operator entered variable data or data from an external input device Database capabilities provide a powerful and flexible system for handling many different types of variable data such as text graphics and external text files It comes complete with its own dBASE compatible database It provides complete connectivity to all 32 bit ODBC Open DataBase Connectivity compliant databases including Access Oracle Paradox Btrieve AS 400 and Sybase The software allows a specific incrementing serial number to be embedded into a database field and this allows each record to have a unique serial number When printing a format this serial number is automatically updated in the serial file Command files can be used to trigger the software from within other applications With ActiveX object controls you can easily interact with any 32 bit Windows application making integration a
393. t 318 320 Index N NN as 128 Name 2D symbologies 353 barcodes 27 Command File 320 Copied Field 394 Copy Field 108 150 Name 27 108 150 173 320 353 394 Name When Printed 4s 128 154 Name ext 154 Name Path Define 157 271 273 Name Path 157 271 273 Names variables 394 403 Narrow Ratio 335 336 338 344 Navigator 96 NDC az 128 NDX 391 NEC 15 Net Data Density 358 Network 161 168 177 182 187 194 204 210 216 221 234 241 250 262 Network Address 171 Network Printing 262 New button 275 New Database Create 275 Defining 275 439 Printed Documentation New Database 275 New Database Structure Creating 275 New Database Structure 275 New Field Add 38 275 Insert 275 New Field 38 275 New Format Printing 267 New Format 267 New Format Name 27 New icon 36 309 New Printer Add 257 New Printer 257 News 7 36 94 275 309 NN as 128 NN NE as 128 NNE 48 128 Nnn 320 Nominal Element Size 364 Non 258 Non alphanumeric 381 Non data Overhead 333 369 None 34 264 Non interactive 318 440 Non Numeric Data 4s 128 Non rectangular 369 Normal 4s 128 218 Normal Field 4s 128 Normal Text 19 NOT 17 394 403 Not Installed 161 168 177 182 187 194 204 208 210 216 221 234 241 250 NOT LIKE 403 NOTE 14 17 38 39 48 73 79 82 83 86 87 99 108 109 121 126 128 148 150 153 168 179 184 190 197 206 208 213 215 225 234 241 2
394. t Edited Formats 85 Recent Reports 85 86 311 Recent Serial Files 85 86 309 Index Recognize wildcard 281 Recognize 281 Record Selection 264 Records Aisle 39 48 99 128 264 Appending 287 Ending 264 Printing 284 Starting 264 Text file 311 Records 39 48 99 128 264 284 287 311 Recreate want 281 Recreate 281 Recreate Database File 281 Red Reset button pressing 31 218 Red Reset button 31 218 Redisplayed 38 82 90 269 Reduced Space Symbology 372 Reed Solomon 333 364 Reed Solomon levels 364 367 number 362 Reed Solomon 353 360 362 364 367 369 Reflective Sensor 28 447 Printed Documentation Regular 69 112 Regular Polygon 69 112 Re index 285 Re index Database 286 Re index Database icon 286 Re index icon 285 Remove Item 109 151 Replace File 3 Report Creating 311 Enter 284 311 Printing 311 Test Print 311 Writing 314 Report 284 311 314 Report Data choosing 311 Report Data 39 48 99 128 311 Report File Uploading 385 Report File 95 311 385 Report Parameters Changing 313 Report Parameters 313 Report Title 284 311 Representation 367 394 Reprint 31 218 Reseller 171 331 381 448 Reseller AFTER 381 Re Send Downloaded Data 17 Reset List 109 151 Resetting 206 Resizing Fields 83 Resizing 83 Restore Mouse Pointer 95 Restoring Print Queue 261 381 Restoring 261 381 Retail 353 Retail Store 346 Return Edit 78 Return 78 Return line 394 Reverse Fi
395. t Head True Type Fonts Intercharacter Formats Temperature Space ee RS Thermabar Qualabar RS Parallel Centronix 232 Communications er Dip Switches Dip Switches Communications Qualabar RS Qualabar 232 Parallel Centronix 218 Thermabar RS 232 Communications Printing Communications Dip Switches Dip Switches Printable Characters The software allows you to define character heights and widths A printer problem exists for characters larger than about 3 4 Printing width characters approaching 3 4 or greater may cause erratic results Characters may disappear strange lines may appear or the printer may lock if larger characters are used Font H Tipton Gothic font should not be used on a format where the Print Area Height is greater than 10 inches Field Direction Tipton Gothic Fixed allows Left to Right field orientation only Tipton Gothic Proportional allows Left to Right field orientation only Rotatable allows Normal field orientation only All other internal printer fonts allow Normal and Stacked field orientations TrueType fonts allow Normal and Stacked field orientations Stacked Fields Stacked fields are fields where characters are printed below one another instead of next to one another To allow for this on the RJS you are presented with a choice for Normal or Stacked Letter Orientation When a Stacked Letter Orientation is selected you can choose from 4 different stacked Field Directions
396. t can be stored here Printer Manufacturer Select the Manufacturer of the printer from the list provided Printer Model Select the model of printer to be used Type of Port Select the type of port the device is attached to The choices are Serial Parallel Network IP or USB Depending on the printer selected the USB option may not be available since not all printers support the USB interface Port Select the type of port the device is attached to The options are Serial Parallel USB Network Windows or IP Some of these options may or may not be available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected Concurrent Access Select concurrent access if serial ports have separate or sharable interrupts Sharable interrupts are not supported for Industry Standard Architecture computers If serial port interrupts are not known do not select concurrent access This option appears for those printers that can be configured for serial printing Use Hardware Handshake Select Yes to use a hardware handshake Select No to use an XON XOFF handshake Baud Rate Indicate the baud rate used Baud rates may vary on different printers Device Attached 188 Printing Enter the type of device that is attached to the port The choices are Printer Western Telematic 4 way Switch 8 way Switch or 16 way Switch Printer Address When configuring a printer that is attached to a Western Telematic Switch Box enter the number on
397. t number printed on the format but you do want it included in the report that is generated You will need to generate a field defining your part number disable the printing of the field and enable the report data function You could also use this function to put a message on the screen for your operator Such as the color or size stock that this format should be printed on Enter Y to print the field on the format Enter N to display the field on the format but do not print the field Enter C to specify a print criterion for the field See Appearance to learn how to change the color of non printing fields Print Criterion Enter the condition for which this field should be printed The condition entered is an expression that can contain currently defined field names numeric or alphabetic constants mathematic operators comparison operators or logical operators Numeric or alphabetic constants need to be enclosed in double quotes For example you can create a text field that has a fixed value of SALE You only want this field to print when the PRICE field is less than 6 99 You can select Conditional Print for the field named SALE and type the following expression in for Print Criterion PRICE lt 6 99 Where PRICE is the field name you want to compare lt is the comparison operator LESS THAN and 6 99 is the value to match The SALE field will now only print when the value of the PRICE field is less than 6 99 Anothe
398. t printer for this format if you have more than one printer connected to the system displaymsg The d splaymsg clause is of the form displaymsg variabletext The purpose of a sp aymsg is to institute a planned pause in a Command File to display a message on the screen To restart the Command File you simply press any key The variable text must be enclosed in single quotes or double quotes Jobdescription The jobdescription clause is of the form jobdescriptior variable text The purpose of the jobaescription clause is to include a brief description of the print job for identification purposes This is helpful if you need to modify the job once it is in the print queue Once the print job is in the print queue it will be possible to distinguish one job from another The variable text must be enclosed in single quotes or double quotes singlejob 323 Printed Documentation The singlejob clause is of the form singlejob on or singlejob oft The purpose of s ng ejob is to process one command file job at a time If you have multiple jobs in a command file jobs will be released to the print queue one at a time and sent to the printer much faster if sing ejob is turned on If singlejob is turned off jobs in the command file will not be released to the print queue and sent to the printer until the entire command file is processed The default value for the s ng ejob clause is off where The where clause
399. t to exceed 20 characters The UCC EAN Application Identifiers provide an open standard which can be used and understood by all companies in the trading chain regardless of the company that originally issued the codes Identification Numbers 348 Bar Code Information These Als contain data to identify An article the data field includes the EAN 8 EAN 13 or EAN 14 item identification number The Al for an article is 01 plus up to a 14 digit number A logistic unit which must be given a unique serial number called the Serial Shipping Container Code SSCC It provides companies with a facility to identify logistic units pallets drums rolls for tracking and tracing purposes The SSCC Al is 00 followed by an 18 digit number identifying the individual transport packages This code can be used for tracking the packages and used for reception operations A returnable asset the data field includes the EAN 13 number of the asset plus an optional serial number Traceability Numbers and Dates These Als allow data to be encoded that provides traceability of individual products or dispatch units throughout the supply chain This category includes Batch Lot Number Serial Number Production Date Minimum Durability Date and Maximum Durability Date Measurements and Quantities These Als allow quantities and trade measurements to be encoded for items which may vary in content quantity length weight etc and logistical measurement
400. ta being received FieldName 395 Printed Documentation FieldName is the variable field on the label that is being filled in with the scanned in data This item could appear more than once if there is more than one variable field being filled by the scanned data From the LABELCOM screen you are given the opportunity to Change the setup or to quit Clicking the Quit button will close the LABELCOM program If you need to view or change the LABELCOM settings click on Change Setup In the LABELCOM setup screen you will be presented with several screen Filename Enter the name of the file used to store the setup parameters or the name of an existing file to recall Port Select the port through which input data will be received Baud Rate Select or enter the baud rate of the input device This selection must match the baud rate that the input device is configured for Data Bits Select a value for Data Bits Choose a number from 4 to 8 This selection must match the number of data bits your input device is configured for Stop Bits Select a value for Stop Bits Choose 1 1 5 or 2 This selection must match the Stop Bit your input device is configured for Parity Select a value for Parity from the list Choices are 0 None 1 Odd 2 Even 3 Mark 4 Space This selection must match the Parity setting your input device is configured for Flow Control Select the method for input flow control Enter 0 if unknown Choic
401. tabase field This will allow fields to be displayed during label creation using this length Note that if more characters exist than that specified for the typical length all characters up to the maximum amount specified will be used A value of 0 indicates that there is no typical field length Prompt Number If the field s Source of Data is When Printed or Database the software provides the user with control over the order of data input prompts by allowing the user to specify edit the order in which prompts will appear on the screen This feature will allow flexibility in designing user input screens Design Test Value Leave this entry BLANK to use the default screen and field width representation or enter a string of characters which more closely represents typical printed data to help with label design BACK to TOP Copied Name of Copy Field If the field is defined as Copied you must select the name of the copy field which will supply the data for this field To copy a bar code check digit choose the bar code field name with the symbol before it Available field names are listed in the dialog box TRUECOUNT TRUECOUNT allows you to print the number of batches printed of a label on that label To use TRUECOUNT create a Linked or Copied field and select 150 Insert TRUECOUNT The value of TRUECOUNT is taken from the number of batches entered by the user on the print request screen Link What is a
402. tabase file in a logical order rather than a physical order Physical order is the order in which records were entered Logical order is an alphabetical chronological or numerical order based on a specified field type 279 Printed Documentation With the exception of logical and memo fields any field type can be indexed An index may consist of an expression of 2 fields however this expression must consist of only 1 field type Because of the software s compatibility with dBASE Ill Ill and IV updating a database file in dBASE is possible If an index file exists but is not updated at the same time the database is updated the first time you access the database in the software a Dialog Box will appear stating that the index is out of date At this time you can choose OK to update the index or Cancel ESC to continue without updating the index file If you choose Cancel each time you access this database the Dialog Box will appear BACK to TOP Adding an Index File Adding an Index File Each database can have up to 7 index files associated with it Index values may be composed of a single field or an expression involving several fields Example If your database is a customer database and the structure contains customer information fields such as FIRSTNAME LASTNAME ADDRESS and STATE you may want to organize your data by a certain category By organizing the data quicker and more efficient searches can be done If you want t
403. tching devices may be obtained from WESTERN TELEMATIC INC 5 Sterling Irvine CA 92718 USA 714 586 9950 800 854 7226 Fax 714 583 9514 www wti com If you are using a Western Telematic Switch formats that contain TrueType font text fields cannot be downloaded as a font to the printer through the Western Telematic Switch Box The Western Telematic does not allow TrueType fonts to be downloaded When using TrueType font text fields on a format and a Western Telematic Switch you must download the font as a graphic When configured for a Tharo printer you can configure the software to send TrueType fonts as a graphic by specifying N for the Download Fonts screen item in the Format Specification Screen Western Telematic Switchbox 41 Dip Switches Western Telematic Switchbox 41a Dip Switches Western Telematic Switchbox 81c Dip Switches Printed Documentation The CAS 81C 8 way Switch Box is equipped with a set of 8 position or 10 position Dip Switches as follows Western Telematic Switchbox 161a Dip Switches Western Telematic Switchbox 41 41a 161a Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switchbox 81c Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switch Box Printer Assignments If a third CAS 41 Code Activated Switch is connected to the PC above printer assignments would be 9 through 12 The same would be true for the CAS 161A where the first switch box would go to Printers 1 through 16 the second switch box w
404. ted field up the database structure Move Down Will move an inserted field down the database structure BACK to TOP Opening a Table The Databaseview editor internally supports the following four database file formats Access mdb dBase dbf Excel xls and Extensible Markup Language xml It is important to note that xls and xml files will be in a read only format If you require the ability to view and edit other database formats in the editor an OLE DB connection will have to be established To open one of the supported database file formats click the Open icon on the standard toolbar or select File Open from the menu bar You will then be presented with the Select Database File dialog box at which point you should browse to the directory where your database files are stored The supported database files will appear in alphabetical order Select the database file you wish to open and click the Open button A Tables dialog box will appear This dialog box contains a list of all the defined tables for the chosen database Select the table you wish to open and click OK The table will now be displayed by default in Datasheet View If you wish to select a different table from the active database click the Select a Table icon on the Edit toolbar or select File Tables from the menu bar You will then be presented with the tables dialog box that lists all of the available tables for that database Select the table you wis
405. ten to a file called n dat where n is the number of the printer number defined and is the number specified on the getstatus line If you have multiple printers defined and attached to your PC and you would like to retrieve the status from the printer in which the jobs are currently printing printer number 3 for example the command would be getstatus useprinter 3 The status will be written to a file called 3 dat The getstatus useprinter command can only be used with a Fargo Datamax Zebra Intermec or an Apollo printer clear useprinter The clear useprinter clause is of the form clear useprinternumber The clear useprinter command can be used to clear the current label format from the print buffer If you have multiple printers defined and attached to your PC and you would like to clear a label from the print buffer of the printer in which the jobs are currently printing printer number 3 for example the command would be clear useprinter 3 The clear useprinter command can only be used with a Fargo Datamax printer close The close clause is of the form close 327 Printed Documentation When issued the close command will exit the label software Commands and Switches The program will watch the hard disk for any changes to the specified Command File When changes are made the Command File will be executed within one quarter of a second Command File Monitoring can also be set within the program configura
406. teps 2 and 3 and entering the following for Calculation in step 4 SS BARDATA 1 1 9 SS BARDATA 2 1 8 SS BARDATA 3 1 7 SS BA RDATA 4 1 6 SS BARDATA 5 1 5 SS BARDATA 6 1 4 SS BARDATA 7 1 3 SS BARDATA 8 1 2 SS BARDATA 9 1 1 9 BACK to TOP Appendix H Advanced Programming Functions Advanced Programming Functions Calculating a Check Digit Arithmetic Expression summary Advanced Programming Functions Calculating a Check Digit The following example calculates an unsupported MOD 9 check digit 1 Create a text field and name it BARDATA Choose Fixed for Source of Data Enter 010583005 for the Fixed Data 2 Create another text field and name it DIGIT 1 Choose Arithmetic for Source of Data Enter SUBSTRING BARDATA 1 1 for Calculation EE 3 Create 8 more text fields and name them DIGIT2 through DIGIT9 Choose Arithmetic for Source of Data 403 Printed Documentation Enter SUBSTRING BARDATA x 1 for Calculation where x 2 for the second field and so on up to 9 a 4 Create another text field and name it TOTAL Choose Arithmetic for Source of Data Enter DIGIT 1 9 DIGIT2 8 DIGIT3 7 DIGIT4 6 DIGIT5 5 DIGIT6 4 DIGI T7 3 DIGIT8 2 DIGIT9 1 9 for Calculation Enter 2 for Decimal Places Choose Custom Numeric Amount Format for Special Formatting Enter 99 99 for Format String 5 Create another text field and name it CHECKSUM Choose
407. ter each Batch Cut after each Job Calendar Option Select Yes if your printer has the calendar option clock chip installed This will allow formats that contain date time fields to be handled internally in the printer and be updated to reflect the current date time when the label is printed Select No to download the date time from the program Set Printer Darkness Select Yes to allow software to set printer darkness This will override any darkness setting defined in the printer Select No to use printers darkness setting BACK to TOP Avery Dennison Cables 9 Pin Cable Configuration 25 Pin Cable Configuration 9 Pin Cable Configuration 25 Pin Cable Configuration BACK to TOP cab 162 Printing A Series A Series M Series and Mach Setup i Printer Printer Printer Concurrent Printer Cutter Set Printer Direct Print Darkness Offset Clock Adjustment Adjustment Pause Download Before arkea Graphics Size of Gap Print Mode Printing Format Printer Name The Printer Name parameter is optional You may specify a name to uniquely identify this printer This name will show up in the print request screen and the queue s printer list It can also be referenced by command files and the ActiveX interface Printer Description The Printer Description parameter is optional You may enter a description that further identifies the printer for the user The location of the printer Shipping and Receiving and size ty
408. that get saved for formats serial files database files job lists etc Select No for the user to NOT be prompted to enter a username and password when on these files BACK to TOP Logging 20 Program Options Loa UserAciors User Log Maximum User User Log g Pathname Log Size Overwrite Log Add Event md ge Log Delete Event Log Login Event Log Failed Login Log Logout Log Password Format Change Event Event Change Event History Format History Log File Delete Log Prompt for Path Deletions Pathname Change Reason Create Print Database Database Log Log User Actions Selecting Yes enables logging of user actions such as changes to the user configuration or users logging in or out of the program User Log Pathname Enter or browse to the path where you would like the user logs stored This path should also include the name of the log file The default name for the user log is user log The User Log that is created is an encrypted file and the Log Reader must be used to view its contents Maximum User Log Size Enter the size limit of the user log file in Kilobyte 1000 byte increments For example enter 2000 to set the maximum log size to 2MB 2 megabytes The log file will then grow up to 2MB in size A value of 0 means that the size of the log file is not limited User Log Overwrite Select an option for processing user events in the case of the user log reaching its maximum size Overwrite Events as Needed means to
409. that the data has been printed before using this function Once erased the data cannot be recovered A Dialog Box will display a message asking you to confirm that you want to erase ALL data for ALL reports Click OK or press ENTER to confirm Click Cancel or press ESC to return to the Print Report screen 315 Advanced Activex What is Active X ELabelPrinter ELabelBatch Documentation and ELabelib ELabelinf Activex The software contains a set of ActiveX controls that can be easily embedded into Visual Basic applications or any other environment that supports ActiveX controls such as Visual C Microsoft Access etc The software s ActiveX controls allow middleware programmers to create programs that can use the internal functions of the software to print labels view job status preview the label prior to printing and many other features that in the past were only available from inside the software There are four controls available ELabelPrinter The ELabelPrinter control allows for finding out which printers are installed reading printer properties name model etc and for performing certain operations on the printers ELabelBatch The ELabelBatch control allows for composing a print job and submitting it to the print queue The programmer can simply supply a format name fill in the fields and number of batches and or batch size to define a job Once defined the job can be created ELabelJob The
410. the area to be occupied by the line When the pointer is properly positioned the following message will now appear Move to LOWER RIGHT CORNER of the line Press and hold the mouse button or press ENTER when done You can now use the mouse button to move to the opposite corner of the area for the line or you can use the arrow keys A solid rectangle will display the area as you use the arrow keys to expand or contract the area When you have expanded the rectangle to the proper size release the mouse button or press ENTER The completed line will be added to the format and shown on the format display Angled Lines are supported on some printers For printers that support shaded lines you will be presented with the Create Line Field Specification screen Each of the specification screen items are described below Field Name A name to associate with the field Can be up to 32 characters long The name is necessary if you will be recording the value of this field in a format tracking report 67 Printed Documentation copying data from this field into another field using this field s data in a Linked Field or filling this field using the Command File facility Comment Enter a comment for this field Horizontal Position Enter the horizontal position of the field Vertical Position Enter the vertical position of the field Enable Printing Select Yes to print the field on the format Select No to display the field on the format
411. the batch size You need to enter the batch size and then the number of batches to print For example if you want to print 100 sets of formats with an incremented serial number going from 001 to 100 and for each serial number you need six identical formats showing the serial number you will need to enter a batch size of 6 and the number of batches as 100 Record Selection Please indicate which records to print Select All to print ALL records Range to print a RANGE of records Marked to print only those records that are MARKED for printing or Conditional to print records with common values Entering All will print ALL records in the database Entering Range will allow you to printa RANGE of records You will need to specify the starting record number and the ending record number for the range Entering Marked will allow you to print MARKED records If you had previously viewed a database and selected individual records for printing then only the marked records will be printed Records that are marked for printing will remain marked until the user unmarks them from within the database Entering Conditional will allow you to print records with common values You will need to specify a condition in which to print the database records 265 Printed Documentation Where This should be a LOGICAL expression using the field names listed along with constants arithmetic operators comparison operators and logical operators String constants
412. the files stored there including the name date available memory and so on Memory Card Limitations Long filenames for database and serial files are not supported when using the Apollo printer and downloading them to the PCMCIA memory cards The table below displays the features that are available when using the Apollo memory card Field Type Source of Data Options oo QQ Database Character Field Types ONLY _ oo Copied Incrementation Decrementation oo Link Incrementation Decrementation_ Data Type Validation numeric alpha alphanumeric date upper case characters upper When Printed case alphabetic upper case alphanumeric Incrementation Decrementation When Printed Incrementation Decrementation Printer s Internal Calendar is Date used Numeric Serialized Incrementation Decrementation ONLY OOOO o Time Printers Internal Clock is used Arithmetic Graphics Fixed EI e O Rectangle o o O CI o e AA BACK to TOP 176 Printing C Itoh C Itoh Setup Printer Name Printer Printer Printer Model Description Manufacturer Concurrent Use Hardware Direct Print Device Attached Printer Address Handshake i Darkness Set Printer Clock Offset i Printer Name The Printer Name parameter is optional You may specify a name to uniquely identify this printer This name will show up in the print request screen and the queue s printer list It can also be reference
413. the following e Donotcut e Cut after each format e Cut after each batch e Cut after whole job BACK to TOP Changing Format Data When Printed Database Fields Fixed Fields When Printed Database Fields To change the variable data for When Printed or Database Fields click the Change Format Variable Data icon or choose Tools Change Format Data from the menu bar For When Printed Fields you can also right or left click on an individual field The format data input screen will now be displayed This screen shows the defined custom prompts for each variable field Below each prompt is an input area for the value of the field 269 Printed Documentation The highlight bar is moved from one area to the next by pressing the TAB key If there are more than 6 variable fields they are grouped in pages each page containing 6 prompts If there are more than 6 prompts you may use the PgUp and PgDn keys to move from one page to the next or previous page If you press the TAB key from the last variable field on a page you will move to the next page If you press the SHIFT TAB key from the top variable field on a page you will move to the previous page if any When all data has been entered press ENTER Each variable field and any copied fields will be redisplayed with the current data When printing formats that read data from a database you can view a list of database search keys To see the list click the down arrow next to the field in
414. the narrow bar element There are 17 characters in a GS7 DataBar Truncated that make up the linear barcode but only 13 are entered data There is a mandatory Application Identifier of 01 that is not part of the entered data The first character after the Application Identifier is the linkage flag The linkage flag determines whether there is a Composite 2D barcode associated with the linear barcode The linkage flag will either be a 1 true or O false This character is not included in the entered data and will not appear in the scan The next 14 digits will be the entered 13 characters plus a check digit that is calculated by the software If less than 13 characters are entered zeros will be padded in the data after the linkage character to make up the correct amount of characters Instructions Thirteen digits must be entered for a linear GS7 DataBar Truncated If the thirteen digits are not entered leading zeros will be added When creating a composite barcode a pipe symbol must be used when separating the data between the linear and 2D barcodes Example A linear barcode with an X dimension of 010 0 25mm would be 0 13 3 25mm high Using the data 0001234567890 will create a linear GS7 DataBar Truncated with a human readable of 01 00012345678905 The 01 is the Application Identifier and the last 5 is the check digit 01 00012345678905 When creating a composite barcode data such as 11010064 14909 372772892887 1662
415. the next format Label Sensor Indicate which type of gap sensing is appropriate for the label stock being used Choices vary based on the printer being used and may be any of the following e See Through Sensor e Reflective Sensor Top e Reflective Sensor Bottom On Printronix printers ONLY these last two selections are also available e Advanced Gap Used when using media that has liner gaps between die cut labels with black background on Printronix printers e Advanced Notch Used when using media with notches or holes that interrupt a black vertical line on the underside of the media on Printronix printers TEC Printers Provide ONLY the following selections for Label Sensor e Transmissive Sensor Using Normal Labels e Reflective Sensor Using Normal Labels e Transmissive Sensor Using Preprinted Labels e Reflective Sensor Using a manual threshold value 29 Printed Documentation Dot Expansion When adding a new format select 1 2 or 3 to specify the dot size expansion to be used The higher the number the greater the potential print speed and the lower the character resolution Print Speed Different values will allow for printing at different speeds Speed control allows you to enhance print quality on some formats Expect some degradation in print quality at the higher speeds Backfeed Speed If the firmware level of the printer supports it this option will set the Backfeed Speed Backfeed Speed refers to the speed that th
416. the symbology Available for certain symbologies only Row Size Enter the number of data code words in each row Each code word represents about 2 characters Error Security Level Enter a number for the level of security desired Zero 0 provide error detection only Higher numbers increase the symbol size and error correction capability Truncate Symbol Select Yes to omit the right hand row indicators and stop pattern Select No to print the full symbol Interpretation The interpretation refers to the human readable characters printed either below a horizontal bar code or to the side of a vertical bar code One of several Human Readable Interpretations is available to you depending on your choice of symbology and field direction Typically human readable interpretation is not available for 2D codes Bar Code Height The height of the bars that make up the bar code This can have a value from 1 inches to 3 9 inches or 1mm to 100mm Added Characters 42 Designing Formats Following is a list of the additional options available when choosing Code 128 B or Code 128 C No Additional Characters Function 1 Mod 43 Check Digit Function 1 Mod 10 Check Digit Function 1 Only Mod 43 Only Mod 10 Only Bar Code Ratio This is the ratio of the wide to narrow elements of a bar code Bar Width Multiplier The number of dots used to define the narrow element of a bar code This allows you to establish the density of your ba
417. ting file will contain one fixed length line for each record of tracking data Each line will be terminated by a carriage return line feed sequence Within the record each field will occupy a fixed number of columns equal to the field length There will be no separators between fields Sample report file after being written to a text file 06 20 93 2 25 SAMPLE 20 data123 12345xyz 06 22 93 4 01 SAMPLE 18 test1111ABCDEFEE After the report is written you will be returned to the Print Report display screen Each of the report file extract data items are described below Output File Enter the name of the text file you want to create The name entered can include a drive designator and path Include Fields Indicates which fields are to be included in the report by choosing from the list shown Fields are printed in the sequence that they were chosen Erasing Format Tracking Data 314 Reports This function erases all data records in the format tracking data file for the selected format You should be sure that the data has been printed before using this function Once erased the data cannot be recovered A Dialog Box message will be displayed asking you to confirm that you do want the data erased Click OK or press ENTER to confirm Click Cancel or press ESC to return to the Print Report screen Erasing ALL Tracking Data This function erases ALL data records for the tracking reports in a specific directory You should be sure
418. tion angle and the shape of the arc of the field You should now rotate the box to the appropriate angle As you move the box the degree of the slant appears in the coordinates box on the lower right side of the screen You will now be prompted to define the shape of the arc of the field Adjust SHAPE Use arrows then ENTER or drag with mouse 51 Printed Documentation Moving the pointer towards the top of screen will make the top of the letters curve more Moving the pointer towards the bottom of the screen will make the bottom of the letter curve more When you have successfully placed and sized the area for the circular arc field release the mouse button or press ENTER Source of Data The data for the field can be one of the following When Printed External File Name When Printed Database Indirect Special Formatting This function allows for specialized formatting of data Following are the available options e No special formatting e Short Date Short Date Example 10 JAN 99 e Long Date Long Date Example January 10 1999 e Julian Date Julian Date Example 99010 e Custom Date Custom Date 52 Designing Formats Allows you to create your own custom format for the date MM Numeric Month mm Numeric Month with suppressed zero MMM Abbreviated Name of Month MMMMMMMMM Month Name DD 2 Digit Day of Month DDD 3 Digit Day of Year YY 2 Digit Year Y 1 Digit Year WW 2 Digit
419. tion allows you to review the properties for a field You may then make changes or simply view the properties without making changes For box and line fields this will be equivalent to the Move Field option For pictures the field may be resized as well as repositioned The screen will now change to show the selected field s Property dialog box They will be displayed in the same format as when the field was defined When you have made the desired changes and have chosen to make the changes effective by selecting the OK button the screen will return to the format display and you may re position the field or leave it in the same position The updated field will be re displayed with its new attributes Edit BACK to TOP 91 View Print Queue The Print Queue is a job staging area for your various printing jobs The Print Job files reside on the hard disk The software manages these files and loads a new job after each job is completed until it has exhausted the Print Queue This will allow you to load an entire day s work at the start of a shift Log Reader Starting the Log Reader Opening Viewing a User Log Printing a User Log Starting the Log Reader To Start the Log Reader click the Start the User Log Reader icon on the function toolbar You will be presented with a log on dialog box Enter your User Name and Password and then click OK to start the Log Reader Opening Viewing a User Log Open a User Log by clicking t
420. tion options W Instructs the program to ENABLE monitoring mode AN Instructs the program to DISABLE monitoring mode If Command File Monitoring was enabled within Program Configuration Options this switch parameter will override the current setting D Instructs the program to display the format to the screen S Instructs the program to print one command file job at a time Subsequent command file jobs are not read until the current job has completed printing R nnn Allows you to specify a starting record where nnn is the record number If the R switch parameter is specified on the command line you will need to give a starting record number If the R switch parameter is not specified on the command line starting record is 1 and starting record number applies to nnn above when a R switch is specified as a parameter For example to run the software using the Command File c wineasy store cmd where c wineasy is where the software was originally installed and to start with the first record at the DOS prompt type c wineasy easy store To run the same Command File and start at the fifth record type win c wineasy easy store R 005 328 Advanced To run the same Command File with monitoring mode enabled type win c wineasy easy store W If the software is configured for User Signon the U and the P switch parameters can be used to by pass the Signon dialog box U id Allows you to specify a User Id
421. tions Normal left to right Bottom to top Upside down right to left Top to bottom Field Contrast The field can be printed normal black print on white background or reverse white print on black background Maintain Aspect Ratio Selecting Yes for this option will allow pictures to maintain their original aspect ratio Selecting No will allow pictures to be stretched to fill the available defined field size Enable Printing Select Yes to print the field on the format Select No to display the field on the format but do not print the field Select Conditional to specify a print criterion for the field Field Color When designing a label for a COLOR printer you can add a color to a monochrome picture Select a color from the available choices in the directions When the picture field is printed the picture will be printed in the selected color This item will only appear if the selected picture was not originally saved as a color graphic 75 Printed Documentation BACK to TOP Adding a Circle or Ellipse Field Adding a Circle Horizontal Enable Printing Field Width Field Height Line Thickness Fill Pattern Gray Level Adding a Circle or Ellipse You will be instructed to define the location and size of the circle or ellipse then place it on the format You will need to move the pointer to increase or decrease the size of the circle or ellipse The circle will appear on the display as you use the mouse o
422. to Printer Memory If a memory cartridge is installed select the option corresponding to the memory module that is inserted into the top cartridge slot A memory module is required in the Tharo 112 printer to store picture information and TrueType fonts If the memory module is not present the printer will still work but any graphic that is downloaded will not be printed Direct Print Select direct print to send data directly to the port For a shared or network printer be sure direct print is not selected This option appears for those printers that can be configured for parallel printing This option only appears when using Windows 95 98 or ME Cutter Select Cutter Installed or Not Installed to designate cutter availability While designing the format if a cutter is indicated as being installed on the printer you may choose e Donotcut e Cut after each Format e Cut after each Batch e Cut after each Job Darkness Adjustment Adjust the base level of print darkness Negative numbers make the print lighter Offset Adjustment Adjust the form edge offset Offset adjustment is the number from 99 to 999 needed to change the formats starting print position Negative numbers will move 243 Printed Documentation the starting position down from the top of the format Positive numbers will move the starting position up towards the top of the format Translucent Ribbon Allows you to configure for colored ribbons with an
423. to disable the creation of print images globally without having to turn the option off in each individual format Tracking Report by Batch Selecting Yes will update the format tracking report for each batch of labels printed This can be used to record the data of RFID tags increment decrement fields and database printing Note that this will slow down the printing process The default setting of No will update the tracking report only at the end of the job BACK to TOP Printer Settings Use Ribbon Saver 28 Designing Formats Presentation Position Label Sensor Dot Expansion Print Speed Backfeed Speed Label Offset Memory Card Resolution Direct Thermal Download Bar Space Adjustment Print Mode e Batch Mode e Demand Mode e Tear Off Mode e Applicator Mode Print Darkness A number to set the desired print darkness the print head temperature setting Heat control allows you to enhance quality on some formats Choosing a higher number increases the darkness of the print Use Ribbon Saver Select Yes to enable the ribbon saver feature on the printer Select No to de activate the Ribbon Saver Presentation Position Use this function to advance the label past the print head for easier removal This function is mainly intended for on demand and tear off modes of printing After the label has been removed the printer will back feed the label stock lining up the leading edge of the label for the printing of
424. to the printer ePrinter Data File create a file which includes printer control characters eText File to create a fixed space ASCII text file Output to File Define the Name Path of the file to be created when Printer Data File or Text File is selected under Destination Font Setup Select No to use the default printer font Select Yes for the option to use a different font for this report Printer Setup Select No to use the current default printer options Select Yes to bring up the Windows Print Setup box This allows the user to select and configure which printer to send the format definition to Top Margin Enter the distance from the top of the paper to the beginning print position in inches or millimeters Left Margin Enter the HORIZONTAL OFFSET of the print image area from the left edge of the paper in inches or millimeters 157 Printed Documentation BACK to TOP Cross Hairs Using the Extended Cross Hairs can make field placement much easier A thin line is displayed vertically and horizontally on the format showing exactly where the pointer is at all times This allows easier use of the rulers to precisely place your field Align Align Left To Left Align multiple fields on a format select the relevant fields and chose the Align Left function Center Horizontally Used to precisely align the Horizontal Center Line of two or more fields on a format Choose the relevant fields and select the Center Horizontally
425. ttern matching You can substitute a percent or an underscore _ character for a whole word a group of characters or a single character A percent sign represents a whole word or any GROUP of characters in the data The underscore _ represents any SINGLE character in the data See Examples Bar Code Width Magnification Allows you to enter a value in the range of 1 99 to magnify the narrow and wide bar sizes This option is only available for Datamax I Class and W Class printers Random Weight Check Digit Select Yes to enable the random weight check digit Please note that when selecting Yes your screen image will not match your printed output This option applies to UPC EAN and is available for the Apollo A Series printers only BACK to TOP Source Data Fixed Fixed Data Edit Control Characters 106 Insert Fixed Data Enter the exact data that you wish to be printed in the field Edit Click Edit to display a text editor Control Characters Choose from a list of predefined characters to be included in the data of defined fields When Printed What is a When Printed field The field data is variable When you print the format you will be prompted to fill in the value of the field It can be changed for each set of formats that are printed For a text field your input may come from the keyboard a serial port a Command File or a wedge type bar code scanner For a paragraph field you will type in t
426. tware Instructions Thirteen digits must be entered for the linear GS7 DataBar Limited If thirteen digits are not entered leading zeros will be added When creating a composite barcode a pipe symbol needs to be inserted between the data that will be in the linear barcode and the 2D barcode Example Using the data 1501234567890 will create a standard GS7 DataBar Limited with a human readable of 01 15012345678907 The 01 is the Application Identifier and the last 7 is the check digit 01 15012345678907 When creating a composite barcode data such as 0351234567890 21abcdefghijklmnopqrstuv the 0103512345678907 will be encoded in the linear part of the barcode and 21abcdefghijklmnopqrstuv will be in the 2D portion of the composite barcode 01 03512345678907 GS1 DataBar Expanded Expanded Stacked Description Formally known as RSS Expanded Expanded Stacked 377 Printed Documentation The GS7 DataBar Expanded barcode is a variable length symbology capable of encoding up to 74 numeric or 41 alpha characters This symbology does allow for a Data Identifier Instructions All Data Identifiers must be added manually when using the Expanded symbology When creating a composite barcode a pipe symbol must be used when separating the data between the linear and 2D barcodes Using a value of 4 or less in the Segments per Row an Expanded Stacked barcode will be created Example Using the data 019061414100001532
427. ue allow jobs to run and add job later The name is reserved please enter another field name The total field height is too large please change Appendices The total field width is too large please change There is no data required for this format Too large please reenter Too small please reenter Type Mismatch in Index Expression O Unable to find file Unable to load module Unbalanced Quote A phrase in the command file is missing a quote Undefined Field Name Used Attempt to use a field name that is not defined Any error message that is not included in the list above indicates an internal program failure Please report any such error to your Reseller BACK to TOP Appendix B Application Notes Sell By Date Formats Printed Report The Save As Function Uploading of Report Advanced Database TRUEDATE Files Functions TRUETIME o TRUECOUNT Sell By Date Sell by Date can be created on the format by using one of the following 3 methods 1 The first method will require three fields of which the first two may be phantom fields Field One has as its Source of Date Print Date Choose under Special Formatting 1 Short Date 10 Jan 93 or 3 Julian Date 93010 Field Two is the numeric amount that when added to Field One will give the Sell by Date 385 Printed Documentation Field Three printed on the format should have as its Source of Data Arithmetic add and subtract only A
428. uest Queue 266 Printing The printer should be turned on and in the ON LINE READY mode prior to sending jobs to the printer It takes only a few moments to send the necessary commands to the Print Queue but the printer will print until the task is complete You may continue to add new formats to the Print Queue change format data scan barcodes view the Print Queue or quit to the previous menu The formats will continue printing until the task is complete If you completely leave the program a dialog box will appear informing you that the print queue is still active You have 3 choices Yes Selecting Y will save the Print Queue Only those jobs not currently printing will be saved Later when you come back into the software the Print Queue will be restored No Selecting N will clear all jobs in the Print Queue Cancel Selecting Cancel or pressing ESC will allow you to continue your session Once you have selected the format to be printed the format will be read in and displayed Next you will be prompted for any variable data to be used to fill all variable fields The format display will now be updated to show the format as it will look when printed After entering any variable data click on the Printer button The Print Request screen will appear BACK to TOP Printing a New Format Highlight the name of the format that you wish to print and click Open BACK to TOP Print Request Hold Job i Number of i 7
429. ufacturer of the printer from the list provided Printer Model Select the model of printer to be used Type of Port Select the type of port the device is attached to The options are Serial Parallel USB Network Windows or IP Some of these options may or may not be available based on the supported capabilities of the printer selected Port Select the port to which the printer is attached For Parallel printing available choices are LPT1 LPT2 and LPT3 Direct Print Select direct print to send data directly to the port For a shared or network printer be sure direct print is not selected This option appears for those printers that can be configured for parallel printing This option only appears when using Windows 95 98 or ME Darkness Adjustment Enter a number from 4 to 4 to adjust the base level of print darkness Negative numbers make the print lighter Paper Ribbon Out While printing a situation may occur where the Gemini will run out of label or ribbon stock When this occurs a message dialog box will appear explaining that there is an error on the printer The type of error condition and the number of unprinted labels will be displayed along with the following message Please correct the printer error then Press OK After replacing the paper or ribbon stock click OK The printer will automatically resume printing BACK to TOP Gemini Notes 240 Printing Format Specification Paper Ribbon Out Format
430. um number of characters in the field Design Test Value This option allows users to specify either a narrower character width or the default character width of a text field by typing in a string of characters that more precisely represents the actual printed data For this option press TAB to leave this entry BLANK or type in a string of characters which represents a narrower character width for the field Leaving this entry blank designates that you want to use the default screen and field width representation Typing in a string of characters allows you to more precisely represent the actual printed data which can allow more characters to define on a line Field Fill With this option set to Yes if less characters are inputted than specified for the maximum field length the characters will be bigger in both height and width Select No for normal operation Force Fit 63 Printed Documentation When designing paragraph or Multi source block text fields you can enable the Force Fit option This option will allow the font size to shrink or grow so that the text best fills the available field area Once this option is enabled you will be prompted to enter the upper and lower limits for the text height The upper limit is determined by the value entered in the Max Fit Height prompt the text will grow no larger than this value The lower limit is determined by the value entered in the Min Fit Height prompt the text will not shrink
431. umns for the last database field will be ignored If a record contains less data than required for the database record then the record beyond will be padded with blanks to fill the remainder of the database record 304 Databaseview Sample text file to be appended to a database John 1234 Main Street Chicago Illinois Smith Bill Jones 810 West Blvd Detroit Michigan Bob 1112 Euclid Avenue Cleveland Ohio Cooper Michael Goldsmith123 North LorainAve GrandHavenNew York If your database table has a primary key defined any records being appended with the same primary key will overwrite the existing records in that database BACK to TOP Refresh Record The Refresh Record works like a multi step undo function Clicking the Refresh Record button on the Standard toolbar or selecting View Refresh from the menu bar will undo all of the changes that were made to the record that is currently being edited Once the data has been saved Refresh Record will no longer have an effect Tool Bars There are three tool bars available within the software that make accessing many of the functions a one step process These three tool bars are outlined below Standard Tool Bar The Standard Tool Bar provides the following functions e New Open Create a New Table Data Source Save Print Cut 305 Printed Documentation Copy Paste Cross Reference Wizard Path Browser Undo Sort Ascending Sort Descending Find Add New Del
432. us media with no gaps Print Area Height The height of the actual printable area on the format in inches and hundredths of inches or in millimeters if the ruler is set to millimeters Print Area Width The width of the actual printable area on the format in inches and hundredths of inches or in millimeters if the ruler is set to millimeters Number Across Indicates the number of labels across the web page width Vertical Separation Enter the vertical distance between the top of one format and the top of the next format in inches and hundredths of inches This value must be at least 1 10th of an inch 10 greater than the Print Area Height Horizontal Separation The distance from the left edge of the first format to the left edge of the next format Left Margin Enter the horizontal offset of the print image area from the left edge of the paper in inches and hundredths of inches Top Margin Enter the distance from the top of the paper to the beginning print position in hundredths of inches or tenths of millimeters Set Background Color Select Yes if you wish to set a label background color and then select the color you wish to use in the Format Background prompt below This option only appears for Windows printer drivers 33 Printed Documentation Format Background Select a color to be used as the color for the label background When printing the label the background of the label will be printed this color This
433. verview The European Article Numbering system EAN is a superset of UPC and was initially introduced in 1977 by an EAN association of EEC countries that included France Germany England Belgium Luxembourg Denmark Finland Norway Sweden Switzerland Italy Holland and Austria In 1978 Japan and Spain joined In 1989 Australia also joined EAN has two versions EAN 8 and EAN 13 encoding 8 and 13 digits respectively An EAN 13 symbol contains the number of bars as UPC Version A but encodes a 13th digit from the character set pattern of the left hand 6 digits in the same manner as the encodation of the check digit in a UPC Version E symbol Specifications Character Set 0 9 Encodation Two bars and two spaces are required to encode a character Start Stop Pattern Always starts and stop with 3 elements a narrow bar narrow space and narrow bar Code Type Modular fixed length thirteen digits with EAN 13 eight digits with EAN 8 Human Readable EAN 13 all thirteen digits required EAN 8 eight digits required the Flag Character Numbering System Character and the Check Digit are implied 341 Printed Documentation Check Digit Required Modulus 10 calculation Encoded Information Flag Character Country Code Two to three digits Manufacturer Identification Number Four to five digits Product Identification Number Five digits Check Digit One digit Allowable Sizes Sizes for the EAN 13 are determined b
434. will cause the character string to be centered within the defined print area That is if the contents of the field contain less characters than the maximum the characters will be moved so they are centered in the field s area 141 Printed Documentation Other options available are Right Justify Left Justify and Full Justify Full Justify will adjust the spacing between words so that text aligns with both the left and right margins Options may vary based on the printer used Increment Decrement Field The following options are available e Increment e Decrement e Constant Increment Decrement Sequence The custom incrementation option allows you to define a specific sequence of characters to increment or decrement Valid characters are the digits 0 9 and the letters A Z See Examples Type of Increment The type of incrementation to be done on the field Either Numeric Alphabetic Alphanumeric Hexadecimal Octal or Custom Change Amount The numerical amount by which to increment or decrement the field Increment Decrement Maximum Enter the maximum value the field can reach before rolling over to the minimum value Increment Decrement Minimum Enter the value the field should be reset to after reaching the maximum value 142 Insert Update Database Select Yes to have the database updated after each job This will reflect the last value of the incremented decremented field Select No to leave the database
435. x 81c Dip Switches The CAS 81C 8 way Switch Box is equipped with a set of 8 position or 10 position Dip Switches as follows Western Telematic Switchbox 161a Dip Switches Western Telematic Switchbox 41 41a 161a Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switchbox 81c Cable Configuration Western Telematic Switch Box Printer Assignments 214 Printing If a third CAS 41 Code Activated Switch is connected to the PC above printer assignments would be 9 through 12 The same would be true for the CAS 161A where the first switch box would go to Printers 1 through 16 the second switch box would go to Printers 17 through 32 and if a third switch box is connected it would go to Printers 33 through 48 BACK to TOP Printronix Notes RS 232 Communications Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Protocol XON XOFF NO STAT Memory Card Installation To install a memory cartridge 1 Insert a 1 MB or 2MB memory cartridge into the top cartridge slot in the T3306 NOTE The software only recognizes the top slot 2 Configure the software to recognize the cartridge e Choose File Printer Setup e Choose Printronix ThermaLine T3306 as your printer model O Select Printer RAM from the Options Tab and specify the memory cartridge that you have Printed Documentation MaxiCode When using MaxiCode with Printronix printers that support it data must be entered in the following format CCCSSSHZZZ
436. y a magnification factor which is based on the X dimension size These magnifications range from 80 to 200 of the normal size 1 46 inches in width 1 020 inches in height X dimension 13 mils EAN UCC 13 History and Overview The European Article Numbering system EAN is a superset of UPC and was initially introduced in 1977 by an EAN association of EEC countries that included France Germany England Belgium Luxembourg Denmark Finland Norway Sweden Switzerland Italy Holland and Austria In 1978 Japan and Spain joined In 1989 Australia also joined Today many other countries have joined and EAN 13 is used worldwide for marking retail goods It encodes 13 characters the first two to three digits are flag characters which represent a country code followed by 10 data digits and a checksum EAN has two versions EAN 13 and EAN 8 encoding 13 and 8 digits respectively An EAN 13 symbol contains the number of bars as UPC Version A but encodes a 13th digit from the character set pattern of the left hand 6 digits in the same manner as the encodation of the check digit in a UPC Version E symbol Specifications Character Set 342 Bar Code Information 0 9 Encodation Two bars and two spaces are required to encode a character Start Stop Pattern Always starts and stop with 3 elements a narrow bar narrow space and narrow bar Code Type Modular fixed length thirteen digits with EAN 13 eight digits wit
437. y have an operator answer prompted questions at the time of printing you may call the information in from a file at the time of printing or you may use the save as function The save as function will allow you to create a format along with the variables in it and rename and save it repeatedly each time with new values for the variables You may do this for the entire product list of your company Therefore the only operator action required at the time of printing would be to call in a specific format and request the appropriate quantity be printed Uploading of Report Files 386 Appendices In certain situations it may be beneficial to transfer report files to a host system This is accomplished with the write text file function in the report section After you have converted the report file to an ASCII text file any communications package which allows for file transfer between PC and host will be able to send this file A simple routine on the host system can then insert this information into your host database Advanced Database Functions The advanced database functions provide the ability to embed graphics and text files specific to a database record Refer to adding a database for more information Some applications require special files to be part of a specific record Files such as graphics and multi line text files can be defined for a specific record or for multiple records This saves time and reduces operator error

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

GAGGIA Classic Coffee  Philips Pressurised steam generator GC8380/02  見たい情報が視界にあると、 仕事は変わる。  Colonnes BPG - GE Healthcare Life Sciences  Hydraulic Through Frame Slide    Franke SM 981 M XS  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file